Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
PORT OF FUJAIRAH,
FUJAIRAH, UAE
VOLUME 3-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BUILDINGS
Report 13048-TD-02-VOL3-5; rev.00 dated 14-02-2017
Project: Service Harbour Marine Works and Buildings, Port of Fujairah, Fujairah,
UAE
Volume 1
Tender and Contract
13048-TD-02-VOL1
Volume 2
Price
13048-TD-02-VOL2
Volume 3
Employer s Requirements
Volume 3-1
General Requirements
13048-TD-02-VOL3-1
Volume 3-2
Performance Requirements
13048-TD-02-VOL3-2
Volume 3-3
Technical Specifications Marine Civil
13048-TD-02-VOL3-3
Volume 3-4
Technical Specifications Marine Topside
13048-TD-02-VOL3-4
Volume 3-5
Technical Specifications Buildings
13048-TD-02-VOL3-5
Volume 3-6
Tender Reference Drawings
13048-TD-02-VOL3-6
Volume 3-7
Approved Vendor List
13048-TD-02-VOL3-7
Volume 4
Data for Information
13048-TD-02-VOL4
Contents of report 13048-TD-02-VOL3-5; rev.00; dated 14-02-2017
The Contractor shall judge for himself the nature of the ground and shall be ful
ly responsible for
ascertaining all necessary information concerning strain, permanent water table,
periods of rainfall, flooding
of the site and all matters affecting the excavations and foundation work. No ex
tra will be allowed due to
want of knowledge in this respect.
The methods of excavation which the Contractor desires to use shall be at the so
le discretion of the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall confirm to the Engineer that excavations are ready to recei
ve foundation concrete
and shall obtain consent before depositing concrete. Any concrete deposited befo
re consent is given
may, at the Engineers request, be broken up and removed at the Contractors expen
se and the work reexecuted
at no extra cost to the Employer.
In the event of additional excavation being made deeper than required, the Contr
actor shall fill in the
excavated void to the correct profile with hardcore or with sulphate resistance
mass concrete as described
in the "Concrete Work" Section hereinafter, at his own expense, and to the satis
faction of the Engineer.
1.2 Original levels
A survey of the existing site excavation shall be made and the results of same s
ubmitted to the Engineer
before commencement of the work.
1.3 Site investigation report
Site investigation report has been carried out for the engineering design at the
consultancy stage. The
Contractor shall carry out his own further site investigation as required.
1.4 Excavation
Excavation shall be carried out in all materials and by whatever means are neces
sary accurately to the lines
and levels shown on the Drawings, or as ordered by the Engineer.
No blasting of any kind will be permitted without the written permission of the
Engineer. Slopes and
formation surfaces shall be trimmed true to line and the required profiles shall
be left well consolidated,
neat and smooth.
Any additional excavation occasioned by slips, falls, wash-ins, etc., shall be m
ade good at the
Contractor's expense with mass concrete or approved filling materials as ordered
by the Engineer's
Representative.
1.5 Finish of excavation and inspection
The Engineer's Representative shall inspect all the excavations before commencem
ent of further work and
the Contractor shall notify the Engineer's Representative when excavations are r
eady for inspection.
The Engineer's Representative may instruct the Contractor to test the bearing ca
pacity of the soil in the
bottom of excavations. Upon receipt of such instructions, the Contractor shall f
orthwith carry out such
tests as the Engineer's Representative may instruct.
No excavation shall be refilled nor any permanent work commenced until the forma
tion has been inspected
by the Engineer's Representative and his permission to proceed given.
1.6 Removal of water
The excavations shall at all times be kept free from storm water, percolating wa
ter or subsoil water by means
of de-watering Systems installed by the Employers previous contractor, and hande
d over to the Main
Contractor for continued operation. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and c
lear away on completion
any equipment necessary together with temporary drains and the like. Under no ci
rcumstances shall concrete
be poured, fill placed, pipes laid or appurtenances installed in excavations con
taining water.
1.7 Sheeting and shoring
Shoring shall be provided where required, at the excavations to ensure complete
safety against collapse of
soil at sides of excavations, to provide protection of workmen and to prevent da
mage to adjacent property,
structures, paving and utilities.
1.8 Storage and disposal of excavated material
Any additional excavated material shall be removed from site.
1.9 Utilities trench excavation
Utilities shall generally be installed in open cut trenches except that short co
nnections may be tunneled if in
the opinion of the Engineer's Representative, the pipe or duct can be safely and
properly installed and backfill
can be properly placed and compacted in such tunneled section.
Bottom of trenches shall be graded evenly to secure the required falls for pipes
and to ensure bearing over
the entire length of the pipe. Bottoms of trenches shall be firm undisturbed soi
l, other than topsoil and free
from rock, stones, hard substances, rubbish, and the like. Where rock, stones or
other hard materials occur,
these shall be removed for a depth of at least 150mm and the space back-filled w
ith selected sand or granular
material compacted in accordance with back- fill requirements. No such material
shall be excavated or backfilling
carried out without the approval of the Engineer's Representative.
1.10 Filling, back-filling and compaction
All filling material shall be imported. The imported filling material shall be s
and and obtained from an
approved source in accordance with the latest instructions issued by the Departm
ent of Municipalities
regarding the winning of material for filling. Imported filling material shall c
ontain no perishable or organic
rubbish and no particles. The maximum dry density of the material shall be not l
ess than 1600 kg/m.
Care shall be taken when filling or back-filling to avoid any wedging action or
eccentric action upon or
against the structure of the work. Before placing of fill, the surface of the su
b-grade shall be compacted at
optimum water content to the same percentage of maximum dry density required of
subsequent layers.
Filling and back-filling shall be placed in layers not exceeding 150mm thick (af
ter compaction). Each layer
shall be uniformly spread and shall be moistened or dried by aeration when requi
red to ensure the optimum
water content and shall be compacted uniformly by hand or machine methods of spe
cified density as
follows:-
Element
Compaction requirements
Filling under concrete beds, sidewalks and other bearing situations
At least 98% maximum dry density
Fill within 300mm, measured horizontally, of foundation walls,
retaining walls, edges of footings, and other below-grade vertical
surfaces. When machine compacted, compaction shall be by means
of a 6 ton smooth wheeled roller
At least 95% maximum dry density
Compaction requirements
The Engineer's Representative shall have the right to disapprove any compacting
device of inadequate
capacity or in his opinion, of type unsuited to the character of the material be
ing compacted. Heavy
equipment for spreading and compacting fill and back-fill shall not be operated
closer to walls than a
distance to the difference in height between the top of the footings and the lay
er being compacted
When back-filling behind retaining walls, basement walls and the like the said s
tructures shall be kept
propped during the complete operation. The hydraulic compaction of fill shall no
t be permitted and the backfilling
shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 150mm thick. Each layer shall be co
mpacted to 90% of the
modified compaction. No back-filling shall be carried out until the wall concret
e has achieved its full works
cube strength and care shall be exercised so as not to damage the external tanki
ng membrane and its
protection.
Trenches shall not be back-filled until all required pressure tests have been pe
rformed and until the utility
systems, as installed, conform to the requirements of the Specifications governi
ng mechanical, electrical, and
utility work.
Field control density tests shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the E
ngineer's Representative to
determine the degree of compaction being obtained by field compaction procedures
during construction of
sub grade. Each lift of material placed by the Contractor shall be subject to th
e approval of the Engineer's
Representative. No material shall be placed on a prepared sub grade, without the
prior acceptance of the sub
grade by the Engineer's Representative. Sub grade shall be compacted throughout
to 98% of maximum
density at optimum moisture content.
If the material is too dry, immediate steps shall be taken to rectify the situat
ion and no additional materials
shall be placed until the compaction can be resumed and the required moisture co
ntent and densities required
can be met. If the material is too wet, compacting work and placement of additio
nal fill shall be delayed until
the material has dried to the extent that the required moisture content will be
required through the layer for
the particular soil involved, wetting or drying and manipulation of the material
will be required, if necessary,
to accomplish this objective. During the progress of the work, the Engineer's Re
presentative will inspect the
material as to type, condition, moisture content and densities, and may direct t
he location of its placement in
the fill. The compaction of each layer shall be completed both in widths and lon
gitudinal extent before the
next lift is started. The quantity of material being placed shall not exceed the
capacity of the compaction
equipment. The Contractor shall make "in place" density and moisture determinati
ons and the Engineer's
Representative will approve the compaction and moisture contents of each layer.
The distribution of
materials shall be such that the compacted materials will be free from lenses, p
ockets, streaks or other
imperfections. Based on unsatisfactory results of 'in place' density and other m
oisture tests, the Engineer's
Representative will require the Contractor to obtain the specified valued for th
ese items, including, if
necessary, replacement of work. The Contractor shall be responsible for the stab
ility of all fill made under
the Contract until the work has been accepted by the Engineer's Representative a
nd shall replace any portion
which, in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative has become displaced.
Compact fill shall consist of approved materials obtained either from excavation
s or from other approved
sources. Compacted fill shall comprise suitable granular materials well graded a
nd shall not include
perishable matter or an excess of fines and should give a dense fill layer.
The material shall be free of organic matter and have the following properties:
Minimum Soaked CBR of 15% when he material is compacted to 95% of the maximum dr
y density.
Insitu CBR of 10% when the compacted layer is field tested at site. Liquid Limit
not more that 35% and
plasticity index not more than 6%. Linear Shrinkage not exceeding 3%
Water Soluble Salts not more than 0.5% by weight of dry material.
Maximum Particle Size not more than 75 mm; max passing sieve No.200 < 30%
Lab CBR Tests as determined by Test 16, BS 1377 Sulphate Content as per BS 1377
0.5% maximum.
Chloride Content as per BS 812 1% maximum. Field Density Test as determined by T
est 15B of BS 1377
Maximum Dry Density at Optimum Moisture Content as determined by Test 13, BS 137
7, but not less
than 1600 kg/m3.
Liquid Limit as determined by BS 1377 1975: 2.2 (Test 2 A: Preferred method usin
g the cone
penetrometer)
Prior to any approval of the source of fill material, tests will be performed to
ascertain that the material
complies with the above minimum requirements. Subsequently if different material
is to be used other than
the approved one, new tests shall be carried out.
Tests for Density and Compaction
The following gives the minimum testing required for fill. Additional or more fr
equent tests may be required
if materials vary or workmanship is inconsistent:
. Laboratory tests for MDD, optimum moisture contents, for each layer.
. Field density and moisture content, insitu CBR, for each layer as required by
the Engineer.
The areas shall be rejected if the resulting test results do not satisfy specifi
ed requirements.
1.11 Soil Improvement by vibro compaction
Vibro-compaction is a ground improvement technique that densifies clean, cohesio
n-less granular soils by
means of a down-hole vibrator.
The vibrator is typically suspended from a crane and lowered vertically into the
soil under its own weight.
Penetration is usually aided by water jets integrated into the vibrator assembly
. After reaching the bottom of
the treatment zone, the soils are densified in lifts as the probe is extracted.
During vibro compaction, clean
sand back-fill is typically added at the ground surface to compensate for the re
duction in soil volume
resulting from the densification process. The vibratory energy reduces the inter
-granular forces between the
soil particles, allowing them to move into a denser configuration, typically ach
ieving a relative density of 70
to 85 percent. The treated soils have increased density, friction angle and stif
fness. Compaction is achieved
above and below the water table.
The improved soil characteristics depend on the soil type and gradation, spacing
of the penetration points and
the time spent performing the compaction. Generally, the vibro compaction penetr
ation spacing is between
1.8 m and 4.3 m, with centers arranged on a triangular or square pattern. Compac
tion takes place without
setting up internal stresses in the soil, thus ensuring permanent densification.
The use of clean sand back-fill during vibro compaction allows the original site
elevation to be maintained.
However, on sites where the planned final grade is below the existing grade, low
ering of the site elevation
may be desirable. In these instances, the ground surface is allowed to subside d
uring the compaction effort.
Vibro-compaction permits the use of economical spread footings with design beari
ng pressures generally of
240 kpa up to 480 kpa .Settlement and seismic liquefaction potentials are reduce
d. The required treatment
depth is typically in the range of 4.5 to 15 m. Examples of previously performed
applications include
increasing bearing capacity, decreasing settlement and mitigating liquefaction f
or planned structures,
embankments, railways and roadways.
Active utility lines damaged during the course of construction operations shall
be repaired or replaced as
determined by the Engineer's Representative at the Contractor's expense.
Immediately, when an active utility line is damaged, the Contractor shall notify
the Engineer's
Representative and the utility owners by telephone and in writing.
1.13 Safety of adjoining existing buildings/structures
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during the excavation for th
e Works particularly those
excavation which are adjoining existing buildings/structures and shall protect s
uch buildings/structures
from the damage or collapse by means of temporary or permanent shoring, struttin
g, sheet piling or
underpinning or excavation in short lengths and/or other methods as he deems fit
also he shall properly
support all foundations, trenches, walls, floors, etc. affecting the safety of t
he adjoining existing
buildings/structures.
The Contractor shall alter, adopt and maintain all such works described above fo
r the whole period of
the Contract and shall finally clear away and make good all damages done.
The construction and efficiency of the shoring, underpinning, strutting and the
like for the purpose for
which it is erected shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, should any su
bsidence or any other
damage occur due to the inefficiency of the shoring, underpinning, strutting and
the like or any other
support provided, the damage shall be made good by the Contractor at his own exp
ense and
responsibility.
The shoring, strutting, piling and the like, shall be executed in such a manner
as to cause as little
inconvenience as possible to adjoining owners or the public and the Contractor s
hall be responsible for
negotiating with the adjoining owners the means to safeguard their property and
for the use of any
portion of their land for the purpose of executing the excavations and no claims
submitted on this
ground will be entertained.
The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the safety of the adjoining
existing
buildings/structures the sufficiency of all temporary or permanent shoring, unde
rpinning, piling, and the
like. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer informed as to manner in which he i
ntends to proceed with
the execution of the excavations and obtain his approval, such approval if given
shall not absolve the
Contractor of his responsibility under this Clause.
The Contractor shall save harmless and indemnify the Employer in respect of all
claims, demands,
proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever arising out of or i
n relation to any such
matters in so far as the Contractor is responsible under this Clause.
1.14 De-watering
Surface water and ground water shall be prevented from flowing into excavations
and from flooding
the project site and surrounding areas.
Water shall not be allowed to accumulate in excavations and the Contractor shall
provide and maintain
pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other de-watering sy
stem components
necessary to continuously convey water away from excavations.
Temporary drainage systems, pumps and/or other diversions outside excavation lim
its shall be established
and maintained to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to discha
rge locations.
Surface and subsurface water encountered in the course of the work shall be coll
ected and properly
disposed of.
The Contractor shall maintain adequate supervision and control, to ensure that s
tability of excavated and
constructed slopes are not adversely affected by water, erosion is controlled; f
looding of excavation or
damage to structures does not occur.
The Contractor shall ensure that groundwater removal will not cause settlement o
f adjacent soil, or any
displacement, settlement or damage to permanent and temporary works, existing st
ructures, roads, utilities
and other property. He shall monitor conditions at all times to determine that n
o soil or fines is removed in
the pumped water which would cause displacement, settlement or damage.
The water pumped from the excavations or well points shall be conveyed to a disc
harge location approved
by the Local Authorities. Under no circumstances may water be disposed of in the
Municipality's foul
sewer system.
The surface of the blinding shall be floated smooth to receive the building wate
rproofing system or
polythene sheeting in other areas.
1.17 Polythene Sheeting
Cover the whole of the area beneath concrete slabs, other than the raft foundati
on, and elsewhere directed by
the Engineer with polythene sheeting. The polythene shall be 1000 gauge nominal
weight 0-94 kg per sq
meter manufactured by a manufacturer and shall be approved by the Engineer.
The sheet shall be supplied in rolls and laid by rolling over the prepared base
at the levels and in the areas
shown on the drawings. Joints at the side or end of a sheet shall be 450mm wide
double welts made by
placing the edges together and folding over twice. The joints shall be prevented
from opening prior to
concreting by blocks placed at intervals on top of the joint.
The Contractor shall protect the sheets from damage during laying and subsequent
operations and shall
replace all damaged sheets to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.18 Bitumen treatment/protection
Unless shown otherwise, all surfaces of concrete or block work shall be painted
with 3 coats of bitumen.
This shall be cold applied by rollers to give a minimum thickness of 2mm to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.19 Protective membrane to U/G reinforced concrete structures
All surfaces of foundations, or where indicated on drawing shall be protected by
a proprietary waterproof
membrane system as described in Particular Specifications. The membrane is to be
specified and to be
protected by protective board to the approval of Engineer.
1.20 Depth of foundations
The foundations shall be the minimum depth below original ground level shown on
the drawings and soil
investigation report.
1.21 Anti-termite treatment
General
Work shall be carried out by a qualified specialist sub-contractor registered in
the UAE. The specialists subcontractors
shall be from the list of approved manufacturers / suppliers or equal approved.
The Sub-contractor shall be responsible for all the pre and post termite treatme
nt for the construction. The
Sub-contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for and provide all necessa
ry attendance to the Pest
Control Section, if required.
The Sub-contractor shall carry out the pre and post treatment work for anti-term
ite control to include the
whole of the site areas within the areas defined by the contract limit lines.
Scope of Works
The Contractor shall survey the sites before tendering to ascertain the nature a
nd extent of the work involved
for anti-termite treatment and any conditions and restrictions likely to affect
the execution of the works.
Work consequent upon treatment, but not included in the tender, is to be clearly
identified as such. The
Contractor shall ensure that the sites are adequately prepared before treatment
commences.
Prior to application of the treatment on site all chemical dilution samples and
computations shall be
submitted for approval with a copy of the submission furnished to the Engineer.
A work program shall be prepared taking into account and coordinating all other
related works and shall be
submitted for the Engineer s approval.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit a list of chemicals and their respective manufac
turers technical literature.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit a Method Statement for carrying out the works to
the Engineer for approval
and the works shall be carried out as per the method statement.
The Sub-Contractor shall keep all the working areas clean and shall keep all che
micals and tools/machineries
in a safe place each day after works are completed.
Clear warning notices shall be posted at the entrance to the site during treatme
nt operations and immediately
following completion. The sign shall show the name of the pesticide being utiliz
ed and date of application.
Materials shall include the supply of all chemicals, water, tools, equipment, ma
chineries, protective clothing
and emergency items and clear procedures to be followed for health and safety in
case of accident including
all necessities to complete the application effectively and safely.
The Contractor shall prepare as built drawings for walls, floor slabs and other
areas treated with residual
chemicals and shall submit 4 copies of the drawings to the Engineer, together wi
th Contractors guarantee
certificate.
The Contractor shall provide 4 copies of all documents for submission to the Eng
ineer as required, unless
specified otherwise.
Procedures
All pre and post termite treatment works shall be in accordance with the best in
ternational pest control
practices, paying special attention to safety of workers carrying out the works
and all staff and personnel
within the construction site.
Specifically, all chemicals, equipment, machineries used or supplied and all wor
kmanship shall be in
accordance with the appropriate practices of the British Pest Control Associatio
n (BPCA) and the National
Pest Control Association of the United States of America (NPCA) and the related
requirement of the World
Pest Control Organization (WPCO) and the European Community Council (ECC) guidan
ce directives on the
use of pesticides, unless otherwise approved.
The Sub-Contractor shall note that the Engineer does not have suitably qualified
and certified personnel to
make any recommendations on the use and choice of pesticides and such responsibi
lity shall remain solely
with the Sub-Contractor.
The Sub-Contractor shall obtain the advice of a suitably qualified person prior
to the use of any pesticide.
Such advice shall be taken into account in all respects and full details and rec
ommendations shall be
provided to the Engineer prior to the application of pesticides on the site.
The Sub-Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the choice, application and
storage of any pesticides
utilized for the works all of which shall conform to standard practices recogniz
ed by BPCA and/or NPCA or
as approved.
The Contractor shall use a qualified and locally certified technician and operat
or to apply the pesticides in
accordance with all local and international legislation.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer 3 weeks minimum notice on the proposed ap
plication of pesticides,
giving details of the purpose, chemical dose rate, method of application, propos
ed application dates, and 4
copies of the appropriate current product information.
The Contractor shall keep full and accurate records of all pesticides used. Reco
rds after each application and
a summary recorded at the end of the contract shall be provided to Engineer.
The Contractor shall dispose of all empty containers and unwanted chemicals incl
uding all surplus diluted
tanked mixture, to an off-site location approved by the Engineer.
All areas shall be made clean during and after work operations. No chemicals, di
luted solutions or equipment
shall be left unattended during and after working hours.
During lunch break, works are to be secured and supervised by visible sign board
s which shall be provided
before and after chemical applications. Contractor to prepare and submit pestici
de work safety program.
This program shall include the following:
Advise as to how pesticides can harm human beings, animals, vegetation. Instruct
ion, training and
supervision of pesticide workers.
Emergency care if an accident occurs.
Medical supervision routine following an accident or illness. Special instructio
ns restricting employees
handling toxic pesticides.
Personal hygiene.
Protective clothing.
Safety equipment (personal).
Safety requirements for pesticides application equipment. Maintenance of pestici
de application equipment.
Safety of field workers, general public, animals, vegetation and property. Prote
ction of the soil and
environment.
Copies of the following certificates shall be provided to the Engineer for accep
tance of the chemicals to be
utilized and a method statement for applications.
Certificate from any of the Emirates within the UAE to certify that the said app
licator company is an
authorized and certified pest control contractor.
Importation, transportation and any certification for all chemicals and material
s required by national and/or
local laws, unless otherwise approved.
If during the application of chemicals the weather condition changes making cond
itions unfavourable to
works being carried-out, the contractor should immediately stop the works and ap
ply the contingency plan
approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination of all pre and post termite tre
atment applications in relation
to the carrying-out of associated works on site.
Storage areas and protection of stored materials shall be agreed with the Engine
er in advance of the works.
During lunch break, the works are to be secured and supervised by a qualified me
mber of the staff.
Visible sign boards are to be provided before and after each application.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit a written, 10-year guarantee made out to the Own
er and jointly signed and
sealed by the main Contractor, guaranteeing safety of the building and surroundi
ng areas against termite
infestations.
2 PILING WORKS
2.1 Scope of work
The works comprise the construction of reinforced concrete piles in the position
s shown on the drawings.
2.2 Standards
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, and IBC-UPC.
Safety regulations throughout the piling operations shall comply with the standa
rds previously listed.
2.3 Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee unconditionally in writing that each and every pi
le installed will safely
carry the maximum working load as stated on the drawings. In addition he shall g
uarantee that a load of at
least 1.5 times the working load can be carried by each and every pile without p
rogressive settlement or
creep.
It should be noted that the performance of satisfactory pile tests on the site (
as specified below) does not
release the Contractor from responsibility, liability or consequence arising in
the future due to unsatisfactory
performance of the foundations which can be attributed to the piles
2.4 Spoil and rubbish removal
The Contractor shall include in his work for the prompt removal from site of any
spoil removed from the pile
bores and upon completion of the works shall clear away all spoil and rubbish an
d leave the site clean and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer
Concrete shall be placed in the piles using an approved tremie system. Where pil
es are concerted in water or
bentonite mud a tremie pipe must be used.
All piles shall contain a minimum of 6 number longitudinal bars with suitable he
lical binding. The bars are to
project a minimum of 1.0 m, as specified on the approved drawings, above the spe
cified cut-off level. The
actual quality and size of the reinforcement bars is to be specified by the Cont
ractor and is to be dependent
upon the loading conditions on the pile shaft.
2.10 Piling
The Contractor shall supply full details when tendering of the type and size of
pile offered, the standards
of control to be used and how the calculation and checking of the load bearing c
apacity and settlement of
the piles will be carried out.
The Contractor shall supply for approval all relevant details of the method of p
iling and the proposed plant
to be used. Any alternative designs to that shown on the tender drawings may be
submitted at tender for
the Engineer's consideration and approval.
Reinforced Bored Cast in-situ Piles
Bored piles shall be formed by boring in an approved method to a minimum of 1 me
ter or two diameters
(whichever is the greater) into a suitable foundation stratum as defined by the
Site investigation report and
approved by the Engineer. Throughout boring, the hole will be fully lined with a
steel casing to ensure whole
stability and avoid loss of or loosening of ground between piles. Where requeste
d by the Engineer any cores
recovered, arisings from boring will be laid out for examination.
On completion of boring, the pile base shall be thoroughly cleaned of all slurry
and loose material in a
manner to be approved by-the Engineer. The reinforcement cage will then be.place
d with appropriate spacers
to ensure that a minimum steel cover of 70 mm (or other cover as directed) is ma
intained throughout the pile.
Concrete will be placed by tremie pipe to the base of the hole and the tremie wi
ll be withdrawn so that its
base is never less than 1 meter below the top of the concrete until concreting i
s completed.
The Contractor shall ensure that when all piles are trimmed back to sound and un
contaminated concrete,
the trimmed level shall not be below the specified finished cut- off level as sh
own on the Engineer's
drawings.
Reinforced Bored Piles by Continuous Flight Auger Method
The construction of piles by the CFA method may only be adopted by prior agreeme
nt with the engineer.
This method may only be used on low rise projects.
During uncased boring with continuous flight auger , the feed forward and speed
(revolutions per minute)
are to be adjusted according to the soil conditions in a way that the excavation
of soil will be limited to a
quantity that the lateral support of the uncased borehole wall will be ensured .
While withdrawing the CFauger,
the auger has to be rotated in the same direction as during drilling into the so
il or has to be withdrawn
without rotation
The system and equipment used must ensure that neither water nor soil can enter
the hollow stem of the
CF -auger during drilling.
The inclination of piles should not exceed 6 degrees (10:1)
Bentonite shall be mixed thoroughly with clean fresh water to make a Suspension
which will maintain the
suitability of the pile excavation for the period necessary to place the water u
sed in mixing the bentonite
suspension and of the suspension when supplied to the borehole, shall be not low
er that 5(C
The frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure of sampling
shall be proposed by the
Contractor prior to the commencement of the work. The frequency may subsequently
be varied as required,
depending on the consistency of the results obtained.
Control tests shall be carried out on the bentonite suspension, using suitable a
pparatus. The density of
freshly mixed bentonite suspension shall be measured daily as a check on the qua
lity of the suspension
being formed. The measuring device shall be calibrated to read to within 0.005 g
/ml. Tests to determine
density, viscosity shear strength and pH value shall be applied to bentonite sup
plied to the pile boring. For
average soil conditions the results shall generally be within the ranges stated
in Table 1.
The tests shall be carried out until a consistent working pattern has been estab
lished, account being taken
of the mixing process, any blending of freshly mixed bentonite suspension and pr
eviously used
bentonite suspension and any process which may be used to remove impurities from
previously used
bentonite suspension. When the results show consistent behavior, the tests for s
hear strength and pH value
may be discontinued, and test to determine density and viscosity shall be carrie
d out as agreed with the
Engineer.
In the event of a change in the established working pattern, tests for shear str
ength and pH value shall be
reintroduced for a period if required.
Property to be measured
Range of results at 20' C
Test method
Density
Less than 1.10 g/ml
Mud density balance
Viscosity
30 - 90 s or less than 20 Cp
Shear strength
(10 minute gel strength)
1.4 - 10 N/m2
or
4-40 N/m2
Shear meter
pH
9.5 - 12
pH indicator
paper strips or electrical pH meter
Where the Fann viscometer is specified, the fluid sample should be screened by a
number 52 sieve (300 mu)
prior to testing.
3 CONCRETE WORKS
3.1 Concrete
Codes of practice
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities requirements.
The source of supply of cement shall be subject to the Engineer's approval and t
he Contractor shall at all
times furnish the manufacturer's certificates and proof that the required specif
ication has been complied
with together with a note of the date of manufacturer, certified by an independe
nt agency. The
Engineer shall have the power to reject a part of the whole of any consignment o
f cement if the
considers it to be unsuitable for use in the works.
The chemical composition of the cement shall comply with the standards as stipul
ated above an in addition
with the following requirements.
One brand as approved by the Engineer shall be used throughout the works unless
otherwise authorized by
the Engineer in writing.
Aggregates for Concrete
General
Aggregates for concrete shall consist of naturally occurring materials complying
with the requirements of
fine and coarse aggregates of BS 882 and as specified herein, except that for Cl
ass D concrete all-in
aggregate within the grading limits of Table 3 of BS 882 may be used. Approval o
f aggregate will not
prevent subsequent rejection if results of subsequent tests of not indicate comp
liance with the specified
requirements. The properties specified for aggregates in below points Nos. ii, i
ii & IV shall be for aggregates
form individual sources. The use of beach sand in mixes for reinforced concrete
is prohibited. The frequency
of testing aggregates shall be one test each 50 m or different batch of aggregate
s received at site. The CI test
shall be as per BS 812 (Part 117), S03 as per BS 812 (118) and water absorption
test as per BS 812
Fine Aggregate
The grading of fine aggregate shall be within the limits of Class C or M, table
5 BS 882: 1983 and the
percentage by weight passing BS 410 test sieve 300 m shall not be in excess of 3
0%.
The amount of deleterious material shall not exceed the following limits when de
termined by the ASTM
standard test stated below.
Clay Lumps & friable particles 1% by weight ASTM C142 Coal, Lignite & shells 1%
by weight ASTM
C123
Fine aggregate shall satisfy the requirements of ASTM C33 with regard to organic
impurities, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C40 and C87. Local sands contain aggressive salts, and it i
s essential to test the fine
aggregate to ascertain that the maximum quantity of acid soluble chlorides shall
not exceed 0.06% by weight
of fine aggregate and the maximum quantity of acid soluble sulphate shall not ex
ceed 0.4% by weight of fine
aggregate. The fine aggregates shall be washed with fresh water complying with B
S 3148 (1980) Unwashed
sand shall not be allowed under any circumstances for any part of the works.
When fine aggregate is subjected to five cycles of the sodium Sulphate Soundness
Test. ASTM C88, the loss
shall not exceed 10% of weight.
Fine aggregate shall be of such uniformity that the fineness modulus as defined
in AASHTO M6 shall not
vary more than 0.20 either way from finest modulus of the representative samples
used in the mix design.
The sand equivalent for fine aggregate (AASHTO T176) shall be a minimum of 70%.
The water absorption
of fine aggregate shall not exceed 2% (BS 812)
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse Aggregate shall be prepared as single size aggregate and blended to produ
ce normal size grading. The
combined grading of coarse aggregate shall be within the limits given in Table 1
of BS 882 for nominal size
of graded aggregate 20mm to 5mm.
The proportion of soft and friable particles in coarse aggregate shall not excee
d 1% when tested in
accordance with ASTM C142. The maximum quantity of acid soluble chlorides (C1) s
hall not exceed 0.03%
weight of coarse aggregate. The maximum quantity of acid soluble sulphate (SO3)
shall not exceed 0.4% by
weight of coarse aggregate. (BS 812 part 118). No organic matter of any nature s
hall be permissible to be
contained by the aggregates such as wood, paper, plastic, or any other matter. T
he standard test method for
organic matters shall be as per BS 1377 Test 8.
Chlorides (CI) - Max. 0.3% by weight of cement (OPC) and max 0.06% for SRC Sulph
ates (So3) - Max 4%
by weight of cement (including the sulphate in the cement)
Potential Aggregate-Cement Reactivity
If so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out petrographic anal
ysis in accordance with ASTM
33 and C295 on all aggregates proposed for use. Arising from such analysis the E
ngineer may require the
Contractor to perform further tests in accordance with ASTM C286 and BRE Digest
No. 35; also in
accordance with ASTM C227 and C586 if the Engineer so decides after his examinat
ion of the results of the
proceeding tests. In the event that tests in accordance with ASTM C227 are calle
d for, the cement used in the
test shall have an alkali content (expressed as sodium oxide + 0.658 potassium o
xide) greater than 0.8% by
weight of 2.25 to 1.0. Depending on the results obtained the Engineer may decide
to limit the alkali content
(Na20 and K20) of the cement to 0.6%.
Water
Unless otherwise authorized in writing by the engineer only water form portable
supply system may be used
for mixing concrete and other products containing cement. Similarly only portabl
e water conforming to BS
3148 (1980) may be used for curing purposes. No other source of water shall be a
llowed to be used for any
of the above purposes. The PH requirements of water shall be from 7 - 9. The ino
rganic impurities in water
shall not exceed the following:
Content
Property
Chlorides
600 mg/liters
Sulphates
500 mg/liters
Total dissolved solids
2000 mg/liters
Alkali Carbonate and Bicarbonate
1000 mg/liters
. Hot rolled mild, medium or high yield steel smooth round or deformed bars comp
lying with BS 4449 or
similar approved standard.
. Cold twisted bars complying with BS 4482 or similar approved standard.
. Steel fabric reinforcement complying with BS 4483 or similar approved standard
.
In case any other type of reinforcement is required, it shall comply with the re
quirements of the particular
specification.
All reinforcement shall be free of loose rust and mill scale and any coating suc
h as oil, clay, paint etc.,
which might impair the bond with the concrete. Steel reinforcement shall be stor
ed in clean conditions
and shall be protected from damage at all times. It shall be clean and free of l
oose rust, dirt, mud, loose
mill scale, paint, oil or all other foreign substances at the time of fixing in
position and subsequent
concreting.
The Contractor shall cut and bend bars to BS 4466 (or ACI (SP-66) and to schedul
e, if provided or
unless otherwise instructed by the Architect. Straight sections of bars must be
kept out of winding. The
internal radius of bends shall in no case be less than two times the diameter of
the bar. Great care is to be
taken to bend stirrups and blinders separately and to the sizes shown.
All bars will be bent cold on approved machines, and at temperatures in the rang
e of 5C to 100C.
Lengthening of bars by welding, and re-bending of incorrectly bent bars will not
be permitted, except
where requested by the Engineer.
Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in the position shown in the Contra
ct. Unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer, all bar intersections shall be tied together and the
ends of the tying wire shall be
turned into the main body of the concrete. 1.2mm diameter stainless steel wire s
hall be used throughout.
Cover Blocks (Buried Concrete Surfaces)
Concrete cover blocks required for ensuring that the reinforcement is correctly
positioned, shall be as small
as possible consistent with their purpose, of a shape acceptable to the Engineer
, and designed so that they
will not overturn when the concrete is placed. They shall be made of concrete wi
th 10mm maximum
aggregate size to produce the same strength as the adjacent concrete. Tying wire
complying with the
requirements of above topic e last paragraph shall be cast in the block for the
purpose of tying it to the
reinforcement.
Storage of material
Cement
The cement shall be stored in a weather proof shed used exclusively for this pur
pose. The shed shall be large
enough to allow proper aeration and effectual separation of the various consignm
ents, the old consignments
being used before the latter ones. Cement shall not be stored on site for more t
han 21 days; after this it must
be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. Alternatively, the cement
may be stored in a Silo, the
design of which has been approved by the Engineer.
All cement received shall be subjected to test at a frequency of one test each 5
0m or at change of source of
supply.
Aggregates
The aggregates are to be stored on a concrete slab in such a way that contaminat
ion from other materials and
inter-mixing of the various grading will be prevented. The aggregate shall be de
posited in a way that will
prevent segregation through dropping on to the peak of a high heap.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact that for some of the design mixe
s specified it may be
necessary in order to obtain the required cube strength with minimum cement cont
ent to store the aggregate
in different sizes so that they can be combined in the correct proportion at the
mixer.
Reinforcement
The reinforcement should be stored clear of the ground and should be protected f
rom contamination by other
materials.
Testing of Materials
(All tests to be carried out by an independent approved Lab.)
The costs of all tests required under this clause are to be met by the Contracto
r, whether the test results
show the materials to be satisfactory for the work or not.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer sufficient quantity of material prop
osed to be used for the
works, together with a list of suppliers to be employed. The Engineer's consent
in wiring shall be obtained
to all such samples and source of supply before any concreting work is put in ha
nd and no change
shall subsequently be made without the Engineer's approval. The Engineer shall h
ave access to all
sources of supply for the purpose of inspecting and taking samples of any materi
als which will be later
delivered to the site.
Cement
Cement will be tested at an approved testing station. Samples are to be taken fr
om each delivery of
cement as directed and conveyed by the Contractor to a testing station to the ap
proval of the Engineer, or
as specified.
Aggregate
All aggregates shall be tested by an approved testing laboratory at the beginnin
g of the work and for every
50m of aggregate or before any change is made in the source of supply during the
progress of the work
and the Engineer shall have approved the results of such tests before the prelim
inary test cubes are made.
The size of the sample shall be as required by the testing laboratory but in the
absence of specific
instruction two samples of not less than 12 kg.of fine aggregate and 50 kg. of co
urse aggregate shall
be quartered down from representative bulk samples for each test. Each sample sh
all clearly and durably
labeled to give the name of the supplier and of the pit of quarry and one of eac
h pair of samples shall be
sent to the laboratory for testing and one retained on the site for reference.
Reinforcement
Generally the manufacturer's test certification should be obtained with each del
ivery of reinforcement
but the Engineer reserves the right to request tests from an independent testing
station from time to time
or from every batch of steel delivered to site.
Testing Equipment
The Contractor shall provide:-
. Sufficient 150mm. cast iron cube moulds to enable him to carry out the require
ments of this specification.
. BS Slump Cone, base plate and tamping rod.
. Maximum and minimum thermometers, also thermometer to measure temperature of c
oncrete.
. Suitable graduated measuring tubes for measuring the moisture content of fine
aggregate.
. Suitable weighing scales
Grade of Concrete
A
B
C
D
E
Characteristic Strength 28 days N/mm2
40
35
25
15
60
Mixes to be designed for a mean strength (N/mm)
45
40
30
20
68
Slump Max (with Plasticizer or Super-plasticizer
100
100
100
120
120
Max water cement ratio
0.4
0.45
0.55
0.65
0.35
Minimum Cement (kg/m)
400
370
300
250
450
Nominal Maximum Size of aggregate
20mm
20mm
20mm
20mm
20mm
material
Standard
Cement
BS 12
Water
BS 3148 (Also as specified for concrete works)
Aggregates
BS 882
Admixtures
BS 5075 Part I
The concrete shall be mixed by machine to a uniform color and consistency before
placing. The quantity of
water used shall not exceed that required to produce a concrete with sufficient
work ability to be placed and
compacted in the required location.
When the mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the proportions,
the original source of the
cement and aggregates, or in the type, size and grading zone of the latter witho
ut the consent of the Engineer
who may require further tests to be made.
The Engineer may also require practical tests to be made on the site by filling
trial moulds to confirm the
suitability of the mix for the works. In these tests, the type of plant used for
mixing, the method of
compaction used, and the form-work face to the mould shall be similar in all res
pects to those intended for
use in the works.
When the Contractor intends to purchase factory-made precast concrete units, the
Engineer may dispense
with trial mixes and laboratory tests, provided that evidence is given which sat
isfies him that the factory
regularly produces concrete which complies with the Specification. The evidence
shall include details of mix
proportions, water-cement ratio, work-ability and strengths obtained at 7 and 28
days.
Mixing Concrete (for minor elements)
. The weighing and water-dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order
. Their accuracy shall
be maintained within the tolerances described in BS 1305 and checked against acc
urate weights and
volumes when required by the Engineer.
. The mass of cement and each size of aggregate indicated by the mechanisms empl
oyed shall be within a
tolerance of 28% of the respective mass per batch agreed by the Engineer. The ma
ss of the fine and
coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free water contained in the
m. The water to be added
to the mix shall be reduced by the quantity of free water contained in the fine
coarse aggregates, which
shall be determined by the Contractor by a method approved by the Engineer immed
iately before
mixing begins and further as the Engineer requires.
. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall be mixed in a batch ty
pe mixer manufactured in
accordance with BS 1305 or in a batch type mixer, a specimen of which has been t
ested in accordance
with BS 3963 and having a mixing performance within the limits of Table 6 of BS
1305 Where
appropriate the batch capacity, conform to the details furnished in accordance w
ith the requirements of
BS 3963 for the mix which corresponds most closely to the mix proportions being
used. The mixing
blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerances specified by the
manufacturer of the
mixer and the blades shall be replaced when it is no longer possible to maintain
the tolerances by
adjustment.
. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly
cleaned before any
fresh concrete is mixed, and unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the next b
atch of concrete
through the mixer shall contain only two-thirds of the normal quantity of coarse
aggregate. Mixing plant
shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of cement to another.
. The Contractor shall ensure that the constituent materials of the concrete are
sufficiently cool to prevent
the concrete from stiffening in the interval between its discharge from the mixe
r and compaction in its
final position.
Fig.1108 - effect of concrete and air temperatures, relative humidity, and wind
velocity on the rate of
evaporation of surface moisture from concrete.
All precautions to be taken shall be subject to the Engineer's approval and the
Contractor shall
demonstrate that all approved precautions are available for use prior to the Eng
ineer granting approval to
any concreting operation.
The temperature of the concrete when placed shall not exceed 32C or shall be conc
rete mixed or
placed when the shade air temperature is 40C or above, or is expected to reach su
ch a level during
concreting, without special permission from the Engineer.
Supervision of Concrete Work
The Contractor is to employ a qualified competent person whose main duty is to s
upervise all stages in the
preparation and placing of the concrete work.
Concrete Mixes - See Engineers Drawing "General Notes" which shall supersede the
specified mix in the
general specifications, if so instructed by the Engineer.
Sampling and testing of concrete
General
The cost, including transport to the testing station of all cube tests required
under this specification, it
to be met by the Contractor, whether the test results are satisfactory or not. T
he Contractor shall keep a set
of at least six cube molds on site at all times, together with a standard slump
cone.
Sampling
Sampling shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 1881 (method of Test
ing Concrete) at a
testing station approved by the Engineer.
Series A - one batch shall be sampled at random from every 50 cu.m of concrete p
laced. For strength tests
one sample shall be taken from each batch samples, from which six test cubes sha
ll be made, three of which
shall be tested at 7 days and three at 28 days.
Series B - batches shall be sampled at the direction of the Engineer. For streng
th tests three independent
samples shall be taken from each batch to be sampled, from each of which one tes
t cube shall be made.
Test cbes shall test at 7 days as directed.
The work-ability tests, one sample shall be taken at an early stage the discharg
e of each batch sampled
at the direction of the Engineer.
Testing
Test cubes shall be made, cured and tested in accordance with BS 1881 Parts 101,
108,111 & 116.
Where a batch has been sampled for the purpose of determining the workability of
the concrete, one
test shall be made on each sample using one of the following tests in accordance
with BS 1881 (1983) and
shall be within the following limits of the values for the accepted trial mix:
Slum
25mm or 1/3 of the trial mix value whichever is the greater
Compacting Factor
0.03
`V-B' Consistometer
3 seconds or 15% of the average time for the trial mix whichever is the greater
Concrete workability
Load Tests
Tests loads shall generally be in accordance with relevant clauses of CP-110-197
2, or in such other
manner as may be directed by the Engineer.
Records
Each cube shall be clearly marked showing from which part of the structure the c
oncrete was obtained
and the mix proportions used, and this information must be recorded on the repor
t sheet. An accurate
record is to be kept on site of all test made, indemnifying them to the various
parts of the work.
Work not upto standard
If any of the works tests are not upto standard, the Engineer shall be entitled
t stop the work until the reason
has been investigated and steps taken to prevent further low results.
Any concrete carried out from a batch that afterward appears to be faulty will b
e liable to rejection and,
if so directed, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, cut and replace the de
fective work, or take such
other measures as may be allowed to prove by means of test loading, at his own e
xpense, that the
concrete is capable of safely withstanding the prescribed stresses.
Quality control of concrete
General
The control of concrete quality shall satisfy the requirements of Clause 4.1.5 (
a to c).
Standard of Control
The Standard of control for structural concrete shall be such that not more than
5% of works concrete test
cubes shall have strengths which fall below the appropriate specified minimum st
rength. Compliance with
this standard of control shall be monitored by the methods described below.
As test results become available average values of test results and values of st
andard deviation shall be
determined on a continuing basis for Series A cubes taking 7 days and 28 days te
sts results separately, but in
each calculating the Standard deviation.
Until the relationship between 7 days strength and 28 days strength has been est
ablished to the satisfaction
of the Engineer, the assessment of control shall be based on the 28 day tests on
ly. The required standard of
control shall be deemed to have been attained if the average value of the 28 day
test results exceeds the
specified minimum strength as detailed on the drawing by not less than 1.64 time
s the standard deviation or
by 7.5N/mm for Grades C and above or by 5N/mm for Grade D, whichever is the greate
r. Where less than
40 tests results are available for the calculation of the standard deviation, th
e average of the 28 days test
shall exceed the specified minimum strength, by 15N/mm for Grades C and above or
10N/mm for
Grade D.
When the Engineer is satisfied that sufficient cube test results from Series A c
ubes are available to
establish the rates of 7 days to 28 days strengths the assessment of control as
described in paragraph
above shall also be based on the 7 days cube tests.
Series B Test Cubes
The strength requirements of each set of three test cubes of Series B shall be d
eemed to be satisfied if
none of the test results for the three cubes is below the required minimum stren
gth, or if the average
value of test results for the three cubes is not less than the required minimum
strength and the difference
between the greatest and the lowest value is not greater than 20% of the average
value. The required
minimum strength shall be the specified minimum strength at 28 days, as detailed
on the drawing,
multiplied by that ratio of 7 days and 28 days strength as determined.
In cases where the standard of control is being met but where anyone cube tested
has a strength less
than 85% of the required minimum strength, or where any set of three cubes in Se
ries B fails to satisfy the
strength requirements as specified, the Contractor shall take such remedial acti
on as the Engineer may
direct. This may require the cutting out of the concrete to which the cubes corr
espond together with any
sound concrete as the Engineer may consider necessary in order to effect a satis
factory repair, the whole
to be carried out at the Contractor's expense.
Additional Tests
Where a subsequent operation is dependent on the strength of the concrete in par
ticular portions of the work,
for example if the Contractor wishes to remove form-work in advance of the minim
um periods stated or to
subject the concrete to early loading, the Engineer will require additional cube
s to be made, stored, cured and
tested on the same basis as is specified for Series A & B in Clause 4.6 (b&c) to
check the concrete has
attained sufficient strength for the subsequent operation to proceed until he is
satisfied that the requisite
strength has been reached.
Concrete placing
Before the concrete is actually placed in position the inside of the shuttering
or moulds should be inspected by
the Engineer or the Engineer's representative to see that it has been properly a
ssembled and fixed.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a weekly and a monthly concreting pr
ogram, which shall be
approved before the concreting work is executed.
The Contractor shall be responsible for giving 24 hours notice in writing to enab
le the Engineer to have a
representative present during concreting. In the event of the Contractor not giv
ing such notice, the Engineer
reserves the right to cut away such concrete as he may require to expose the rei
nforcement and the cost of
such cutting away shall be borne by the Contractor, even is the position of the
reinforcement is found to be
correct.
As soon as possible after the mixing and before the initial set has taken place,
the concrete shall be deposited
directly in the work from barrows, etc. carefully trimmed into position in layer
s and well rammed and
vibrated. Concrete shall not be thrown or dropped from a height exceeding 2m wit
hout the written authority of
the Engineer.
The concrete shall be worked up against the face of the previously deposited con
crete or against form-work or
molds with rods or long tampers. Very great importance is attached to the deposi
ting and through
consolidating of the concrete to ensure that it is homogenous and free from inte
rstices and that it is in contact
throughout with the forms or molds; all to the entire satisfaction of the Engine
er.
Care shall be taken not to disturb setting concrete by shocks, loading or otherw
ise before it has sufficiently
hardened. Any concrete that it not finally placed within half an hour of mixing
shall be discarded. Any
concrete which shows signs of initial setting before it is deposited in the form
s or molds shall not be used in
the work and shall be removed from the site or otherwise disposed of to the sati
sfaction of the Engineer.
Care shall be taken that at no time segregation of the concrete takes place.
Where concrete is laid on hardcore or any absorbing material, the surface shall
be thoroughly wetted before
the concrete is deposited.
For suspended floor construction generally the area may be increased to 100 m and
the sizes of bays to be
cast should be agreed with the Engineer. The sizes of bays may be increased at t
he discretion of the Engineer
depending on the conditions relating to each individual case.
The specifications for reinforced slabs may be considered to apply for reinforce
d wall construction generally,
but the length of panels to be cast may not exceed 8m.
Vibration
The Contractor shall have available sufficient mechanical vibrators of an approv
ed pattern (having not less
than 6000 vibrations per minute) to cope with the largest volume of concrete lik
ely to be poured at any one
time.
Spare machines shall be kept available over and above those normally used in the
works in case of a
breakdown. The type of vibrator should be applied in a number of places for shor
t periods rather than in one
place for a long time. The spacing between points of application should be such
that all parts of the section
are equally and fully compacted. The vibrations should be removed slowly from th
e compacted concrete.
The vibrations must not be used to cause the concrete to 'flow' horizontally alo
ng the work or cause bleeding
and placing of concrete shall therefore be kept sufficiently ahead of the vibrat
or to prevent this.
Clamp on vibrators should be rigidly fixed to the formwork and their spacing sho
uld be determined in
relation to the size of the section so that all parts of the concrete are vibrat
ed equally.
Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 4 and 24 hours after compac
tion.
Accumulation of water on the surface due to any cause during compaction is to be
prevented as far as
possible and any such water is to be removed before further concrete is placed.
In case bleeding tests are instructed to be carried out by the Engineer these sh
all be as per ASTM-C-232.
Cutting away
The Contractor shall not cut away any concrete work without the written authorit
y of the Engineer and the
Contractor will be held responsible for the safety of any work damaged due to un
authorized cutting by
himself or his sub-contractors.
Waterproof concrete
Particular care shall be taken for all waterproof concrete to use an aggregate o
f the correct grading and the
proportion of fine and coarse aggregate are to be carefully adjusted to obtain t
he maximum density.
All waterproof concrete below ground and in direct contact with water shall incl
ude an admixture similar to
"Conmix Type W2" or Micro-Silica as directed by the Engineer.
Expansion Joints
Expansion joints to be formed in the position and details shown on drawings shal
l be filled with bitumen
impregnated fibre board to their full depth and width. The top portion of the fi
bre board shall be cut back for
a depth of at least 25mm and sealed with a proprietary sealant as specified incl
uding pre-priming of the
concrete surface against which sealant will be applied.
The ground floor slabs shall be generally separated from the tie beams by formin
g such a joint. Similar
treatment shall be ensured to separate the cement and screed from the surroundin
g block work concrete.
Form work
Definition
Form-work is the casing into which concrete is placed and/or its supports.
Materials
Form-work shall be constructed of timber, metal or other approved material; shal
l be so constructed as to
prevent any loss of grout or fine materials during concreting. The materials use
d shall be adequate to provide
the required surface finish to the concrete after removal and be sufficiently ri
gid to produce concrete surfaces
true and plane as required within a tolerance of 6mm in 4 m.
The contractor shall ensure that 50% of the timber used for construction (formwo
rk) shall be reused.
Design
Form-work shall be so designed and constructed that concrete can be properly pla
ced and thoroughly
compacted.
When concrete is to be vibrated, special care shall be taken to ensure that the
form-work will remain stable
and the joints tight.
The Contractor shall, if required, supply to the Engineer drawings and calculati
on for the form-work he
proposes to use.
Deflection and Camber
The Contractor shall make allowance for any settlement or deflection of form-wor
k that is likely to arise
during construction so that the hardened concrete conforms accurately to the spe
cified line and level. The
Contractor shall also make allowance in the form-work for any camber and deflect
ion due to creep of the
concrete.
Supports
Form-work shall be constructed so that the form work to the sides of members can
be removed without
disturbing the soffit form-work or its supports.
Props and supports shall be designed to allow the form-work to be adjusted accur
ately to line and level to be
erected and removed in an approved sequence without injury to the concrete.
Props and bracing shall be provided for the temporary support of composite const
ruction where separately
specified.
Joints and Edges
All joints in form-work shall be close fitting to prevent leakage of grout from
the concrete.
Form-work panels shall have true edges to permit accurate alignment at sides and
provide a clean line at
construction joints in the concrete.
Form-work panels shall be fixed with their joints either vertical or horizontal,
unless otherwise specified.
Ties
The material and position of any ties passing through the concrete shall be to t
he Engineer's approval.
Except where corrosion of a metal tie is unimportant it shall be possible to rem
ove a tie so that no part
of it remaining embedded in the concrete shall be nearer to the finished surface
of the concrete than the
specified thickness of cover to the reinforcement. Any holes left after the remo
val of ties shall be filled
with concrete or mortar of approved composition.
Sundries
Form-work shall be provided to the top surface of concrete where the slope or th
e nature of the work requires
it.
Provision shall be made for forming holes and chases for services and for buildi
ng in pipes, conduits and
other fixings shown on the drawings.
Cleaning and Treatment of Form-work
All rubbish, chippings, shavings, sawdust and dirt shall be removed from the int
erior of the form-work
before concrete is placed. The form-work to be in contact with the concrete shal
l be cleaned and watered and
treated with a suitable mold oil of approved composition. Care shall be taken th
at oil or composition is kept
from contact with the reinforcement or with concrete at any construction joints.
Retarding agents shall not be used except with the permission of the Engineer. F
orm-work shall be
thoroughly cleaned after each use.
Striking or Removal of Form-work
All form-work shall be removed without shock or vibration that might damage the
concrete. Before the soffit
and props are removed the surface of the concrete shall be exposed where necessa
ry in order to ensure that
the subjected at the time of striking.
The form-work to vertical surfaces such as walls, columns and sides of beams may
be removed after 12-24
hours in normal weather conditions, although care must be taken to avoid damage
to the concrete, especially
to arises and features. In cold weather a longer period may be necessary before
striking and protection
against frost should be afforded to exposed surfaces.
Where the early concrete strengths are not accurately known the following minimu
m times (in days) shall
elapse before removal of form-work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any injury to the concrete work and for
any damage caused by or
arising from the removal and striking of the forms and supports. Any advice perm
ission or approval given
by the Engineer relative to the removal and striking of forms and supports shall
not relieve the Contractor
from responsibility.
Plastered Surfaces
Where concrete surfaces are to be plastered the Contractor shall ensure that the
solution used on form-work
will not in any way reduce the adhesion of the plaster to the concrete.
Construction joint
Construction joints and day work joints are to be formed in positions approved b
y the Engineer, and vertical
stop boards must be provided to form these joints, with joggles wherever possibl
e; provision shall be made
from the reinforcement to run continuously through the joint without being tempo
rarily bent up or otherwise
displaced, and any concrete flowing past the joint is to be hacked off as soon a
s it is set. Once concreting has
started, it must be carried on to its natural completion or to properly construc
ted day work joints.
Before concreting is resumed, the surface of the concrete on the first side of t
he joint shall be thoroughly
cleaned, and the surface removed so as to expose the aggregate. The work require
d to achieve this will
depend on the age of the concrete, and may vary from hacking, if the concrete is
thoroughly hard to mist
spray on horizontal surfaces which can be dealt with whilst the concrete is stil
l green.
The new concrete shall be carefully worked up against the hardened surface of th
e joint. Where possible,
except in the case of exposed face work where color is important, the proportion
s of cement and fine
aggregate to coarse aggregate shall be increased in the batches to be placed aga
inst the joint.
The Contractor must at all times ensure that the supply of concrete is adequate
for pours up to a properly
constructed day work joint. If for any reason this is not achieved the Engineer
shall be entitled to stop the
work and reject the incomplete pour and the Contractor shall at his own expense
remove that concrete either
wholly or partly as directed by the Engineer and re-concrete to a newly prepared
day work joint.
Remedial treatment of surfaces
Any remedial treatment to surfaces shall be agreed with the Engineer following i
nspection immediately
after removing the form-work and shall be carried out without delay.
Any concrete, the surface of which has been treated before being inspected by th
e Engineer, shall be liable
to rejection.
No claim of any sort will be admissible for carrying out any such repair work.
Finishes
All concrete surfaces which are not exposed (sawn form-work) are to be left as s
truck from the mold,
except that any surfaces which are found to be honeycombed shall be made good as
soon as they have been
inspected by the Engineer.
The making good shall be done with a mixture of fine aggregate and cement in sim
ilar proportions to the
concrete, and as dry as possible.
All exposed concrete surfaces with wrought form-work are to have a rubbed finish
, which shall mean the
application of two rubs. The first rub shall be made after the removal of the fo
rms, the surface shall be
wetted and rubbed with a No. of 20 carborundum stone to remove all mold marks. T
he second rub shall be
made when finishing the concrete work when the surface shall again be wetted, an
d rubbed with a No. of 24
carborundum stone, excess paste being removed with a we brush.The final surface
shall be free from all
irregularities and discoloration and shall be an even level surface.
Unless the following procedures are followed to the satisfaction of the Engineer
the concrete will be
considered defective and unacceptable.
All material needed for curing should be ready for use before concreting begins.
Contractor has to ensure
attendance for the curing before proceeding with concreting.
Top Surface
Immediately upon finishing, the exposed surface is to be covered by polythene sh
eeting, the sheeting to be
in direct contact with concrete and covered with hessian to prevent air circulat
ions over the concrete.
In areas where starter bars protrude and is not possible to pond, as much of the
area as possible is to be
covered with hessian and kept continuously wet.
Vertical Surfaces
For the sides of columns, beams and walls, form-work kept in position and spraye
d with water for at
least 24 hours provides the initial protection needed against evaporation.
Screed shall consist of Portland cement, Sand and Water. Chemical additive may b
e added to improve
work-ability.
A bonding material shall be used to bond the screed to the substrate concrete. T
he material shall be cement
sand grout, cement sand latex grout or an epoxy bonding agent.
Proportions:
In general proportion the mix such that the compressive strength of screed shall
be at least that of the
substrate material with a minimum value of 25 N/mm2 at 28 days.
Property
Value
Maximum water cement ratio
0.55
Minimum cement content
300 kg/cu.m.
Minimum bond strength
1 N/mm2
Dimensional Co-ordination:
. The cladding must be detailed to ensure compliance with requirements for accur
acy in manufacture and
erection, and to accommodate deviations in the building structure.
. Select types and methods of fixing which will give ample adjustability in thre
e dimensions.
. Liaise with the party responsible for construction of the building structure t
o ensure co-ordination of
dimensions and tolerances.
. Submit details of the proposed system of tolerances and adjustments.
Design Sample:
At an agreed stage in the detailed design work make a sample of the proposed con
struction, size 2000 x
2000 mm, showing the proposed color, texture and incorporating a completed secti
on of a joint. Obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding.
Mock-Up:
At an agreed stage in the detailed design work construct a mock-up at site.
Arrange for inspection to be carried out jointly with the Engineer and/or arrang
e for tests as instructed.
Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
Manufacture
Quality of Work:
Manufacture GRP units carefully to ensure compliance with design and performance
requirements, using
materials and workmanship appropriate for the purpose.
All materials must be compatible with each other, and must be stored and used in
accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. Resins must be used as supplied and not adultera
ted: fillers and
admixtures may be used only where authorized.
The standard of finish must be appropriate to the end use and position in the bu
ilding. Ensure that
defects such as wrinkling, spotting, striations, fibre patterning, fish eyes, bl
isters, crazing, cracking, dry
patches and uneven or inconsistent color do not occur.
Workshop Conditions:
Workshops must be warmt dry, clean and well ventilated. Cease manufacture if the
temperature falls below
10 deg.C or if dew point is reached.
Patterns:
Inform Engineer when each master pattern is complete and not less than 20 days b
efore commencing
manufacture of molds.
Manufacturing Accuracy:
Finished dimensions of completed units to be such that the cladding, when erecte
d, complies with clause
630 and all sizes fall within the following permissible deviations:
Gel Coats to External Surfaces:
. Mix resins thoroughly. All units of one color to have gel coats from the same
color batch of resin.
. Apply evenly to give an overall nominal thickness of 500 microns.
. Check the wet film thickness (es) of the gel coat(s) of all units in accordanc
e with BS 3900: Part C5,
Method 6, four readings per sq m per coat over the external surface area.
. If single gel coating is used, no reading to be less than 400 microns or more
than 600 microns. Average of
readings for each unit to be within the range 450-550 microns.
. If double gel coating is to be used, submit proposals for coat thickness limit
s based on the resin
manufacturer's recommendations, and obtain approval.
Laminating:
Ensure that:
. Each GRP skin contains not less than 900 g/sq m of glass fibre, in not less th
an two layers.
. Random reinforcement is distributed uniformly, and non-random reinforcement is
correctly positioned
and aligned.
. Each layer of woven fabric reinforcement has a layer of chopped strand mat on
both sides.
. The glass is fully wetted out by the resin, with a resin: glass ratio of not l
ess than 2:1, higher as
appropriate.
. There is good overall bond between all gel coats and all layers of laminate.
. The GRP is well consolidated and free from air voids.
Curing:
All units must be adequately cured at not less than 50 deg.C (higher as necessar
y) for not less than 8
hours (longer as necessary). Ensure that units are not distorted whilst being cu
red.
Hardness:
After curing, and at time(s) to be agreed with the PM, measure hardness of GRP i
n accordance with BS
2782 Part 10: Method 1001, one test for each 1sq m of external surface area, not
less than 2 tests per unit.
Reject any unit in which any Barcol hardness measurement is less than 30 at ambi
ent temperature.
Weight:
The first unit of each type and size produced is to be thoroughly checked for co
mpliance with the design
and specification, and the weight recorded. All subsequent units must then be we
ighed, and must not
deviate from the weight of the first identical unit by more than +/- 10%. Inform
PM if any unit fails to
comply.
Production Control Units:
The first unit produced of each of the type(s) listed below is to be inspected b
y the Engineer and, if its
appearance is approved, clearly marked and kept safely at the shop as a control
standard for appearance
of subsequently produced units.
Protection:
. Prevent mechanical damage and disfigurement. Separate units during transport a
nd storage to prevent
chaffing. Pad all slings, ropes, bearers, ladders, etc.
. Support units as necessary so that they do not bow, twist or distort.
. Adequately protect units from the weather. Surfaces not having a weathering ge
l coat must not have
prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or water.
. Do not cover units with plastics sheeting or stick adhesive tape on exposed su
rfaces.
. Store fixing and jointing materials indoors.
. Do not deliver to site any units which cannot be erected immediately or unload
ed into a suitable well
protected storage area.
Accuracy of Erection:
. Survey the structure, including any fixing inserts, before commencing erection
. Report to Engineer
immediately if structure will not allow the required accuracy of erection.
. Set out joint centers for a complete elevation at a time unless otherwise agre
ed with Engineer. Erect units
using temporary spacers to suit the survey results and ensure generally consiste
nt joint widths.
. The widths of joints must be such as to ensure that the joints perform as inte
nded and are within the
recommendations of the joint sealant or baffle manufacturer.
. The finished work must have a satisfactory appearance, being square, regular,
true to line, level and plane
with a satisfactory fit at all junctions, all to approval.
Final Fixing:
. Obtain approval of appearance of each elevation before tightening fixings or s
ealing joints.
. Lighten threaded fastenings to torque figures recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not over tighten
restraint fixings intended to permit lateral movement.
Damaged Units:
Do not repair without approval: such approval will not be given where the units
are badly damaged or
where the proposed repair will impair appearance or performance. Obtain approval
of appearance of all
repaired units. Repairs must be:
. Well keyed onto the surrounding GRP using both abrasion and a suitable chemica
l primer.
. Carried out using the same materials as used in manufacture of the units.
. Adequately cured, using suitable portable heaters for site curing.
Cleaning Down:
Return to site at Completion or when instructed and thoroughly clean down the en
tire area of the GRP
work. Cleaning agents for the purpose must be approved by the GRP manufacturer.
3.3 Glass reinforced concrete material (GRC)
GRC materials and products shall only be obtained from 'Specialists'.
Finishes shall be as shown on the Drawings and specified by the Engineer. Accept
able variations in
texture color and appearances shall be agreed by the Engineer on a range of samp
les.
The finished panels shall be free from surface imperfections such as blowholes,
voids, ridges or any
other defects that will be visible in the finished condition, as the approved sa
mples.
Materials used for making the GRC units shall comply with relevant British Stand
ards. Any reference to a
British Standard shall mean that current at the time to going to Tender. Where m
aterials are fully covered
by this Specification or alternative materials are offered, the Contractor shall
forward to the Engineer
full details of those he proposes to use for approval prior to commencing the wo
rk.
The glass fibre shall be Cem-fila glass fibre or other equal and approved.
The Contractor shall ensure that any admixture used by the manufacturer are appr
oved by the Engineer
and do not have any harmful effects on the proposed elements.
Sand shall have a 98% minimum silica content by weight with a maximum moisture c
ontent of 2% by
weight and a particle size between 1 mm and 150 microns. The material shall be a
s approved by the Licensor
/ Engineer.
Water used in the manufacture of the elements shall be clean, fresh and potable.
Mist coats consisting of the basic composition without fibre may if necessary be
sprayed onto the
moulds. The thickness of this coating shall not exceed 0.5 mm maximum in order t
o avoid an unreinforced
surface.
Spray-up of the main body of material shall proceed before any mist coat has set
.
The method of spraying the main body of material shall achieve the greatest poss
ible uniformity of thickness
and fibre distribution.
The Contractor shall agree the detailed construction of the elements with the En
gineer. Details of the
agreed method of construction shall be recorded by the Contractor in drawing for
m.
The elements shall be manufactured to the tolerance specified for precast claddi
ng in B.A
C.P.297 with the addition that thickness of the GRC material skin shall be to th
e specified thickness with
a tolerance of - 0 mm and + 4 mm.
Immediately after the completion of spraying of the element a curing method appr
oved by the Licensor
shall be adopted in order to achieve sufficient strength for the de-moulding pro
cess.
Curing shall be continued after demoulding to the method agreed by the Engineer.
The curing
conditions shall be such as to provide free water on the surface of the elements
and an adequate level of
temperature.
At the completion of the curing period external cladding elements shall be store
d inside before
receiving any treatment. The coating shall be applied in accordance with the man
ufacturer's
recommendations particularly with regard to the time and method of application o
f the coating.
Elements, etc., shall be handled, stored and transported in such a way that no d
amage or marking of the
architectural surfaces occurs and so that the elements are not subject to undue
stress.
All elements, etc., shall be identified individually to indicate the type and da
te of manufacture.
Any panel not complying with the specification shall be declared unacceptable.
Details of the methods of transport and erection and site storage shall be agree
d between the Contractor and
the Engineer.
The safety and protection of the GRC units shall be ensured throughout the whole
of the contract until
the issue of the Certificate of Completion.
Test Boards/Tests, etc.
. Test boards shall be produced at a frequency agreed between the Engineer and C
ontractor, but will be as a
minimum manufactured in parallel with the first and last element of each days pr
oduction by each spray
team. (The actual frequency of testing required will depend upon the production
rate and quality). In
order to provide sufficient data to establish compliance an initial increased ra
te of production of test
boards may be required.
. The test board shall be large enough to enable the test coupons to be cut from
it without using the area at
the edge of the test board which may be of uneven thickness.
. When the element is removed from the curing area the test board shall be trans
ferred to the quality control
laboratory for testing as detailed.
. The methods described are those from the Pilkington Quality Control Test bookl
et. Where quality control
testing is carried out continuously the number of specimens may be reduced in ag
reement with the
Engineer and Contractor.
The GRC from which the elements, etc., are to be made shall have the following p
roperties on
completion of curing.
. Characteristic Modulus of Rupture (MOR) 21 N/mm
. Characteristic Limit of Proportionality (LOP) 8 N/mm
Characteristic' MOR or LOP shall have the same general meaning as used for Chara
cteristic Strength in BS
C.P.110 .
The glass content shall be determined on each freshly sprayed test board by the
wash- out method
CEM/QC/004.
Test for Modulus of Rupture (MOR) shall be carried out in accordance with test m
ethod CEM/QC/007.
The density of the cured material shall be the oven dry bulk density determined
by the test method
CEM/QC/006.
In the event of any result or results not fulfilling the requirements, the eleme
nts that the results represent
shall be deemed defective. Where non-compliance has occurred the current standar
d deviation up to and
including the low results should be calculated. From this, a new temporary margi
n may be calculated and
used to re-assess the results, against the compliance requirement in consultatio
n with the Engineer. It should
be understood that where non-compliance has occurred, all elements represented b
y the four results may be
deemed defective.
Preliminary Testing and Samples
The Engineer shall require preliminary testing to be carried out before the Cont
ractor commences with the
actual mix, equipment, personnel and technique proposed for manufacture to ensur
e that the following can be
achieved.
. That the modulus of rupture and quality control requirements can be achieved.
. That the quality of the finished product is acceptable. Once approved the fini
shed samples shall be
retained on sit by the Engineer as the standard which all elements shall attain
prior to fixing in position.
. A relationship between any special curing regime for quality control proposed
and the curing of the actual
product.
The choice of a mold release must be compatible with architectural finishes and
be approved by the Engineer.
Proposals for forming internal ribs and incorporating infill shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval.
Where sandwich construction is employed, the core material shall comply with the
Licensor's
recommendations for material and use.
The material and manufacture of the molds shall be consistent with the type and
quality of the surface finish
required for the element, with the tolerance specified and to the Engineer's app
roval.
Fixings
Fixing shall be stainless steel (or as approved by the Engineer) and details of
incorporation should also
follow the recommendations of the Licensor.
The Contractor shall provide a means for producing a replacement element at any
time during the Contract.
Molds shall be adequately cured to eliminate shrinkage and distortion and shall
be properly braced. Molds
shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before production commences.
One or more samples of a typical unit shall be manufactured to the agreed detail
ed construction and submitted
for load testing, as specified by the Engineer.
An agreed number of small samples typical of the manufacture and finish specifie
d are to be submitted to the
Engineer for architectural approval. Approved samples must be clearly marked and
kept safely on site and
further approved comparable samples are to be kept safely by the Contractor so t
hat a preliminary approval of
manufactured units can be made.
The Contractor shall ensure that the existing concrete works shall support the e
rection of the proposed GRC
elements and should there be insufficient support available the Contractor shall
be responsible for providing
such support to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall design, manufacture and install the GRC elements shown on t
he Drawings, all to the
Engineer's approval.
Concrete Works
Particular Requirements
Concrete Mix Proportions
Mix Usage
RC Work as specified
Mass Concrete
Max Aggregate Size (mm)
20
40
Max W/C Ratio
0.40
0.45
Min Cement Content (kg/m)
MSRC+Micro-Silica Below Ground
400
300
45
30
Slump (mm)
50 - 100
50 - 125
Concrete Blocks
The blocks, hollow or solid shall be strictly as manufactured to BS 6073 Part I
and II. Blocks shall be
manufactured of cement and sand 1:5 mix (300 Kg cement to one metre cube of sand
) made in vibrated
pressure machines. They shall be hard, sound, square and clean with well- define
d arises and shall be
400 mm ( 5 mm) long x 200mm ( 5 mm) high unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. T
he
tolerance of thickness shall be ( 3 mm).
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings blocks shall be hollow blocks and shall b
e of approved design.
Immediately after moulding, blocks shall be placed on clean, level, non- absorbe
nt pallets. Blocks shall
not be removed from the pallets until they have been inspected and approved by t
he Engineer. Blocks shall
be steam cured.
Prior to manufacture, the Contractor shall prepare ten nos. sample of each block
for the Engineer's
approval, and the approved samples shall be clearly marked and retained until co
mpletion of the Contract.
Blocks shall be tested for compressive strength whenever required by the Enginee
r. For each test twelve
blocks will be selected by the Engineer.
Should a test not meet the above requirements, the batch of blocks from which th
e sample was taken,
will be rejected and shall be removed from the Site.
The design of the cavities and webs of the hollow blocks shall be submitted to t
he Engineer prior to
manufacture. The thickness of the face shell and of the membrane of solid portio
ns shall not be less than
one fourth of the width and length of the block respectively.
Blocks below damp proof course level shall be solid sulphate resisting concrete
blocks, or shall be solid
blocks coated with thick black bitumen or tar composition unless otherwise state
d.
Mixing shall be carried out by means of an approved mechanical batch mixer. The
mortar shall be mixed dry
until a uniform mix is obtained. Sufficient water shall then be added and the mi
xing continued until a
homogeneous mix is obtained. Excess water shall not be used in the mix.
All mortar shall be used before the initial set has taken place and on no accoun
t shall mortar which has
commenced to set be remixed with water or new batches and used.
4.4 Workmanship
Generally in accordance to BS 8000
Block work shall be set out and built to the respective dimensions, thicknesses
and heights shown on the
Drawings and/ or as instructed in writing by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise ordered, hollow blocks shall be used in all closures, end block
s such as at door jambs,
window openings, etc., and blocks of special lengths or size, shall be solid. Th
e blocks shall be well soaked
before being used and the tops of walls left off shall be made wet before work i
s recommenced.
Blocks shall be laid in true and regular courses on a full bed of mortar of 10 m
m average thickness, exclusive
of any key in the jointing surfaces of the blocks. Sufficient mortar shall be us
ed in bedding and jointing to
ensure that all keys are solidly filled. Where blocks abut against concrete each
third course shall be tied
thereto by means of approved galvanized steel ties.
All horizontal joints shall be properly level. The Vertical joints shall be prop
erly lined and quoins, jambs and
other angles plumbed as the work proceeds.
Standard sized block shall be used wherever possible. Broken blocks shall not be
used except where required
for bonding purposes. Walls and partitions shall be bonded to one another at ang
les and junctions.
Joints of faces of block walls which are to be rendered or plastered shall be ra
ked out for depth of 10 mm as
the work proceeds.
Walls shall be carried up regularly without leaving any part more than one meter
lower than another unless
the permission of the Engineer is first obtained. Work which is left at differen
t levels shall be racked back.
The Contractor shall cut and fit block work as required, leave or form chases fo
r edges of concrete slabs,
steps, ends of partitions, etc cut chases for pipes, conduits, etc., and general
ly perform all cutting away for all
trades. Wooden plates and door and window frames shall be bedded and exposed edg
es pointed in mortar
and cramps shall be built in. No hollow blocks shall about any built in fixtures
eg. Doors, frames, louvers
etc.
4.5 Load bearing walls
Load bearing walls shall be constructed in accordance with BS.CP 111 Part 2. Whe
re a horizontal or vertical
joint is not solidly filled or where it is found that the Contractor has used bl
ocks other than the blocks
specified the whole panel of wall will be considered suspect and will be removed
and rebuilt at the
Contractor's expense.
4.6 Non-load bearing walls
Non load bearing walls shall not be constructed at the same time as the load bea
ring walls but built at least
two weeks after the roof or upper floor structure is completed. Toothing into lo
ad bearing walls will not be
permitted.
4.7 Fair faced walls
External and internal walls where described as "fair face" shall be built with b
locks having unblemished
surfaces, with good clean arises to all exposed edges and shall be pointed with
a neat flush joint as the work
proceeds.
4.8 Protection of finished blockwork
The Contractor shall ensure that the finished block work walling is not damaged
by subsequent operations.
The Contractor shall in all cases cover all newly erected walling with hessian o
r other material approved by
the Engineer and shall keep the same wet for at least three days.
4.9 Compressible joint fillers
Compressible joint fillers shall be used where specified at joints on drawings o
r requested by the Engineer.
Filler shall be cut to exact widths and shall have all edges neatly trimmed. All
fixing shall be strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Exposed edges of filler
shall be pointed with
approved sealant.
4.10 Partitions
Block work partitions over 3.00 meter high shall be stabilized as follows:
. Provide continuous 200x200/100 mm reinforced concrete lintel at the door linte
l level or as required
by the Engineer.
. For a partition taken between or passing in front of a reinforced concrete col
umn provide two round
steel bars laid in the bedding mortar at 1.00 meter center and fixed to column u
sing threaded bars
locked into cast in "Spit Rock" dowels.
. Provide rebates, toothing and the like at all vertical intersection of walling
every meter of height.
All internal block walls and partitions shall extend up to the underside of the
concrete slab, soffits,
beams and the like.
4.11 Poly sulphide sealant
Gun grade sealant shall be used where specified on the drawing or where requeste
d by the Engineer
including external joinery and metal work bedded against block work or concrete.
The color shall be to the
approval of the Engineer.
The primer shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the sealant. The joints
will first be thoroughly
cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall be primed before sealing w
ith sealant. Application of
these materials shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
4.12 Lintels
Prefabricated lintels shall comply with the requirements of BS 5977, Part 2. All
lintels shall be bedded on
cement and sand mortar and the Contractor shall allow for a minimum bearing at e
ach end of 150 mm.
4.13 Reinforcement
Totally embedded metal reinforcement shall be used every second course in the mo
rtar joints. The width of
reinforcement to be such that it is 10 mm from the inner face and 20 mm from the
outer face of the block.
4.14 Source of material
All blocks for use shall be obtained from a source (Vendor Lists) approved by th
e Engineer. The Contractor
shall not change same source without the written approval of the Engineer.
4.15 Storage of materials
Blocks shall be delivered to Site stacked and stored to permit ventilation and p
rotected from rain, dampness
and the like.
In the event that any materials for use in this Section deteriorate and become u
nusable due to inadequate and
poor storage they shall be removed from Site as instructed by the Engineer and r
eplaced at the Contractor's
expense.
4.16 Blockwork below ground level
All blocks used in construction below ground level shall be solid and manufactur
ed using sulphate resisting
cement.
4.17 Damp proof courses
Damp proof course shall be tropical quality bituminized fiber felt (Hessian type
) to comply with BS. 6398
and be provided under every block wall at ground bearing slab level and elsewher
e as indicated on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The damp proof course shall be lapped a
t corners and joints and
bedded in the cement mortar mix and pointed both sides.
4.18 External pointing of joinery or metal work
Joinery or metal work shall be pointed externally with approved standard Silicon
sealant color to match the
external faces or paint finishes and shall be used strictly in accordance with t
he manufacturers printed
instructions.
5 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
5.1 General
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities.
The roofing system shall be as shown on the standard roofing detail drawings. Ho
wever, if the Contractor
desires to submit an alternative proprietary system the Contractor should obtain
the Engineer s Approval.
Below are the approved systems and basic specifications of materials.
5.2 Testing
The Contractor is required to test and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all
areas of roofing, waterproofing,
terraces, bathrooms, kitchens and the like for water penetration. These tests ar
e to be carried out after the
membrane has been laid.
The Contractor shall keep the provisions of all relevant required tests to be ca
rried out in the item rates for
such areas to be flooded with water, and left for a minimum of 48 hours and or t
o the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
On completion of roofing works the Contractor is to leave the roof in a sound an
d watertight condition, to the
approval of the Engineer, and in a satisfactory state for final handing over.
5.3 Guarantee
The Contractor and Sub-Contractor both have to provide the Employer with a writt
en unconditional
guarantee for the roofing system installed on site for a period of 10 (ten) year
s from the date of issue of the
Final Certificate and to the completion of the maintenance period. The Contracto
r shall bear the cost of any
of the consequential damages or complete renewal as determined by Engineer durin
g the above period as is
provided for in same guarantee. The text of the guarantee shall be to the Engine
er's approval.
5.4 Preparation of surfaces
All surfaces shall be clear of all deleterious matter and dry all in accordance
with the manufacturer's written
instructions. Prior to the application of any waterproofing/roofing material or
primer the Contractor shall
grind the concrete surface using a mechanical grinder to ensure all surface irre
gularities are removed and
obtain the Engineer's written approval to commence the said works, without prope
r approval all the works
shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
5.5 Protection
Finished and part finished surfaces shall be suitably protected to ensure no dam
ages are made by other
trades. Any roofing or waterproofing so damaged due to non-protection shall be r
emoved and replaced at the
Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposed m
ethods of protecting the
various surfaces and locations prior to their completion or application of finis
hing layers, i.e. tiling and the
like.
5.6 Roofing System
The roofing shall comprise of the following layers: -
. Install one layer of 4 mm elastomeric polyester tropical grade modified bitumi
nous felt, torch applied.
Provide extra strip layer with min 300 horizontal and vertical lap at junctions
with vertical surface.
. Thermal Insulation shall be done with polyisocyanurate or polyurethane (rigid
foam) SHD Grade,
closed cell with minimum density 32 kg/m over water proofing membrane. Insulation
shall be of make
Kingspan, Isolparma, Hapri or equivalent, of suitable thickness. The thermal con
ductivity shall be
0.028W/m.K or better.
. The contractor shall verify and confirm that the thickness of thermal insulati
on provided. The combined
construction U values of the roof shall not exceed more than 0.20W/m2. K. Howeve
r, in all cases the
total construction thickness of the roof including the structural slab shall not
exceed 550mm as shown
on drawings.
. A separation layer of polypropylene fabric (Typar or equal) laid loosely over
roof insulation layer to
receive tiles on screed.
. Light weight foam Concrete of density 650- 800 kg/m, minimum thickness 50mm lay
to falls and cross
falls to drainage outlets. The screed shall be laid in alternate bays not exceed
ing ten square meter panels
and 300 mm wide from the edge with joints between bays in 10mm thick compressibl
e fiber material.
Angle fillet 100x100mm shall be provided at junctions with vertical surfaces.
. 20 mm thick finished Concrete tiles lay over sand cement screed (ratio 4:1). J
oints at 10 m to be filled
with approved polysulphide sealants (two part polysulphide) in accordance with t
he manufacturer's
instructions. The tiles shall be flat, smooth and free from depressions and proj
ections.
. Approved solar reflective aluminium shield flashing tucked into groove with pi
n and flat washers and
covered with 2 part polysulphide sealant.
. Apply gravel mulch at roof drains at a minimum depth of 50mm.
The Contractor shall submit the detailed Method Statement for the Engineer s appro
val. The application for
the same shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruc
tions.
Applicable provision of the following British Standards shall apply to these wor
ks as follows:-
. Mild Steel shall comply with BS 4360, sections generally shall comply with BS
4: Part 1, hollow
sections with BS 4848: Part 2 and angles with BS 4848: Part 4. Steel plate and s
heet shall comply with
BS 1449: Part 1 and steel tubes to BS 1775.
. Stainless Steel Tubes shall comply with BS 3014, and stainless steel plate wit
h BS 1449: Part 2.
. Aluminium alloy extruded sections shall comply with BS 1161 or BS 1474 and alu
minium alloy drawn
tube with BS 1471 Anodizing process when applicable to comply with BS
. Brass work as indicated on the drawings shall comply with the various appropri
ate Standards.
. Fastenings unless otherwise specified shall be of the same metal as the item b
eing fixed, with matching
coating or finish. Wood screws shall comply with BS 1210 Bolts, Screws and nuts
to BS 4190 ,
machine screws and nuts to BS 4138 and self-tapping screws to BS 4174
. Plugs shall be proprietary fiber plastics or other approved type.
. Bitumen solution for cold application shall comply with BS 3416, Type 1.
6.3 Finished coating
General
The finished coating shall be as stated on the Drawings and applied strictly in
accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
The color of the coating shall be selected from available ranges if not stated e
lsewhere in these Documents.
The Contractor shall offer samples for approval prior to the final selection and
the manufacturer of these
elements.
The contractor shall demonstrate that all paints and coatings used in the buildi
ng are within the maximum
VOC content limits of the European directive 2004/42/CE: 2004/as mentioned in th
e PBRS guide book.
Anodized coating
The aluminium anodizing shall comply with BS 3987 and be integral color hard coa
t anodizing
550kp/mm hardness, minimum 25 microns thick.
The coating shall be applied to properly clean and pre- treated galvanized steel
sections. Application shall be
by approved applicators and the Contractor shall provide certified details of sa
me. The pretreatment and
application of the coating shall conform to all ASTM, BS, DIN Standards and the
like as stated in the
Supplier's printed Specifications.
Coating thickness
As and when instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide certificate
s from independent
laboratories that the minimum thickness as stated in these Documents has been ap
plied to the aluminium
sections. Failure to provide such information shall result in the complete insta
llation being rejected and
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Dissimilar materials
All aluminium surfaces that are to be in contact with cured concrete, mortar, st
eel and other metals shall
have the contact surfaces protected wherever they may entrap moisture or corrosi
ve elements. Metals that
are to be in contact with mortar or concrete shall be protected with a two coat
bituminous coating.
Prime paint steel parts of anchors, anchor inserts reinforcement, supports, and
all parts after field welding
or bolting with zinc chromate. Minimum dry film thickness of 1 mm for zinc chrom
ate.
6.4 Aluminium
Generally
All aluminum doors, windows, frames, transoms, mullions, etc, where shown on the
drawing shall be
manufactured of extruded section of aluminum alloy to BS 1474 Heat treatable fre
e from defects type,
11.9. They shall be supplied by a manufacturer approved by the Engineer. Fitting
s shall be aluminum
alloy in accordance with BS 1473
All exposed surfaces shall be light etched and anodized in a satin or matt finis
h to the color indicated on the
drawings. The thickness of anodizing shall be guaranteed to be 20 microns (.020
mm) by the manufacturer
and shall be polished to a mirror-like surface.
Aluminum coated materials shall not be permitted in lieu of the aluminum items s
pecified herein.
Samples of the anodized finish must be offered for approval before proceeding.
All aluminum sections shall present clear, straight and shapely defined lines an
d shall be free from defects
and imperfections that may impair their strength.
The aluminum work shall be designed and anchored so that work will not be distor
ted nor the fasteners
over stressed from the expansion and contraction of the metal.
Protection
Before shipment from the factory, aluminum surfaces requiring protection shall b
e given a coating which
will protect the metal during construction. In areas where appearance of the fin
ish on aluminum items is
important a coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be applied.
Apply two sprayed coats or water-white methacrylate lacquer having a total minim
um thickness of 0.125
mm, which when applied to the aluminum surface shall be capable of withstanding
the action of lime
mortar for a period of at least one week in an atmosphere of 100% relative humid
ity at 100 degree F and
the action or 10% (by weight) muriatic acid for a period of six hours at 70 degr
ee F and the action of
atmospheric weathering for a period of 12 months. Alternatively a thick adhesive
tape may be used. The
coating or tape shall be applied in the manufacturer s plant to the exposed surfac
es of all aluminum
components subject to staining from alkaline mortar and plaster abrasion and oth
er construction abuses.
Workmanship\
The Contractor shall furnish all aluminium units as indicated on the drawings.
Workmanship and installation shall be in accordance with recommended standards o
f First Class
Aluminium Manufacturers.
The Contractor shall furnish all labour materials and equipment to complete the
aluminium work indicated
on the drawings or specified herein to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Work shall include all parts and accessories for all variations of fabrication t
echniques required for a
complete installation, caulking, priming and back coating and shop drawings.
All aluminium work shall be performed in a shop where grade of metal work is of
recognized quality
acceptable to the Engineer. All items shall be installed plump, straight, square
, level and in proper
elevation, plane, location and alignment with other work. All work shall be desi
gned for adjustment to
field variations, fitted with proper joints and intersections and adequately anc
hored in place.
All workmanship and finishes shall be first class, strictly in accordance with t
he best practice. All work shall
be complete in every detail. Finished work shall be approved by the Engineer bef
ore the job will be
accepted.
Where aluminium surfaces come into contact with metals other than stainless stee
l, zinc, white bronze
or small areas of other metal compatible with aluminium, they shall be kept from
direct contact with
such parts by painting the dissimilar metal with a primer, followed by one or tw
o coats of aluminium
metal and masonry paint of other approved suitable protective coating, excluding
those containing lead
pigments, or a non-absorptive tape or gasket shall be placed between aluminium a
nd dissimilar metals.
Steel anchors and connecting members shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc plated
after fabrication.
Aluminium in contact with wood or other absorptive materials which may become re
peatedly wet shall
be painted with two coats of aluminium metal and masonary paint or a coat at hea
vy bodied bituminous
paint. Alternatively paint the wood or other absorptive material with two coats
of aluminium house
paint and seal joints with a good caulking compound.
Before application of lacquer, the manufacturer shall remove all fabrication com
pounds, moisture, dirt
accumulations and other foreign materials to ensure proper lacquer adhesion.
Upon completion, the Contractor shall clean all aluminium work as required by re
moving protective tape
and other coating, using mild soap or detergent and clear petroleum spirits. Aci
d, caustics and abrasives
shall not be used. Where cleaners are used to remove excess sealing compounds ca
re shall be taken to
prevent damage to seal or staining or damage to adjacent work.
Aluminium Windows and Doors
General
All windows and doors are to be constructed by approved specialist suppliers of
light, medium or
heavy section to suit location, local building regulations, and particular requi
rements noted on the drawing
as to weight and profile.
All frames should be made to fit the actual openings with a 5mm clearance all ro
und. Discrepancies
in overall width or height exceeding 5mm will not be allowed and the frames will
be rejected in such
cases. Any small discrepancies shall have the gaps suitably backed and then fill
ed with gun- applied water
repellent mastic sealant.
All nuts, bolts, washers and screws used for assembly and fixing shall be of ade
quate strength for their
purpose within the design and shall be stainless steel grade 18/8.
All fixing of windows to the supporting structure to be achieved using a suitabl
e lug and/or frame anchor
fixing method capable of accommodating all applicable loads, deflection, toleran
ces and expansion expected
on site. Details of the proposed fixing method shall be submitted to the project
engineer for approval prior
to installation.
All sealants used in the assembly of, and in the fixing of cladding and window f
raming, shall be non- setting
to allow thermal movement without detriment to those joint sealants used for per
ipheral caulking and shall
be one part silicone sealant and shall conform to BS 4245 All spliced joints bet
ween mullions will be sealed
with an approved silicone product, compatible with other sealants and packing us
ed.
All ironmongery shall have the same finish as the frames and shall be approved b
y the Engineer.
At all opening windows and doors and where there are louvered screens and doors,
a fly- screen shall be
provided to the approval of the Engineer.
Glazing sections shall be set in special heat resisting PVC and of channel type.
Separate glazing
sections on each side of the glass will not be permitted.
The following table indicates the basic requirements for window construction. Th
e weights of framing
make no allowance for beads, glazing bars, opening light framing, coupling mulli
ons or transoms.
Classification
Minimum weight of basic
frame (kg/m run)
Maximum superficial
area of either window
way (sq.m)
Maximum Dimension (mm)
Remarks
Light
0.60
1
1500
With door
Medium
1.50
5
2500
Medium
2.00
9
3000
Heavy
2.50
12
3500
Heavy
3.00
12
3500
The contractor shall submit, for approval, details / evidence of all calculation
s / methods of determining
the required target U-value of all windows.
Suitable performance tests are to be conducted to ensure that the thermal breaks
installed are effective and
that infiltration rates are within the specified limits.
Building Air Leakage:
The building shall be tested as per ASTM E779 and should not exceed 3.64 l/s/m2@
75Pa based upon the
area of exposed facade.
6.5 Storage and protection
. All materials shall be stored in protected areas on site and shall be fully pr
otected against the effects of
weather.
. All materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in a manner to
prevent deformation and
damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and to prevent rusting and the acc
umulation of mud, dirt
or other foreign matter on the metal work. All such damage and accumulation shal
l be corrected prior to
erection.
6.6 Materials
All materials shall be new stock, free from defects, impairing strength, durabil
ity or appearance and of best
commercial quality for each intended purpose.
Provide all anchors, bolts, sleeves, spigots and other parts required for securi
ng each item of work of this
Section to the construction, including furnishing to concrete workers all requir
ed inserts and sleeves for use
in concrete and furnishing to masons of all anchors, bolts, and other items requ
ired to be built- in masonry.
All exposed fastenings shall be of the same material finish as the metal to whic
h applied, unless otherwise
noted.
Welding rods shall conform to British Standards and the recommendations of the m
etal welding rod
manufacturer.
Bolts and nuts where used, shall be in accordance with BS 1400 or 1769. Bolts sh
all be of sufficient length to
show at least one full thread beyond the nut after tightening. Bolted joints sub
ject to vibration shall be
securely locked.
Washers, where used, shall be in accordance with BS4320 The size of the holes sh
all not exceed the bolt
diameter by more than 2mm.
Crambs, Wall Tiles, Anchors etc.
The cramps for fixing wood frames to walls shall be 200mm long 30mm wide and 3mm
thick and shall
have one end bent and twice countersunk drilled for screwing to the frame and th
e other end fishtailed for
setting into walling.
All fixing cramps, wall tiles, anchors etc., shall be galvanized mild steel prop
rietary type such as Pepcon
International (Al Tayer), Harris and Edgar or equal and approved. The Contractor
is responsible for
submitting suitable samples to Engineer for approval.
Galvanized Steel Channels and Chequered Plate
Where Site Electrical Rooms or Substations are required, the Contractor must all
ow for all necessary
galvanized steel channels and chequered plate as directed by the Engineer includ
ing framing, supports,
hand-railing etc., as necessary.
6.7 Shop painting materials
Shop paint for un-galvanized ferrous surfaces shall be a high quality, lead free
, rust inhibitive primer, as
approved by the Engineer.
Shop paint for galvanized metal shall be high quality, zinc rich, metal primer e
specially formulated for use
on galvanized metal, as approved by the Engineer.
Shop Painting
. All materials (plain and galvanized) (including non- ferrous where specified f
or paint finish) under this
Section shall be given a shop coat of primer as specified, using the appropriate
primers specified
previously in this Section.
. Immediately before painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale, dirt, weld flu
x, weld spatter and other
foreign material with wire brushes or steel scrappers. Remove all grease and oil
by use of detergent or
solvent as recommended by the manufacturer of the proposed painting system.
. Apply paint by spray process in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions to dry film
thickness recommended. Apply thoroughly and evenly and work well into corners an
d joints taking care
to avoid sags and runs.
. Do not paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete, or to be welded in the field
.
. After erection, sand smooth and retouch all portions of the shop coats chipped
or damaged during
erection, and coat all field welds and connections with the same paint used for
all the shop coat.
. All aluminium surfaces in contact with cement or concrete surfaces are to be g
iven two coats of bitumen
based paint before being fitted.
6.9 Workmanship
. Co- ordinate and provide details of the work as necessary to ensure co- ordina
tion with related building
elements and services. Liaise as necessary to ensure co- ordination of the work
with related building
elements and services, provide fabrication/installation drawings and other infor
mation requested, submit
sufficient copies of drawings, etc., for approval. Make any necessary amendments
in accordance with
any comments of the Engineer and without delay and re- submit unless it is confi
rmed that this is not
necessary and submit sufficient copies of final version of drawings, etc., for d
istribution to all parties.
. Take site dimensions and submit Drawings as detailed elsewhere in these docume
nts, showing
elevations, plans and full size sections, proposed methods of fixing, proposed m
ethods of forming
joints, any proposals for fabricating large components in more than one piece.
. Prepare control samples as requested and obtain Engineer's written approval of
appearance before
proceeding with manufacture.
. Fabricate metalwork carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with design
and performance
requirements, using types and grades of metal appropriate for the purpose. Finis
hed work must be free
from distortion and cracks. Use proprietary products to manufacturer's recommend
ations.
. Pre- finished metal may be used if the finish complies with this specification
, the methods of fabrication
do not damage or alter appearance at finish and the finish is adequately protect
ed during fabrication.
. Cold formed work, use brake presses or cold rolling to produce accurate profil
es with straight arrises.
Unless specified otherwise, mitre junctions of identical sections. Remove all bu
rrs and sharp arrises
which would be visible after fixing or a hazard to the user. After thermal cutti
ng stainless steel grind off
material which is liable to corrode.
. When assembled all moving parts must move freely and without binding.
. Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading mec
hanically or chemically
and form bond under pressure. Use adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's wr
itten
recommendations.
. Mechanical joints shall be tight with no visible gaps. Where screw heads will
be visible after component
is fixed, or raised screw heads would interfere with any moving part of componen
t, use counter-sunk
machine screws unless specified otherwise. Mechanical joints of components which
will be located
externally shall be bedded in bedding compound, including all mating surfaces, c
leats and other fixings.
. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be welded and ensure accurate fit using clamps an
d jigs where practicable.
Use tack welds only for temporary attachment unless specified otherwise. Make jo
ints with parent and
filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or crac
ks. Completely remove
all traces of flux residue and slag. Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of
materials which will be
self-finished and visible in completed work. Butt welds which will be visible in
completed work shall
be finished smooth, flush with adjacent surfaces.
. Metal arc welding shall be to BS 5135 or other methods subject to approval. We
lding of stainless steel
shall be TIG welding to BS 3019: Part 2, or other methods subject to approval. U
se double bevel butt
welds, backing bars to remove heat, jigging, tack welds and any other measures n
ecessary to minimize
distortion.
. Remove slight distortion by light hammering, taking care not to damage surface
finish.
. Welding of aluminium alloys shall be TIG welding to BS 3019: Part I, or MIG we
lding to BS 3571:
Part I, or gas welding to BS 1126, or other methods subject to approval. Welding
of copper alloys shall
be fusion welding to BS 1077 for copper, or other methods subject to approval.
. Apply metal coatings after fabrication is complete and all fixing holes have b
een drilled, unless
otherwise, specified. Before applying coating remove all welding slag, weld spat
ter, anti- spatter
compounds, paints, grease, flux, rust, burrs, and sharp arrises and make good al
l defects which would
show after application of coating and finish surfaces smooth.
. Galvanizing shall comply with BS 729, sherardising to BS 4921, zinc spraying o
f iron and steel surfaces
shall comply with BS 2569: Part I and vitreous enameling of steel surfaces with
BS 3830 Surfaces of
stainless steel, bronze and brass which will be visible in the completed work sh
all be finely polished.
. All sections shall be protected to prevent distortion of metalwork during tran
sit, handling, storage and
fixing and damage to arrises, projecting features and surfaces which will be exp
osed in the finished
work. Prevent contact with mud, ashes, plaster and cement and provide protective
coverings as
necessary and remove on completion.
. Position metalwork accurately, plumb, level and true to line. Fix securely to
prevent pulling away,
deflection, or other movement during use. Do not distort when tightening fasteni
ngs and the like.
. Do not use railings or balustrades as strutting or supports after fixing for o
ther works. Do not weld,
braze or solder on site without approval.
. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness or metal and detail
s of assembly and
supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shal
l be formed to exclude
water. Do all cutting, punching, drilling and tapping required for attachment of
hardware and of work
by other trades.
. Generally metalwork shall conform to all Local Authority Bye- Laws, and, in li
eu of other specific legal
requirements, shall support any live loads which may normally be imposed plus a
safety factor of 2.5.
6.10 Installation
. All work shall be installed adjusted and glazed by experienced workmen all in
accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions and in full conformity with the approve
d shop drawings,
samples and other submitted data. Under no circumstances shall materials be inst
alled on surfaces that
contain condensation, dirt, grease or other foreign encountered materials that w
ould hinder or prevent
proper installation and functioning for the use intended.
. All work shall be carefully and accurately assembled with proper and approved
provision for
contraction and expansion and set in correct locations as per approved detailed
shop drawings, all level,
square, plumb and aligned with other work. All joints between framing and struct
ural building shall be
sealed in order to be watertight and weatherproof and to satisfy all other requi
rements of the Engineer.
. Frames shall be designed and manufactured with a maximum 2.5mm tolerance aroun
d the opening in
the structure. These joints are to be finished by applying an approved sealant i
nto a polystyrene foam
backing strip.
. All works are to be fully protected for the duration of the contract from dama
ge by other trades. The
Engineer shall approve the method of protection.
. If for any reason final finishes become scratched, abraded or damaged during t
ransport, delivery,
storage or erection, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove or re
pair those defective areas or
components as directed and to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
. Repair work shall be identical to the manufacturer's applied finish with regar
d to gloss, finish and visual
appearance. Field touch up of painted aluminium is permitted only with the writt
en permission of the
Engineer. Where touch up is not an authorized means of repair the damaged materi
als must be replaced
by new.
. Upon completion of work all protective coverings from all exposed surfaces sha
ll be removed. All
surfaces shall be cleaned using soap or detergents as recommended by the alumini
um manufacturers to
remove sealants, discoloration and any other foreign material. Defection of any
type determined by the
Engineer shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
. Extreme care shall be taken when cleaning the exterior portion to protect all
other adjacent works.
6.11 Samples
. Submit duplicate samples of all finished materials for approval by Engineer. T
he samples will show the
full range of finishes and mechanical properties to be expected in the finished
product. Where physical
samples would otherwise be too large, examples will be given that can be readily
inspected locally, or
the Contractor will provide facilities for the Engineer's inspection at the Cont
ractor's expense.
. Unless specifically called for, size and form of each sample shall be as direc
ted by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that joints are dry and remove all loose material, d
ust and grease.
When using backing strips, the Contractor shall not leave gaps and shall not red
uce depth of joint for
sealant to less than the minimum recommended by the manufacturer.
Cavities shall be filled and jointed with sealant in accordance with the manufac
turer's recommendations.
Excess sealant shall be removed from adjoining surfaces using cleaning materials
recommended by the
sealant manufacturer, and shall be left clean.
6.13 Glazing
All glazing work shall be installed by skilled workmen experienced in this work
in accordance with BS
6262.
The Contractor shall fix all glass with the required gaskets, clips, beads, etc.
All glass shall be of the type, shape and size indicated on the drawings and/or
specification here under.
All types of glass shall be free of waves, bubbles, and other defects.
All glass panels shall have rounded edges to prevent any damage to gaskets.
The Contractor shall produce on request all invoices or advice notes from suppli
ers to confirm that the
glass is of the standard specified. Any scratched, broken or otherwise defective
glass is to be removed and
replaced by the Contractor at his cost during or on completion of the Works.
The contractor shall submit for approval, details / evidence of all calculations
/ methods of determining
the required target u-value of all windows. Suitable performance tests are to be
conducted to ensure that
the thermal breaks installed are effective and that infiltration rates are withi
n the specified limits.
6.14 Glazing Materials
General
The Contractor shall submit representative samples of all glass he proposes to i
nstall in the Works. On
receipt of the Engineer's approval of same the Contractor shall commence the pro
curement of the
glass.
Alternatively, the combined U-Values of the window units, Glass and frame shall
meet the following
performance parameters: U-Value 1.90 W/m2K , SHGC of 0.23 and infiltration of
0.35 ach.
Sheet Glass
Sheet glass shall be flat-drawn clear sheet glass complying with BS 952, Section
1, and ref 4(a),
Ordinary Glazing Quality .
Plate Glass
Plate glass shall be cast, rolled or drawn glass ground and polished on both sur
faces complying with BS 952
, Section 1, ref 6a(1), Glazing Quality for Glazing .
Obscured Glass
Obscured glass shall be figured rolled glass complying with BS 952, Section 2, r
ef 14b of approved
type.
Wired Glass
Wired glass shall be polished Georgian wired glass having both surfaces ground a
nd polished and with
square mesh inserted during rolling complying with BS 952 , Section 4, ref 21b.
Heat Absorbing Glass
Heat absorbing glass shall be floated glass substantially opaque to infra-red ra
diation complying with BS
952, Section 4, ref 23. Tint and manufacture to Engineer s approval.
Toughened Glass
Toughened glass shall be tempered or heat-treated and comply with BS 952, Sectio
n4, ref 25. Tint and
manufacture to Engineer s approval.
Poly-carbonate Glass
Translucent and bendable poly-carbonate glass panels to comply with standards.
Double and Multiple Glazing Units
Double and multiple glazing units shall comply with BS 952, Section 4, and ref 3
5. The glazing units
shall be to the size shown on the drawings with the panes hermetically sealed at
their periphery with
dehydrated air in between. The gap between the panes shall be 12mm wide. Glass a
s described shall be
used in the fabrication of the sealed units with the glass tint (Bronze) thickne
ss and manufacture all to the
Engineer s approval. Use panels comprising 6mm thick panes with 12mm wide air spac
e.
Mirrors
Mirrors shall be of uniform thickness, free from waviness, air bubbles and the l
ike. Representative samples
of mirror shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. The mirror glass shall
be clear and silvered by
nitrate precipitation, protected by copper plating with a protective plastic coa
ting on the reverse side. The
mirrors shall be 6 mm thick and cut to sizes as shown with ground and polished e
dges. The mirrors shall be
set on 20 mm thick plywood backing plugged and screwed to wall.
6.15 Glass opening
The glass framing shall both structurally support and adequately cushion the gla
ss. To prevent mechanical
and thermal stresses on the glass, the framing system shall provide openings tha
t are within the tolerances
for squareness, corner offset and bow. These tolerances are listed below.
Item
Tolerance
Squareness
3mm difference in lengths of the diagonals.
Corner Offsets
0.8mm maximum offsets at corners.
Bow
1.6mm bow in a 1.22m length of frame.
Glass frame tolerances
If the variations from these tolerances are anticipated, details of same shall b
e advised to the Engineer. If
site conditions are found to be outside these tolerances corrections must be mad
e before the openings are
glazed.
6.16 Glass Installation
Workmanship shall generally be in accordance with CP 152 and respective British
Standards. The glass is to
be delivered to the site with adequate protection to prevent damage and where po
ssible it is to be fixed in
position immediately after delivery. When fixed the Contractor is to take all ne
cessary precautions to
prevent damage during succeeding building operations and will be entirely respon
sible for the replacement
of any broken or damaged glass at his own cost.
All mastic is to be neatly struck off to agree exactly with site lines inside an
d out.
Rates are to include for all necessary springs, clips, setting blocks, location
blocks and distance pieces and
for taking off and later re-fixing loose beads.
Glass apertures in timber doors are to be bedded in chamois leather glazing stri
p, black ribbon velvet or
P.V.C. glazing strip to the approval of the Engineer.
6.17 Cleaning
All glass shall be thoroughly cleaned and polished on both sides and all paint s
pots and the like completely
removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
6.18 Cat ladders
Cat ladders where noted on the drawings shall be aluminium and unless otherwise
detailed shall be
constructed as follows: Stringers shall be 50 x 6mm flat attached to the structu
re with 75 x 75 x 6 mm
plates bolted to the structure at not less than 300mm center to center.
Safety loops shall be fitted to cat ladders more than 2000mm long and thereafter
at 1000mm intervals.
The width across the loop shall be 685mm and the distance from the centre line o
f the stringers to the inside
of the back of the loops measured at right angles to the stringers shall be 762m
m. The loop material shall be
minimum 50 x 12mm.
6.19 Expansion Joint Trims, Etc.
The Contractor is to provide, at all expansion joints in floors, roofs, ceilings
, walls and columns, appropriate
extruded aluminium expansion joint cover system as appropriate and as shown on t
he drawings and fixed
in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions including all necessa
ry components and fixings.
Floor, wall, roof and ceiling joint covers shall be approved joint seals 50 mm d
eep. Butt joints within
continuing runs shall be a maximum of 6 m apart and will be sealed during instal
lation using patent butt
joint sealing method and be finished standard grey.
Transition pieces at changes of direction and at joints between horizontal and v
ertical joint covers
shall be factory fabricated.
The contractor shall ensure that the sealants wherever used in the interior of t
he building do not exceed the
prescribed VOC limits in the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 11
68.
7 CARPENTRY & JOINERY
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities.
The contractor shall ensure that no ACM s (Asbestos Containing Material) or CAA (C
hromated
Copper Arsenate) treated timber are used in the project.
The structural softwood is to be straight, close grained, with not less than eig
ht annular rings to 25 mm.
Unless otherwise described all sawed softwood members are to be of a permissible
species (as listed in
Schedule 6 of the building Regulations) of Species Group S2 of CP 112 Part 2 and
are to be of GS or
MGS grade, as defined in BS 4978. Imported timber which has been visually or mac
hine stress graded
overseas and which meets the requirement of BS 4978 may be used with the Enginee
r's permission.
7.3 Softwood for joinery
The softwood timber for joinery is to be European Redwood, Swedish, Russian or R
omanian White
wood, or other equal and approved, selected for joinery work.
Softwood joinery timber is to be selected with due regard for the particular pur
pose for which it is to be
used, Appendix A of BS 1186 (Part I) being used as a guide.
Softwood shall comply in all respects with BS. 881/589 and 1186.
Timber shall be of an approved variety and quality suitable for the purpose for
which it is to be used and
equal to samples approved by the Engineer.
All timber shall be properly seasoned and shall be sawed square, straight, and t
rue. All timber shall be free
from the following defects:-
In joined panels each piece shall be of the same species. Joinery for staining o
r polishing shall have all
surfaces of the same character of grain running in the same direction.
All grounds and other timber to be built into concrete or block walls or otherwi
se covered shall first be
coated all over with approved wood preservative and anti-termite solution suitab
le for the position in
which the member is to be incorporated.
7.6 Fire Resistance and Flame retardants
All timber, plywood and boarding shall comply with the requirements of BS 476 an
d 5669 in respect of
fire resistance and the application/treatment of flame retardants. The Contracto
r shall provide a certificate of
assurance that such compliance/treatment has been carried out as specified.
7.7 Plywood
Plywood generally is to comply with BS 1455 and BS 6566 and is only to be obtain
ed from a
manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
The plywood bonding is generally to be type WBP, except where otherwise stated.
The Contractor is only to
use plywood of the required thickness, and under no circumstances is he to make
up thickness by gluing
together sheets of thinner plywood.
The surface grading is to be Grade 1 where to receive clear finish and Grade 2 e
lsewhere, unless
otherwise described. The Contractor is only to use a fine tooth saw when cutting
plywood.
Plywood shall be free from end joints, (including scarf joints in veneers) overl
aps in core sheets, dead
knots, patches and plugs, open defects, depression due to defects in core, insec
t attack, (except isolated
pin-worm holes through face veneers only), fungal attack and from dis coloration
differing from that
normally associated with the species.
Face veneers shall be durable and shall be capable of being finished to a smooth
surface. Face veneers
shall closely match the general joinery timber supplied. They shall be free from
knots, worm and beetle
holes, splits, glue stains, filling and inlay of any kind or other defects.
Adhesives shall comply with the requirements of BS 1203, Grade W.B.P. and shall
ensure proper
adhesion between plies.
All plywood shall be of exterior grade unless otherwise stated.
Where required, lippings are to be hardwood, tongued and glued to the edge of th
e plywood to finish a
minimum of 12mm thick.
7.8 Block Board
Block board is to comply with BS 3444 and bonding and surface grading are to be
as previously described
for plywood.
7.9 Chipboard
Chipboard is to comply with BS 5669 and is to be of the density specified on the
shop drawings.
Chipboard is to be used in accordance with the recommendations of the Chipboard
Promotion Association.
7.10 Veneers
Veneers shall be roll-cut veneers, minimum 0.6mm thick, having a class a facing
in accordance with
French Standards, NF B 53.504.
The veneers shall be factory applied under pressure using urea-formol adhesive b
y manufacturer of the
various components, all veneers shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer.
The reverse faces of veneered boards shall always have a balancing veneer of the
same type. The choice of
veneer is to be to the approval of the Engineer.
Whole sheets are to be used wherever possible to minimize jointly and edges are
to be lipped with
matching hardwood fillets, which are to be the full thickness of the sheet and 6
mm thick.
The Contractor is only to use a fine tooth saw when cutting the veneer faced boa
rds, and any edges
arising are to be faced with a hardwood fillet to match factory produced edges.
7.11 Plastic Laminate
Decorative plastic laminate (melamine) sheeting shall comply with BS 3794 Class
1.
The sheeting shall be capable of being post formed at the edges without cracking
, breaking, chipping or
the like. Under no circumstances shall edges be stuck on but formed from whole s
heets covering the main
body of the item of work.
Only whole sheets shall be used and fixing of the sheeting shall generally be as
stated above for Veneers.
VGS class laminate shall generally be used for doors while HGP class laminate sh
all be used for all other
applications including post forming. Selection of laminate and choice of color s
hall be to the approval of
the Engineer.
7.12 Hardboard
Hardboard is to be standard quality in accordance with BS 1142 Part 2.
7.13 Nails and screws
Nails are to comply with BS 1201 and screws with BS 1210 they are to be of the a
ppropriate approved type
for their intended use.
7.14 Metal work
Metalwork fixings are to be galvanized and of a make and pattern approved by the
Engineer.
7.15 Adhesives
The contractor shall demonstrate that all adhesives and sealants used in the bui
lding interior do not exceed
the prescribed VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) limits in the South Coast Air Qua
lity Management
District Rule 1168.
Adhesives are to be synthetic resin type complying with BS 1204 Part 1, and they
are to be type WBP.
7.16 Access panels and the like
The Contractor is to provide access doors, panels and traps to the complete sati
sfaction of the Engineer,
wherever access may be necessary in order to maintain the services within the bu
ilding.
Accesses which are likely to be used regularly are to be formed with hinged lock
able panels; those used
irregularly are to be capable of being removed by releasing screws or clips.
7.17 Workmanship
Joinery shall comply with BS 1186 Part 2 and CP 112 for structural carpentry, an
d where possible
shall be fabricated in a manufacturer's shop prior to delivery. It shall be accu
rately, properly and soundly
constructed with all moulds and arises clean and sharp. Joinery shall be protect
ed from damage during
storage at Site and throughout the construction period subsequent to fixing.
The terms "frame" or "framed" or "framing" mean work put together by proper carp
entry or joinery
joints, such as mortising and tenoning, dovetaling, dowelling, etc., and the joi
nts are to be as shown,
specified or directed. Butted and screwed or nailed joints or halved joints and
the like will not be deemed
framed and will not be accepted for framed work.
Fixing of all joinery work, including fillets, architraves, frames, glazing bead
s and the like shall be by
means of screws. Nailed work will not be permitted.
Screw heads in work to be painted shall be countersunk and stopped. Screw heads
in wood to be oiled,
varnished or polished shall be plated, with the grain of the pellet in the same
direction as the grain of the
member.
The Contractor is to ensure that the timber is covered in wet weather and uncove
red in dry weather and
is to replace any damaged or otherwise affected items at his own expense.
All factory fabricated units and components shall be stored in their packing unt
il fixing of same commences
to ensure that damage is kept to a minimum.
7.19 Wooden doors
In general for all wooden doors installed inside the building, the contractor is
required to use timber and
composite wood products that are certified. The certification should be complete
with chain of custody
certificates associated with each timber product and with evidence of purchase a
nd installation of the
certified timber products from suppliers and installers.
The contractor shall ensure certification under any approved certification schem
es such as Forest
Stewardship Council (FSC), Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification S
cheme (PEFC),
Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Sustainable Forestry Initiative (SFI) and
Malaysian Timer
Certification Scheme (MTCS). The contractor shall also ensure that all timber an
d timber products will
not include species on the CITES list of endangered species.
The contractor shall ensure that all wood products used for the doors do not exc
eed class E1 levels for
formaldehyde content and do not exceed 5ppm for Pentachlorophenol (PCP) content.
Wood product must
be tested, classified and marked according to the requirement of BS EN 14342:200
5
Unless shown otherwise the non-fire-rated hollow core flush doors are to be cons
tructed from 25mm x
75mm top and bottom rail and stiles, 25mm x 50mm intermediate cross rails at 100
mm centers , both
sides covered with plywood glued and pinned to framing and veneered as described
for painting or clear
finish and with extra blockings in the lock position.
All flush doors are to comply generally with BS459 (1988) in the case of hollow
cored and semi-solid
doors and BS 459 Part 3 in the case of fire resisting doors. Doors are to be con
structed to the
thickness, size and type as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer
. Flush doors
generally shall be solid core flush faced with a teak veneer finish prepared to
receive varnish decoration.
The core of fire-rated solid core flush doors shall be constructed of longitudin
al laminations of precision
planed timber, butt jointed and glued with resin based adhesive under hydraulic
pressure, the whole
forming a rigid, fire resistant raft.
Where flush doors are to have rebated or rounded stiles the lippings at the edge
s must be increased
sufficiently to allow for these labours. Cutting rebates or forming rounding s on
standard sized lippings
will not be permitted.
In the case of hollow cored or semi-solid doors, blockings shall be built into t
he construction of the door to
provide firm fixings for locks, bolts, hinges, springs, and other ironmongery. P
ositions of these
blockings shall be indicated on the facing of the door, care being taken to avoi
d permanent marking.
All doors are to be hardwood lipped on all edges. The lippings shall be a minimu
m of 12mm thick
securely jointed and tongued into the framing of the door. Where rebate meeting
stiles are required on pairs
of door, the lippings on the meeting edges shall be a minimum of 20mm thick.
Doors shall be properly fitted to give a uniform clearance of not more than 3 mm
all round and hinges shall
be let into doors and frames.
Where observation panels are required they shall be formed to the dimensions and
using the type of
glass shown on the drawings. The opening is to be lipped all round similarly to
the edges of the door.
The glass is to bedded in non-setting mastic as described in the "Glazing Sectio
n" and held in position
with two sets of glazing beads to the section shown on the drawings, fixed with
small brads or lost
head nails.
Where observation panels occur in doors with a clear finish, the lippings and be
ads shall be in a hardwood to
match the veneer, and the beads shall be fixed with brass cups and screw.
Fire doors shall have a 1.5 hour fire rating unless otherwise described, and sha
ll generally be constructed
in accordance with the relevant British Standard or DIN Standard. All fire doors
shall be fixed with an
intumescent strip insert in their frame.
All fire doors shall be provided with appropriate certificate from a recognized
and approved testing
agency to British Standards requirements
7.20 Protection, finishing and re-examination
All the wood for joinery works, whether it is to be painted or left clear finish
ed, shall be supplied
properly planed and rubbed down.
The joinery shall be properly protected during fixing and work by other trades,
especially frames and
door linings which may require temporary casings.
The frames shall be fitted with a temporary threshold to retain frame shape whic
h can be removed
before floor finishes are laid.
Units supplied "pre- finished" (veneered doors, pre painted doors etc.) shall be
supplied with an appropriate
wrapping, and the Contractor shall repair or replace any defective work, no matt
er from whatever cause, in
order to hand over the works in perfect condition.
All joinery shall be accurately set out, framed and executed in accordance with
the detailed drawings.
Where timber work is required to be wrought it shall be machine dressed, unless
otherwise directed.
Joinery shall be cut and framed at an early stage, but shall not be glued or wed
ged until the building is
ready to receive it.
Framed work shall be properly mortised and tenoned, wedged and glued, and crampe
d and dowelled
together where necessary. All joints, mort ices, tenons, housings, etc., shall b
e perfectly formed and fitted,
and all joints shall be painted over with the best red lead before fixing. All f
aces of joinery in direct
contact with block work, concrete or rendering shall be painted over with best r
ed lead before fixing.
All external joinery is to be put together with waterproofing glue. Butted, scre
wed or nailed joints will not
be acceptable for framed work.
The jointing and fabrication are to be such that the shrinkage of any part shall
be compensated at the joint,
and shall not impair the strength of the finished work nor interfere with the co
nstruction tolerances.
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to check or prevent capillary p
enetration of water in the
joints and open connections of external joinery works.
The use of nails for fixing any items of joinery will not be permitted. Springs
may be used for glazing
beads only.
Screws shall be in accordance with BS1210 All screws shall be countersunk and pu
ttied and all springs
shall be punched and puttied. All joinery work such as architrave s, beads, etc.,
required to fit against
the contour or irregular surfaces shall be accurately scribed to ensure a close
connection.
Except where the work is to be built-in the Contractor shall obtain all dimensio
ns for joinery works from
the building structure. Carpentry work which does not form an essential part of
the structure fabric shall not
be carried out nor brought on to the building site until required.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary covering and box in and
protect all work liable
to damage, and shall provide temporary doors where necessary during the progress
of the work. The
Contractor shall ensure that the work of other trades is properly arranged to ob
tain the best results, both in
the joinery and the other trades.
After the setting, placing and fixing of the joinery, the Contractor shall exami
ne all the works and ensure
that they are fixed correctly. Until the issue of the Practical Completion Certi
ficate and handover of the
entire work, the Contractor shall replace at his own expense, all missing or def
ective parts. At the end of the
works, the Contractor shall check all opening units and their proper functioning
, and shall grease all moving
parts, if necessary.
After handover, the Contractor shall maintain his work and shall, on request, ca
rry out all easing and
adjustments as required.
In the case where defects appear especially, twisting of doors and the like, the
Contractor shall rectify such
defects at his own expense.
7.21 Ironmongery
General
All ironmongery shall be selected for the appearance and performance required an
d shall be obtained from
a well-known reputable manufacturer and shall bear the stamp of the manufacturer
. Unless specified
otherwise all ironmongery shall be supplied from the same manufacturer.
The Contractor shall not use in the works types or classes of ironmongery other
than those specified
except with approval in writing of the Engineer.
The type, location, quality and finish of ironmongery shall be as shown on the d
rawings and the Contractor
shall submit for approval a comprehensive schedule of ironmongery covering all i
tems required to
complete the works. This schedule shall give catalog references and locations fo
r all ironmongery.
All screws used for fixing ironmongery shall be supplied and shall be of the cor
rect type, material,
finish, size and shape to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Base Metals
Steel
nylon finish
mild steel
aluminium finish
aaluminiu
nickel plated
bronze or brass
stainless steel finish
stainless steel
Base metals for finishes
Workmanship
All ironmongery shall be carefully wrapped and protected until the completion of
the work and any items
or parts which are damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense before
handover of the works.
Any locks with steel components which are to be used in or near damp rooms shall
be hot galvanized and
painted before fixing.
All ironmongery shall be securely fixed or housed and all rebates, holes, etc.,
to take ironmongery shall be
neatly and cleanly executed.
All hinges shall be carefully housed or let into the hinged elements and to the
frames. Intumescent paste
shall be applied around all ironmongery to be fixed on fire doors.
All fitting shall be removed before starting any painting operations and re-fixe
d in place after all painting
work is completed and approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall check and adjust all ironmongery, and oil or grease moving
parts to ensure good
performance.
On completion, all locks, catches and similar types of ironmongery shall be prop
erly cleaned, tested and
oiled or greased.
Suiting
Locks shall be selected from a range of ironmongery having compatible keys. It w
ill be a requirement
that the locks shall be so arranged as to accept a common master key and sub- di
vided so as to offer a
number of sub master keys.
Locks shall employ a construction key facility and shall be delivered to site wi
th copies of a construction
master key for each building or floor. The Contractor shall propose to the Engin
eer and account for the
number of keys required for the construction period. An additional construction
master key will be required
for the Employer's security personnel.
Upon completion of construction, the manufacturer's representative along with th
e Employer and/or his
appointed agent and the Contractor, shall visit the site with a changeover key t
o reset all cylinders and it
shall not be possible to reinstate the construction key facility once this has b
een done. The `changeover'
key shall be destroyed once the construction key has been canceled.
Permanent individual keys and Master Keys shall be handed directly to the Employ
er or his appointed
agent together with Master key charts upon completion of the above procedures.
Replacement keys and cylinders shall only be obtained from the manufacturer by a
n agreed procedure with
the Employer.
7.22 Service ducts and access panels
Provide service ducts and access panels to sanitary appliances and fittings, dry
riser, electric panel and
the like as shown on detailed and location drawings. Ducts and panels shall gene
rally be de-mountable
comprising plywood board fixing to galvanized steel frames with countersunk mach
ine screws. All framing
shall be galvanized and painted. Outside face of ducts and panels shall be finis
hed to receive the adjacent
wall finish. Externally located ducts and panels shall be constructed accordingl
y using only properly treated
materials.
Size of service ducts and access panels shall be as shown. Contractor shall prov
ide details of proposed
framing and fixing details for Engineer's approval prior to commencing work.
7.23 Kitchen cabinet
The contractor shall source and install wooden kitchen cabinets together with al
l the fixtures and fittings
including the kitchen sink, counter tops, cabinet lighting, platform lighting an
d garbage collection bins
required for waste segregation.
For the kitchen cabinets, the contractor is required to use timber and composite
wood products that are
certified. The certification should be complete with chain of custody certificat
es associated with each
timber product and with evidence of purchase and installation of the certified t
imber products from
suppliers and installers.
The contractor shall ensure certification under any approved certification schem
es such as Forest
Stewardship Council (FSC), Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification S
cheme (PEFC),
Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Sustainable Forestry Initiative (SFI) and
Malaysian Timer
Certification Scheme (MTCS). The contractor shall also ensure that all timber an
d timber products will
not include species on the CITES list of endangered species.
All installed wood works shall meet Class E1 levels of formaldehyde content in a
ccordance to the
information.
Detailed shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architects / Engineer for revie
w and approval prior to any
installation activities.
All sealants and adhesives used in the installation shall be non-polluting and s
hall have low VOC content.
7.24 Frames and lining to doors and window
Frames and linings shall be provided and built to the dimensions and sections sh
own on the drawings or
as directed by the Engineer. Frame members are to be framed together and linings
are to be tongued at
angles all in accordance with the principals of good construction.
7.25 Architrave s stops, etc
All architrave s, stops, cover beads, glazing beads, etc., are to be provided and
fixed to the dimensions
and sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer with neatly mi
tred angles.
Stops to half hour fire resisting doors are either to be worked out of the solid
or otherwise fixed with screws
at maximum 18" centers. Stops to one hour fire resisting doors are to be worked
out of the solid, all in
accordance with BS 459 Part 3.
Glazing beads shall be fixed with small brads or lost-head nails or in the case
of work to receive a
clear finish, with brass cups and screws.
7.26 Dry wall partitions
The drywall partitions shall comprise and be constructed using the following spe
cifications:
Materials:
All materials shall be of Gyproc from British Gypsum or equal and approved.
Drywall partitions shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructio
ns. All materials should have
Engineer's approval prior to commencement of Works.
Internal drywall partitions will have a total thickness of 75mm, 0.5 hour fire r
esistance and 44 decibel
average sound reduction index. Two hour resistance drywall partitions shall incl
ude fire resistant lining to
give specified rating.
Drywall partitions having glazing vision panels shall consist of two 6 mm clear
monolithic float glass
with aluminium frame and beading covering the full width of the wall.
Metal Studs:
Metal studs and channels of 48 mm width to be made of light weight cold rolled,
galvanized mild steel to
comply with BS 2989 and BS 2994 Vertical studs shall be installed at 600 mm maxi
mum centers. Dampproof
membrane will be inserted under the floor channel.
Plasterboards:
Gypsum plaster boards of 12.7 mm thick to comply with BS 1230, shall be screwed
to the studs, carefully
cut and jointed.
The lining shall be skimmed with taped joints to receive finish.
Insulation:
All drywall shall receive 40 mm resin bonded glass wool slabs, 68 kg/m, to be ins
talled between the
plasterboard linings.
Services:
Prior to installing insulation and plasterboard on second side, all pipes, switc
h boxes, etc. will be fixed,
inspected and tested if required.
Heavy fixtures such as lavatory cisterns and hand basins shall have a timber fra
me inside the partition
with vertical and horizontal members to take the required fixings.
8 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities,
For use in plastering, sand is to comply with the requirements of BS1198 Table 1
.
For use in beds, granolithic finishing, tile bedding and jointing, etc., sand is
to comply with the requirements
of BS 1199 Table 1.
8.4 Lime
The lime used in plasters is to be hydrated complying with BS 890 Class B.
8.5 Gypsum Plaster
Gypsum plaster shall be a dual-purpose plaster (undercoat and finishing) as reta
rded hemi- hydrates
gypsum Class B as BS 1191 The resultant plaster shall be capable of being trowel
ed to a smooth surface,
highly resistant to cracking and crazing and chemically inert when set.
8.6 Admixtures and plasticisers
All additives and the like shall only be used when approved in writing by the En
gineer and in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
8.7 Color pigments
The contractor shall demonstrate that all paints and coatings used in the buildi
ng are within the
maximum VOC content limits of the European directive 2004/42/CE: 2004/as mention
ed in the PBRS guide
book.
All paints and coatings must have fungal resistance in the wet state (to protect
from fungal growth in
the paint tin) and all wet spaces (bathrooms and kitchens) must have fungal resi
stance that also provide
protection in the dry state (after the paint has been applied and dryed)
Color pigments shall comply with the requirements of BS 1014, and are to be lime
proof and non-fading.
8.8 Plasterboards
Plasterboard shall be self- finished gypsum wallboard, or gypsum lath or baseboa
rd where to receive a
skim coat, complying with requirements of BS 1230
8.9 Metal lathing, stops and beads, expansion joint cover strip
Metal lathing, stops and beads are to suit the plaster and tile thicknesses and
are to be as
manufactured by The Expanded Metal Co. Ltd., U.K., Catnic Components Ltd., or Ha
ffan or equal and
approved, and is to be fixed with non- ferrous nails to walls strictly in accord
ance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Expansion joint, cover strips shall be extruded mill finish aluminium profiles a
s manufactured by
Expandito Ltd. or other equal and approved, fixed in accordance with the manufac
turer's instructions.
8.10 Ceramic tiles
Unglazed ceramic floor tiles and coved skirting are to comply with the requireme
nts of BS 1286 The
glazed ceramic wall and floor tiles are to comply with the requirements of BS 12
81
8.11 Adhesives and sealants
The contractor shall demonstrate that all adhesives and sealants used in the bui
lding interior do not exceed
the prescribed VOC limits as mentioned in the South Coast Air Quality Management
District Rule 1168.
3-4 mm high performance tropical grade thin flatbed water proof membrane adhesiv
e by FEB, BASF or
FOSROC or equal and approved - applied in accordance to manufacturer's written i
nstructions.
Specifically designed for the fixing of tiles in wet areas and provide a waterpr
oof membrane to substrate.
8.12 Surface hardeners
The Contractor shall treat surfaces of cement and sand screeds with suitable med
ium duty surface
hardener, used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8.13 Workmanship generally
Workmanship shall conform to the recommendations of the appropriate Codes of Pra
ctice and to full
satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor is responsible for the provision of
all labour, scaffolding,
materials, tools, plant, etc., required for the completion of the execution of t
he Works, to the full
satisfaction of the Engineer.
8.14 Defective/damaged work
All defective or damaged work shall be cut out and patched as directed by the En
gineer. All patched
surfaces shall match the consistency and finish of the original surface and shal
l be level with adjoining
surfaces.
The plaster for use internally is to be composed of one part cement, one quarter
part lime and four parts of
sand, and is to be applied in two coats to the finished stated thickness.
The render for use externally is to be composed of one part cement and four part
s of sand, and is to be
applied to the finished stated thickness externally. A small quantity of lime ma
y be added to this mix at
the Engineer's discretion.
Plaster or render is to be mixed in clean buckets and gauge boxes. All tools are
to be kept clean and fresh
plaster or render is not to be contaminated with set plaster or render.
The ingredients for the plaster or render are to be mixed three times dry and th
ree times while water is
added. Alternatively mixing may be done by approved mechanical mixers, which are
to be cleaned before
use.
The working time permissible after the addition of water to the plaster or rende
r mix is to be thirty
minutes. Mixed plaster or render that has exceeded this limit is to be removed f
rom the site and not retempered
and used in the works.
All Plastering shall be executed in a neat workman like manner and made well to
wood frames skirting,
pipes, fittings and the like.
Plaster work is to be finished with a smooth, trowel face, free from blemishes a
nd fit to receive decoration.
Render is to be finished with a wood float. Any blown, cracked or otherwise dama
ged plaster or
render shall be condemned by the Engineer and is to be hacked off and made good
with quick setting
plaster at the Contractor's expense.
Full use is to be made of grounds, rules and angle trowels to ensure that all wa
ll faces finish plane and
true to line in all direction and that all angles are straight, true and plumb.
Prices for plastering and
rendering are to ensure that work to walls and ceilings are effectively 'cut' at
the joint so as to minimize
damage due to movement.
8.18 Gypsum plaster
Gypsum plaster shall generally be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions and the
requirements of the previous clause of this section.
Should any plaster be present in subsequent mixes the Engineer shall condemn the
mix and require the
Contractor to clean all the utensils and equipment before continuing with furthe
r mixing?
The gypsum plaster shall be of European origin and suitable for mixing with wate
r. The plaster is gypsum
hemi-hydrates premixed plaster containing special aggregates and additives simil
ar to products
manufactured by British Gypsum and the like.
Preparation of background surfaces shall follow the previous clause for plasterb
oard or concrete which
shall be treated with a proprietary bonding agent. The bonding agent shall be co
mpatible with the gypsum
plaster and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written instr
uctions.
Hand applied plaster shall be applied to solid background with firm pressure. Th
e initial coat shall firstly
be applied as a tight coat, then turning back with the same batch of material to
give an overall thickness of
11 mm. For thicknesses over 11 mm, scratch the first or render coat thoroughly t
o provide a good
mechanical key for subsequent coats. Apply further coats to a maximum thickness
of 8 mm per coat.
Allow each coat to set before applying the next. Rule the floating coat to an ev
en surface and lightly
scratch to provide a key for the application of the thistle finish coat. The min
imum thickness of the
thistle finish coat shall be 2 mm and finished with a smooth, blemish free surfa
ce.
Work to include as well, supply and fix of galvanized mild steel plaster stops t
o finish the plaster at
meeting with skirting leaving 10 mm joint groove.
8.20 Beds for floor tiling
Beds for floor tiling shall be composed of 1 part cement and 4 parts of sand by
volume. Mixing, all as
previously described.
Prices shall include surface preparation, temporary rules, laying to falls and c
ross falls as required by
the room location, making good and the like.
8.21 Sand cement screed
Floor screeds are to compose of one part cement and three parts sand and are to
be smooth and level. Final
difference in levels in any part of the building shall not exceed 2 mm; otherwis
e the Contractor shall be
required to apply an approved self levelling screed to finish the surface. Thick
nesses are generally as
shown on drawings, 70mm in carpet and granite areas
Where beds are to be laid direct on to a concrete sub- floor that has set, the s
urface of the sub- floor is
to be thoroughly cleaned and prepared to ensure a good bond, the surface being c
hipped with a pick if
necessary, brushed well and washed out to remove all dust and dirt, and thorough
ly soaked with water left
on overnight. Surplus water is to be mopped up and immediately prior to laying t
he bed, the sub- floor is to
be coated with a grout of neat cement wash well brushed on as the work proceeds.
The grout must not be
permitted to set before the bed is laid.
Alternatively the Contractor may use a bonding agent applied in conformity with
the manufacturer's
instructions.
Pipes, conduits and the like to be embedded in a screed or topping shall be secu
rely fastened to the concrete
sub base, then apply cement and sand haunch to the side of pipes/conduits and a
layer of chicken wire
mesh overlaid at least 200 mm wide at each side. When these operations have been
completed the
Contractor may commence the laying of screed/toppings.
The Contractor shall lay screeds or toppings in bay sizes as instructed by the E
ngineer including filling
joints between bays as directed. Joints in the concrete sub base shall be contin
ued through the screeds
or toppings.
The screeds or toppings shall be finished to give the surface stated using eithe
r a hand trowel, mechanical
power float or the like. All finishes shall be uniform, smooth and free from rid
ges, trowel marks and other
blemishes. For a non- slip finish apply carborundum particles between successive
troweling operations to
give a smooth surface.
The beds shall be protected from excessively rapid drying out by means of tarpau
lins or polythene
sheeting for a minimum of 7 days after laying.
Laying beds is preferably to be carried out when the building is fully protected
from adverse weather,
however, the Contractor is to protect all beds as necessary from damage by wet w
eather.
8.22 Concrete floor tiles
General Preparation
Before starting work ensure that:
Bases are sufficiently flat to permit specified flatness of finished surfaces, b
earing in mind the permissible
minimum and maximum thicknesses of the bedding material.
Concrete slabs have been allowed to dry out by exposure to the air for not less
than 6 weeks.
Samples
Before placing orders submit representative samples of floor and skirting tile a
s well as an
ENGINEER agreed section of treads/risers and strings. Ensure that delivered mate
rials match samples.
Control Samples
Complete sample areas, being part of the finished work, in ENGINEER approved loc
ations and obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding.
Laying
Laying Generally:
. Joints to be true to line, continuous and without steps, and parallel to the m
ain axis of the space or
specified features.
. Cut tiles to be kept to the minimum, as large as possible and in unobtrusive l
ocations. Cut tiles neatly and
accurately.
. Where positions of dividing strips are not specified they are to be agreed wit
h the engineer.
. Before laying obtain engineers approval for setting out tile joints and any ne
cessary cutting.
. Fix tiles so that there is adhesion over the whole of the background/base and
tile backs.
. Before bedding material sets make adjustments necessary to give true, regular
appearance to tiles and
joints.
Tile Skirting:
. Bed solid to wall with cement based adhesive.
. Ensure joints in skirting are match and align with joints in floor tiles.
In-situ toppings:
. Batch material by volume using accurate gauge boxes.
. Thoroughly mix, including any pigments, in a dry state to a uniform color and
with even distribution of
different size aggregates. Add the minimum water necessary to achieve work abili
ty and mix to a uniform
consistency.
. Lay suitably small areas of screed bed using a 1:3 mortar as clause 390 of a s
tiff plastic consistency and
thoroughly compact to level.
. Within 48 hours brush neat cement slurry into the surface, lay topping and tho
roughly compact by
tamping, toweling and rolling level with the dividing strips.
. Remove excess laitance from the surface and ensure that the aggregate is regul
arly distributed with the
minimum amount of cement matrix visible.
. Cure as specified before finishing.
Dividing strips:
Depth to be such as to give secure anchorage into the mortar bedding. Fix to exa
ct
finished level of floor.
Movement joint metal edgings:
. Stainless Steel angle, size 50 x 50 x 6 mm.
. Fix to base by plastic spacer shims over timber grounds with SS screws at 600
c/c's to exact finished level
of floor.
Immediately after laying, protect tiled surfaces from wind, draughts and strong
sunlight. Cover with
polythene sheets held in close contact with the surface and lapped 100 mm at edg
es. Keep in position for
not less than three days or until grinding commences, whichever is the later.
Grinding:
. Mechanically grind surface using coarse grit stones and water. Dry grinding wi
ll be permitted only where
it is not practicable to use the wet process.
. Thoroughly clean and wash floor to remove all grinding residue and dust.
. Fill holes and depressions in surface with matching grout well pressed in to s
urface and allow to harden.
. Mechanically polish surface with fine grit stones and water to a fine grit fin
ish.
. Wash surface clean and keep free from traffic for at least two days.
Protection:
Adequately protect and keep clean all completed areas. Clean off any droppings i
mmediately.
Cleaning and Maintenance:
. Before practical completion submit the specialist subcontractor's recommendati
ons for cleaning and
maintenance to the ENGINEER.
. Immediately before practical completion thoroughly clean all surfaces in accor
dance with those
recommendations.
External angles and exposed edges of tile areas shall be formed with rounded edg
e tiles. Misfits as well as
damaged or defective tiles shall be removed and replaced with good. Where tiling
abuts frames,
surrounds, etc., or where holes are required for pipes etc., the tiles shall be
carefully cut and fitted to
form a neat close joint. Fair exposed edges of tiled areas shall be finished wit
h tiles having a polished
edge matching the surface.
The wall tiles shall be fixed with adhesive to a true vertical face with continu
ous vertical and horizontal
joints. Joints shall be straight, level, perpendicular and pointed neatly. The w
idth of joints shall be as
directed by the Engineer. Any surplus grout which adheres to the tiling shall be
wiped off with a damp
cloth before it sets hard.
The floor tiles shall be laid symmetrically about the center lines of the room a
nd any cut tiles shall be
made by using a proper tool leaving the cut edges square and smooth. The tiles s
hall be solidly bedded in
cement and sand mortar (1:4) and pointed in colored cement to match the tiling.
The surface of concrete or block work shall be thoroughly cleaned, wetted and we
ll dried before
applying the base coats and screeds. Mixes, thicknesses and methods of applicati
on of beds and backings
far wall and floor tiling shall be as shown on the drawings. Mortar for base coa
ts shall be used within one
hour after mixing and re-tempering will not be permitted. The base coat shall be
applied with sufficient
force to prevent air pockets and to secure a good bond and shall be scored or cr
oss-scratched, when nearly
set, to form a key. The surface of the base coat shall be well wetted and dried
immediately before the tiling
is commenced.
Floor and wall tiling to kitchens shall be run under and behind cupboard units.
In the Garbage Room the
ceramic wall tiles shall extend up to the soffit of the ceiling slab.
Upon completion, all tiling shall be left clean and free from cement or stains.
For areas specified tiles shall be certified acid resistant min. thickness 8mm a
nd size and color to approval
and shall be fixed in Mortar Bed or Adhesive to approval of Engineer.
The agreement of the Engineer to the setting out of tiles is to be obtained befo
re commencing work and a
sample room is to be set out for the Engineer's approval prior to continuing wor
k on other rooms.
Shop drawings shall be prepared where patterns in the wall tiling are required.
Tiles shall be fixed with true horizontal and vertical joints of an even width o
f 1- 2 mm to a true vertical
plane.
Tiles adhesive shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to the commenc
ement of this work. They
shall have low VOC content.
Adequate time shall be allowed to enable complete setting of the tile bedding be
fore joints are grouted.
Grout of a plastic mix of neat cement, color to Engineer's selection, shall be u
sed in grouting up the
joints. The whole of the tiled surface is to be thoroughly cleaned down on compl
etion and left in perfect
condition.
Any cut tiles are to be neatly and cleanly cut using an approved method and cut
tiles are to be used only at
internal corners or in other locations to be approved by the Engineer. All servi
ce points in wall tiling shall
be of drilled holes if the tiles in which they are located are central to the ti
le.
8.24 Floor tiling
Prior to commencing the floor tiling the Contractor shall satisfy himself that t
he surface on which the
tiles are to be laid is satisfactory to receive the tiles. It is the responsibil
ity of the Contractor to provide a
satisfactory surface and or bedding and any remedial work necessary is to be car
ried out at the Contractor's
expense.
Before laying commences the base is to be free from dust, loose material, grease
, plaster, and the like.
Care is to be taken in cutting and fitting and the setting out of tiles and colo
r patterns are to be as shown on
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Shop drawings are required where pa
tterns in the floor
tiling are required. Any adhesive on tile surface or any other finished surface
is to be completely
cleaned off. The tiles shall be laid with true aligned joints of an even width o
f 1- 2 mm and grouted up on
completion.
The work shall be set out from the center of rooms using whole tiles and working
outwards. Rates are to
include for the all cut margins and make up pieces at limits and boundaries.
The flatness of tiled or paved floors must be such that a two meter rule moved i
n all directions shows no
bump or hollow of over 4 mm.
The Contractor is to store ceramic floor tiles in such a way that they are prote
cted from moisture
until laying. Ceramic floor tiles shall be laid in a manner as previously descri
bed in this section onto a
cement and sand bed, with even joints of not wider than 2mm. Care being taken to
adequately fill and
remove all air pockets from beneath the tiles. The tiles are to be grouted with
a tinted mortar mix to
match the tiles, a minimum of twelve hours after completion of the tiling.
All floor tiling in wet area such as bathrooms, toilets, kitchen, washing area,
balconies, garbage rooms and
the like above ground floor level shall be laid over a self- adhesive waterproof
membrane on the
concrete sub base. Provide continuous skirting up walls at least 300 mm high. Fl
oor tiling shall be laid to
falls towards drainage outlet of respective rooms. Protect floor tiling with slu
rry or like material on
completion and clean off and prepare flooring to satisfaction of Engineer.
8.25 Granite work
Granite shall be obtained from a source/quarry that has the capacity to provide
quantity, quality and sizes
required for the Works.
Samples of all granite to be used in the Works are to be submitted to the Engine
er for approval prior to
confirmation of order and commencement of same on site. Actual materials used in
the works shall match
the approved samples.
Granite shall be of the best quality, smooth, uniform in color texture and thick
ness, free from voids, holes,
vents, cracks, earth veins, objectionable irregularities and laminations or stru
ctural weakness.
Where vein colors are acceptable, they shall, insofar as they form a distinct pa
ttern, be laid to complete the
pattern or in the direction of the vein.
Any chipped or stained pieces are to be removed from site and replaced at the Co
ntractor's expense.
Granite for use as counter tops & wall cladding is first to be shown on working
drawings submitted
for the Engineer's approval. These drawings shall give site dimensions, relation
ship with other materials;
detail the key members of each slab together with details of anchorages and the
like. No granite shall
be worked until these drawings are approved. Work in this section shall be compl
eted to the tolerance
set out in CP 298 and BS 5390
The Contractor is to supply all necessary stainless steel fixings, dowels and co
ntinuous stainless steel
supports at the base of wall linings as required, and all in accordance with CP
298. All fixings are to be concealed when the work is complete.
All external angles are to be rebated jointed. Where granite abuts door frames a
nd the like the edges shall
be chamfered.
The Contractor is to use the following tables as a guide to the minimum number o
f anchors required to
support each slab:
Slab Size
No of anchors per slab
Not exceeding 0.06 m
2
over 0.60 not exceeding 1.20 m
3
over 1.20 not exceeding 3.60 m
4
Over 3.60 not exceeding 6.00 m
6
The granite finish shall be as described and as samples approved by the Engineer
before ordering of
the material commences.
Unless otherwise instructed wall linings are to be set 45 mm clear of the struct
ural backing and the rear of
each slab is to be coated with shellac or bitumen paint to prevent staining from
behind.
Thresholds
All thresholds shall be one piece fixed at floor openings of the material type a
pproved by the Engineer.
The threshold shall be bedded in cement and sand mortar and be the same width as
the opening in which
they are being fixed. Shape and finish to Engineer's approval.
8.26 Suspended ceilings
General
The Contractor shall be responsible for the co- ordination of the service and su
spended ceilings, including
checking the ceiling heights and setting to module, which shall be to the exact
locations required by
the Engineer, who shall confirm and approve the setting out and location of all
fittings, luminaries,
switches, smoke detectors, security alarms and detectors, air conditioning grill
es and controls and the like.
Suspended ceilings shall be installed by specialists. They shall be capable of o
utstanding normal air
pressure and suction forces action both below the ceiling and within the ceiling
void.
The Contractor shall prepare, and submit for approval, fully dimensioned working
drawing prepared
from the general working drawings of the Engineer and from a site survey.
These drawing shall coordinate the service and ceiling installation. Setting out
points common to all trades
including service shall be established early in the manner described and shown o
n the working drawings.
Rod type suspension system hangers and hook bolts for suspension systems shall b
e fixed to structural
concrete soffits. Self - drilling threaded metal sockets of an approved type sha
ll be used for fixing to
concrete. Suspension and framing shall be of metal sections only. No timber fram
ing will be accepted.
The ceilings shall be left perfectly flat and shall not show a deviation of more
than 3 mm from a 3 meter
straight edge. The Contractor shall take all possible precautions to eliminate a
ny defects.
Price shall include for cutting and fitting ceilings around obstacles and neatly
finishing the edges of the
work.
Tiles and ceiling forming a grid or pattern shall be set out on the axis of the
room in both directions.
Suspended ceilings shall not be erected until the windows have been glazed, the
building closed in,
the plaster work dried out, all wet work completed and the building suitably air
conditioned; relative
humidity must not exceed 70% and the temperature must be maintained within the r
ange 15- 30C.
The design of and dimensional tolerances set by the manufacturer for accessory i
tems such as formed
wire hangers, spring spacer clips, tile retainers, and spacer bars shall be such
as to assure satisfactory
performance of their intended function in the suspension system. Failure attribu
table to such
accessories to control alignment, prevent undesirable rotation or other unsatisf
actory performance
which results in unfavorable appearance will be cause for their rejection.
. The area to receive treatment shall be dry and be satisfactorily closed agains
t excessive traffic and be
protected against weather before work is started.
. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications
except as modified by this
Specification.
. Install units in a true and even plane, in straight line course laid out symme
trically about center lines of
ceiling or panel, continuing pattern, through wall openings or as indicated. Bor
der tile shall not be less
than 15 cm wide.
. Fit border units neatly against vertical surfaces.
. Seal joints in units around pipes, ducts, and electrical outlets with acoustic
al sealant.
. Carefully coordinate and fit units to grilles, lighting fixtures and other rel
ated items of work.
. In determining spacing and locations of hangers for main runners and carrying
channels, take into
consideration the weight of grilles, fixtures, etc. that are to be installed in
conjunctions with acoustic
ceilings.
Gypsum plaster shall be procured form an approved European source and comply wit
h the requirements
of BS 1191 Parts 1 and 2 ensure the highest standard of workmanship.
All units with an external angle shall be moulded to achieve perfectly straight
and slightly rounded
arises. The components shall be fixed on to a rigid framework so as to provide a
level and even surface with
all joints and irregularities made good with gypsum plaster.
The Contractor shall submit his mix proportions for approval, which shall includ
e gypsum, vermiculite
and fiberglass crystals. The minimum thickness of the gypsum components shall be
20mm irrespective of
their purpose. All finishes shall be left clean and smooth to receive the specif
ied finish.
All sealers, primers, undercoats and thinners shall be the products recommended
by the manufacturers of
paint used for the finishing coat.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings colors shall be selected by the Archi
tect.
The term "Paint" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels, lacquers, sealer an
d other coating or inorganic
finish, whether used as primer, intermediate or finish coats.
The Contractor shall protect all painting and decorating work and shall provide
adequate dust sheets,
canvases, etc., in order to protect adjacent work.
The Contractor shall repaint at his own expense any work where the paint is foun
d to be incorrectly
applied.
Brushes, pails, kettles, etc. used in carrying out the work shall be clean and f
ree from foreign matter.
They shall be thoroughly cleaned before being used for different types or classe
s of materials.
The Contractor is to submit to the Engineer for approval the brand and quality o
f the paints he proposes to
use. If approval is given to a brand of paint the contractor shall use the prime
rs undercoat, etc.,
manufactured or recommended by the manufacturer of that brand and notwithstandin
g anything herein
contained shall prepare the surface and carry out the work in accordance with th
e manufactures
specification to give the best finish required on the surface to be painted.
All paints to be used under this Contract shall be delivered to and stored on th
e Site in sealed labeled
containers a minimum of 30 days prior to application. Upon notification by the C
ontractor that the material
is at the site, samples of each material shall be obtained at random from sealed
containers by the Engineer
in the presence of an authorized representative of the Contractor.
Samples shall be clearly identified by commercial name, type of paint and intend
ed use. If judged
necessary by the Engineer the paint sample may be tested for compliance at the C
ontractor's expense in a
laboratory designated by the Engineer.
Complete color charts for the paints to be used shall be submitted to the Engine
er for approval and the
preparation of the color schedules.
Paints shall be factory manufactured and delivered to the site in unbroken conta
iners which shall show
the designated name, formula, color, manufacturer's directions and name of manuf
acturer all of which shall
be plainly legible at the time of use.
Pigmented paints shall be supplied in containers not larger than 25 kg. All pain
ts shall be products
that have a minimum of 2 years satisfactory field service.
The materials to be used as required by the Schedule of Finishes and the drawing
s shall be of the best
quality and of approved types, obtained from an approved manufacturer.
. The product shall be thoroughly mixed and ground. It shall not be settled, cak
ed or thickened to such a
degree that it cannot be mixed easily with a paddle by stirring to a good unifor
m brushing consistency.
. The color of the paint shall match the approved sample.
. Paint shall show no evidence of cracking, chipping, flaking or dusting.
. Paint shall not skin (form a thin membrane surface on the top of the liquid) w
ithin 48 hours in a filled
closed container.
. Paint in the containers during and after application shall not be abnormally p
ungent, offensive or
disagreeable.
. Paint shall show easy brushing, good flowing and spreading and good leveling p
roperties.
. Those properties shall be demonstrated on test specimens at the request of the
Engineer. Coats that have
any noticeable pull under a large brush and that show poor spreading and flowing
properties will not be
acceptable.
. Paint shall dry to a uniform, smooth, flat or semi-gloss appearance under cond
itions of illumination and
wearing. There shall be no laps, skips, high-lighted spots or brush marks. Tinte
d paints shall dry to a
uniform color.
. Relocating of a previous painting surface shall produce no lightening softenin
g or other film
irregularities.
Knotting
Knotting shall be composed of dissolved shellac or other resin which remains una
ffected by the resinous
materials in the wood or the following paint coating, thereby preventing the res
inous materials in the
timber leaching into the paint film and causing discoloration or defective dryin
g, it shall be in
accordance with BS 1336
Filling
Filler shall be "Polyfilla", "Alabastine" or other equal and approved.
Stopping
Stopping for woodwork to receive clear finish shall be tinted to match surroundi
ng woodwork, to approval.
Stopping for internal woodwork, plywood, hardboard, and fiberboard shall be lins
eed oil putty to BS
544 tinted to match the color of the undercoat.
Stopping for external woodwork shall be white lead paste and gold size well mixe
d.
Thinners
Thinners shall be approved turpentine or white spirit to BS 245 Where paints are
specified to be water
thinned, fresh water shall be used for thinning.
Satin
Satin for woodwork shall be an approved brand of oil satin complying with BS.121
5
Etch Primer
The etch primer shall be mordant solution, slightly acidic in nature and contain
ing solvents, for applying
to new smooth metallic surfaces to remove grease, organic soaps and provide a ph
ysical key, or other
equal and approved.
Polyurethane Lacquer
Polyurethane lacquer for woodwork shall be of an approved manufacture.
Varnish
Varnish for interior woodwork shall be an approved brand, oil varnish. Varnish s
hall form a hard flexible
transparent and quick drying film. It shall have low VOC content.
Linseed Oil
Linseed oil for woodwork shall be refined linseed oil to comply with BS 246
Priming Paints
Priming paints shall be the primer recommended by the manufacturer of the finish
ing paint or:
. For woodwork-Alkyd-based or priming paint to comply with BS 2521 and 2523.
. For steel work red oxide priming paint to comply with BS 2524
. For galvanized, zinc or aluminium work- grey zinc chromate priming paint.
. For concrete, block work, plaster, plasterboard and the like- alkali priming p
aint.
Undercoating
Undercoating shall be:
Plasterboard surfaces shall have taped joints and the surface puttied to the sat
isfaction of the Architect.
The surfaces shall be completely dry and shall be brushed free of impurities imm
ediately prior to the
commencement of the painting work.
Efflorescence shall be completely removed by rubbing down with dry coarse cloths
followed by wiping
down with damp cloths and allowed to dry. All surfaces shall be rubbed down with
fine glass paper and
brushed free of dust before applying any form of decoration.
Concrete block work and plastered surfaces which are to receive paint shall be g
iven one thin coat of oil
putty and allowed to dry for at least two days. The surfaces shall then be rubbe
d down with fine glass
paper and given a second thin coat of oil putty and when completely set shall be
rubbed down again with
fine glass paper before applying the painting system.
Emulsion paint shall be applied by brush or roller and shall consist of primer a
nd two full coats of paint.
Texture paint shall be uniformly applied at a rate of not less than a 4m per litr
e by overlapping, crisscross
rollers or spray in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where finis
hed surfaces are described
as having smooth texture finish, the overall thickness of the applied finish sha
ll be less than 1.5 mm.
Where finished surfaces are described as having rough texture finish, the overal
l thickness of the applied
finish shall be not less than 2 mm. Finished surface shall be uniform in sheen c
olor and texture, free from
runs, sags, crawls or other defects.
Oil paint shall be applied by brush or roller and shall consist of a priming coa
t, two undercoats and one
finishing coat of paint.
Fire resistant paint shall be applied in three coats over a primer all in strict
accordance with the
manufacturer s instructions.
All plastered or rendered surfaces shall be twice stopped with approved putty fi
ller. The first coat of
stopping shall be applied after the primer coat has dried out completely. And th
e second coat after the first
undercoat application. Each coat of stopping shall be allowed to dry and harden
thoroughly and shall then
be rubbed by sandpaper until smooth surface is achieved.
The emulsion or P.V.A paint is to be applied in three coats, the first a thinned
coat and the other two
full coats. Each coat shall be allowed to dry and harden thoroughly before the n
ext coat is applied.
Lacquer to Woodwork
Woodwork to lacquered shall be cleaned of impurities. Knots shall be treated wit
h two coats of knotting.
Where shown on the Drawings or required by the Architect the wood shall be stain
ed with a water or
spirit stain to the approval of the Architect.
All surfaces are to be thoroughly dry and cleaned and sanded down and all nail h
oles or similar defects shall
be filled and leveled up with approved stopping.
The finish shall be applied in two coats. The first coat shall be pigmented stai
n wax brush applied. The
surface shall be allowed to dry for 2 - 10 minutes and then rubbed with a cloth
in a rotary motion to remove
excess stain and produce an even surface.
The first coat shall be allowed to dry completely before application of the seco
nd coat. The second coat shall
be natural (clear) stain wax, buffed.
The Architect shall select the stain color and the Contractor shall allow for pr
eparing sample panels for
approval and these sample panels will provide the standard for the work.
Varnishing
All surfaces to be varnished shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned and sanded down
and all nail holes or
similar defects shall be filled and leveled up with approved hard stopping. Sand
ing shall follow the line
of the grain. Knots shall be treated with two coats of knotting.
Two or three coats of clear varnish shall be applied as recommended by the manuf
acturer of the varnish
or as directed by the Architect.
Painting to Woodwork
Woodwork to be painted shall be cleaned of impurities. Knots shall be treated wi
th two coats of knotting.
Priming paint shall be applied by brush. Two coats shall be applied to end grain
. Priming paint shall be
applied on Site after the Architect has approved the joinery and before it is fi
xed.
When the priming paint is dry, all cracks, holes, open joints and the like shall
be filled with stopping and
rubbed down with fine glass paper.
Two undercoats and one finishing coat of paint shall be applied by brush.
The priming paint and undercoats shall be lightly rubbed down with glass paper t
o remove blemishes,
and all dust removed before the application of subsequent coats.
Painting to Metalwork
Steel work delivered to the Site un-primed shall be cleaned of impurities, scrap
ped and wire brushed to
remove rust and painted with one coat of priming paint applied by brush.
Steel work delivered to Site primed shall be cleaned of impurities and damage to
the priming paint and
made good with priming paint.
Metal which is concealed shall be prepared and primed as above and shall be pain
ted with two priming
coats and one finishing coat of paint applied by brush.
9.4 Guarantees
For all external and internal painting works, the Contractor shall provide a gua
rantee for material and
workmanship to be valid for a period of five years from the date of practical co
mpletion certificate,
unless stated otherwise.
10 EXTERNAL WORKS
10.1 General
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities,
The cement used in the manufacture of precast concrete pavin blocks shall comply
with the requirements
of either BS 12, 4027 or BS146 The cement content of compacted shall not be less
than 400 kg/m.
. Aggregates:
The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matter having ph value n
the basic range (7-9) and
shall conform to BS 3148 (1990), and as specified for the concrete works.
. Pigments:
All arises shall be clean and of uniform dimension. Wearing surface area shall b
e not less than 70% of the
plan area.
Tolerance:
Length < > 2mm
Width < > 2mm
Thickness < > 2mm
Compressive Strength
The average compressive strength of the block on delivery when sampled and teste
d in the manner
described below shall not be less than 49 N/mm.
Sampling Block
Two blocks shall be drawn from each group of 1000 blocks for sampling 10 blocks
every designated
5000 block section or part thereof in a consignment.
All samples shall be clearly marked at the time of sampling in such a way that t
he designated section or
part thereof and the consignment represented by the sample, are clearly defined.
. Where possible, the plan area o the wearing surface area shall be calculated b
y multiplying the length
by the width.
. Alternatively the plan area or the wearing area shall be calculated by cutting
our shapes of cardboard
and weighing it to the nearest 0.01g.
As
2000 ms/m
As
Area of block (m)
ms
Mass of the cardboard shape matching test block (g) the block shall be placed
wearing surface uppermost on the cardboard.
ms
Mass of 200 x 100mm cardboard rectangle (g) cut from the same cardboard.
Plywood nominally 4m thick, shall be used as packing between the upper and lower
faces of the specimen
and the machine platens, and these boards shall be larger than the specimen by a
margin of at least 5mm at
all points. Fresh packing shall be used for each specimen tested.
The load shall be applied without shock and increased continuously at a rate of
approximately 15 N/mm
per minute until no greater load can be sustained. The maximum load applied to t
he specimen shall be
recorded. The strength shall be expressed to the nearest 0.1 N/mm.
Certificate of Compliance
This certificate is to be provided by the manufacturers at the same time of sale
as per item No. 12 of BS
6717.
Unpaved Areas
Unpaved areas within the boundary of the site shall be rated over to remove all
rubbish and other
unwanted materials and shall be leveled off.
Precast concrete kerbs
. Precast concrete kerbs shall comply with BS 340 and shall be laid and bedded o
n a mortar bed on a
concrete foundation as shown on the Drawings.
. The carriageway or foundation shall be thoroughly cleaned and prior to placing
the backing, the line
levels and joints of all units shall be approved by the Engineer.
. Precast concrete kerbs shall be hydraulically pressed.
. For radii less than 12m, radius kerbs shall be used.
. Any units deviating more than 3mm in 3m from line or level shall be taken up a
nd re-laid.
. Where filling placed adjacent to the kerb is likely to have a harmful effect o
n the kerbs, due to its
aggressive chemical nature then the kerbs shall be protected from the fill mater
ial by a method agreed
with the Engineer or as shown on the Drawings.
. Expansion joints will be provided at 6m spacing along the kerb run. The expans
ion joints shall be
formed of suitable flexible material to the approval of the Engineer.
. New kerbs shall match existing kerbs around the perimeter of the site and shal
l be painted as required.
. Allow for flush kerbs/drop kerbs at crossings and ramps.
Road Markings
. The markings shall be white or yellow continuous or intermittent lines, letter
s, figures, arrows or
symbols laid as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
. Road markings shall consist of a hot thermoplastic material complying with the
requirements of BS
3262: Part 1 & 2: 1989. All markings are to be reflectorized incorporating a min
imum 10% of ballotini
glass beads. The grading of glass beads shall be as per BS 6088 The thermoplasti
c shall contain a
minimum of 10% titanium dioxide. The thermoplastic material shall be laid to the
following
thicknesses: - Screed or sprayed markings 1.5 +/- 0.5 mm. The thickness specifie
d shall be exclusive of
surface applied ballotini and not greater than 3mm when finished. The method of
thickness
measurement shall be in accordance with Appendix H of BS 3262
. The Contractor shall state the maximum safe heating temperature, the temperatu
re range of apparatus
and the method of laying to be used.
All markings are to be reflectorised by the incorporation of ballotini and shall
also have a surface
application of ballotini applied evenly at the rate of 400-500 g/m2. Paint shall
be machine applied
except in locations where it is not practical to do so. The paint shall then be
screed applied as agreed or
instructed by the Engineer.
. If required by the Engineer a tack coat compatible with the markings shall be
applied in accordance
with the manufacturer s instructions prior to the application of thermoplastic mat
erial.
. Road marking materials shall only be applied to surfaces which are clean and d
ry.
. Markings shall be free from raggedness at their edges and shall be uniform and
free from streaks.
Carriageway lane and edge lines shall be laid by approved mechanical means to a
regular alignment.
. Paint shall be road marking paint supplied by an approved manufacturer. It sha
ll be suitable for
applying by brush, roller or by airless spray to concrete or asphalt pavements a
nd to kerbs to give a
chemically stable film of uniform thickness and shall be either chlorinated rubb
er, one pack epoxy or
alkyd based.
Colors shall be white, yellow and black. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer
, the paint shall have the
following characteristics:
Characteristic
Value
Solide (% by volume)
40 min
Specific Gravity
1.20 - 1.32
Viscosity
200 - 250 CPS
Wet film thickness
75 - 125 microns
Dry film thickness
30 - 50 microns
Paint Characteristics
White paint shall be standard not less than 6% by mass of titanium dioxide as a
pigment, conforming to
type A (anatase) or type R (rutile) specified in BS 1851
Yellow paint shall be standard color BS 381C No. 356, except where an alternativ
e shade has been specified
in the contract, and contain not less than 6% by mass of a suitable yellow pigme
nt.
The paint shall be supplied fresh and ready for use in sealed containers and sto
red in accordance with
the manufacturer s instructions. The paint shall be applied without the use of thi
nners or other additives
Paint shall be applied at a covering rate recommended by the manufacturer and ap
proved by the Engineer.
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC, BSEN and Agreement Board Ce
rtificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities.
Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.
11.2 Structural Specifications
. Design Code: All design works shall be in accordance with the INTERNATIONAL BU
ILDING CODE
IN THE EMIRATE OF ABU DHABI.
. Foundations, Ground Beams & Suspended Slab: The concrete strength for Foundati
ons (pile caps, raft
over piles), Ground beams & suspended slab is fcu= 40 Mpa.
. Reinforcement Steel: The yield strength of steel: fy =460 Mpa.
. Steel material specification :
The following is the list of the materials standards and specifications for whic
h the building components
have been designed
Below are standard material specifications that will be used in the project. MUC
Engineering reserves the right
to make material substitutions and changes in specifications as and when deemed
necessary.
No.
Materials
Specifications
Minimum Strength
1
Built-Up Members
ASTM A 572M Grade 345 Type 1
Fy = 34.5 kN/cm
Or EN 10025-2 2004 S355JR
2
Hot-Rolled Members
Beams & Columns
EN 10025-2 2004 S355JR
Fy = 34.5 kN/cm
Or ASTM A 572M Grade 345 Type 1
Tubes
JIS G 3466 STKR 490
Fy = 32.5 kN/cm
Or EN 10210 - 1 S355J211
Channels
EN 10025-2 2004 S355JR
Fy = 35.5 kN/cm
Pipes
Space Frames : JIS G 3444 STK 500
Fy = 35.5 kN/cm
Handrails: ASTM A 53M Type E or S Grade A
Fy = 20.5 kN/cm
3
Cold Form Secondary Members
Black Steel
ASTM A 607 Grade 50
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
Or ASTM A 1011M HSLAS Grade 340 Class 1
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
Galvanized Steel
ASTM A 653 SS Grade 340 Class 1, Z275
Fy = kN/cm
4
Sheeting and Liner Panels
Zincalume Steel
ASTM A 792M SS Grade 340 Class 2, Azm 150
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
Aluminum
ASTM B 209M SS Alloy 3003 Temper H-26
Fy = 14.5 kN/cm
Galvanized steel
ASTM A 653M (Grade) Z275
Fy = kN/cm
5
Roof & Wall Sandwhich Panels
Zincalume Steel
ASTM A 792M SS Grade 340 Class 2, Azm 150
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
Aluminum
ASTM B 209M SS Alloy 3003 Temper H-26
Fy = 14.5 kN/cm
Galvanized steel
ASTM A 653M Grade FS Type B (LFQ) Z275
Fy = 25.0 kN/cm
6
Valley Gutters **
Galvanized steel
ASTM A 653M SS Grade 340 Class 1, Z275
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
7
Mezzanine Deck Panels
Galvanized steel
ASTM A 653M SS Grade 340 Class 1, Z275
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
ASTM A 653M SS Grade 550, Z180
Fy = 55.0 kN/cm
8
X-Bracing Members
Cables
ASTM A 475 Extra High Strength
Breaking Load=119.7 kN
Rods
ASTM A 615M Grade 300
Fu = 50.0 kN/cm
Or ASTM A 36M
Fu = 40.0 kN/cm
Angles
ASTM A 572M Grade 345 Type 1
Fu = 45.0 kN/cm
9
Anchor Bolts
ASTM A 36M Hot Dip Galvanized to ASTM A 153 Class C
Fu = 23.5 kN/cm
Fu = 36.0 kN/cm
ASTM F 1554 Grade 55 Hot Dip Galvanized to ASTM A
153 Class C
Fu = 38.0 kN/cm
Fu = 49.0 kN/cm
10
High Strength Bolts
ASTM A 325M Class 8.8 Type 1 Hot Dip Galvanized to
ASTM A 153 Class C Or DIN 939 Class 8.8 Hot Dip
Galvanized
Fu = 83.0 kN/cm
11
Machine Bolts
DIN 939 Class 4.6/4.8 Electro Plated Yellow Chromate
Fu = 40.0 kN/cm
MUC Engineering reserves the right to substitute or entirely some of the materia
ls in case of material nonavailability
or supply shortage.
Concrete cover for Foundations:
Foundation Element or Condition
Minimum cover
1) Shallow Foundations
Exposed to Seawater
Not manufactured under plant conditions
Manufactured under plant control conditions
3 inches (75mm)
2 inches (50mm)
In accordance with section 7.7.3 of ACI
318
3) Precast, pre stressed deep foundation elements
Exposed to seawater
Other
2.5 inches (65mm)
In accordance with section 7.7.3 of ACI
318
4) Cast-in-place deep foundation elements not enclosed by a
steel pipe , tube or permanent casing
1 inch (25mm)
6) Structural steel core within a steel pipe, tube or permanent
casing
2 inches (50mm)
7) Cast in place drilled shafts enclosed by a stable rock steel
1.5 inches (40mm)
General Properties
Property
Value
Frost Acid and Alkali Resistant
The tiles shall be divided at intervals to form large panels for movement and ex
pansion purposes as well as
for aesthetic reasons. Such joints shall be filled with high quality polysulphid
e sealant, color to Engineer s
approval.
Tiling setting plans shall be prepared by the Contractor giving all details, jun
ctions, window and door
connections, openings, special shaped fittings, expansion joints, layout etc. fo
r Engineer approval.
Like any other item on the project, the directions and approvals of the Engineer
not relieve the Contractor
from his responsibility towards the works he executes.
Steel Works
Specified in this Section:
The provision, fabrication, erection, connection, grouting, galvanizing and shop
painting of all structural
steel work members.
General Requirements
Method
Fabricate and erect the structural steel in a safe manner, without interfering w
ith or damaging adjacent
structures.
. The steelworks must be done according to the standard DIN or equivalent BS sta
ndards.
. The quality of the steel work and its connections (bolts, weldings etc.) must
be verified with tests and
material certificates. This material certificate must show the mechanical proper
ties of the used material.
. All steel members shall be shop coated with one coat primer and field painted
with two coats vinyl or
equal approved. Color to Engineer s choice.
Identification Marks
Provide suitable and sufficient marks or other means for identifying each member
, and for the correct
setting out, location, erection and connection of the steel work. Mark bolted co
nnections to shows the
bolting category.
. Steel work shall be blast cleaned to remove all mill scale and other contamina
tion. The surface shall be
cleaned to second quality standard (CLASS S2).
. No blasting or priming shall take place when the relative humidity exceeds 90%
and condensation is
likely, or when the surface temperature of the steel work is at or below dew poi
nt.
. The abrasive used during blast cleaning shall be steel, malleable iron or chil
led iron grit of a grading
suitable to give maximum surface amplitude of 100 microns.
. All surface defects likely to be detrimental to the protective system such as
cracks, surface laminations
and deep pitting, shall be removed. Fabrication surface defects such as fins at
saw cuts and burns shall
be similarly removed.
. All dirt and debris shall be removed from surface after blasting by vacuum cle
aner, airline or brush. If
any residues are trapped in the paint the affected area shall be re-blasted and
re-coated.
. All shop weld areas and shop bolted or riveted connections shall be blast clea
ned to the same standards
as adjacent steel. All weld stag and spatters shall be removed.
. Blast cleaned surface shall be over coated within four hours of the start of c
leaning, and the steel shall
not be exposed out of doors during this period.
Quality Control
Shop Drawings
Supply shop drawings of the structural steel work prepared in accordance with AS
1101.3, or equal
approved showing the relevant details of each assembly, treatment and erection,
including:
. Identification;
. Steel type and grade;
. Dimensions of items;
. Required camber, where applicable, hot or cold
. Forming and post weld heat treatment
. Location of temporary connections;
. Weld categories and bolting categories;
. Orientation of members;
. Location of temporary connections;
. Surface preparation methods and coating system;
. Procedures necessary for shop and site assemble;
. Lifting and support points for handling and transport;
. Required fixings for adjoining building elements;
. Procedures for erection including temporary bracing.
Fabrication
Do not commence fabrication until the Engineer s permission to use the relevant sh
op drawings has been
obtained.
Materials
Standards
Materials generally: To AS 4100 section 2 or equal approved. Cold formed section
s: To AS 1538 clause 1.7
or equal approved.
Compliance with Standard
For each batch of steel supplied to the works, provide certified mill test repor
ts or test certificates issued
by the mill as evidence of compliance with the material standards specified.
Independent Tests:
Alternatively, have the steel tested by an independent testing authority for com
pliance with the chemical
composition and mechanical test requirements of the appropriate material standar
ds.
Fabrication
Standards: To AS 4100 Section 14 or equal approved.
Site Work: Other than work shown on the shop drawings as site work do not fabric
ate structural steel on
site without prior approval.
Welding
Welding Procedures: Before commencing fabrication submit details of proposed wel
ding procedures,
using the form in Appendix E of AS 1554.1 or equal approved.
Approval: Do not commence fabrication until welding procedures have been approve
d by the Engineer.
Weld Category: Use category SP to AS 1554.1 and executed according to DIN 18800
or equivalent BS
standards.
Site Welds: Other than site welds, if any, shown on the shop drawings, do not we
ld on site without
prior approval. Wherever possible locate site welds in positions for down hand w
elding.
Bolting
Connection Bolts: If the connection bolts are not shown on the Drawings or speci
fied, use hot dipped
galvanized high strength bolts, nuts and washers to As 1252 and bolting category
8.8/s or equal approved.
Lock Nuts: Provide lock nuts for bolts in moving parts or parts subject to vibra
tion and for vertical
bolts in tension.
Erection
Temporary Connections:
Anchor Bolts:
For each group of anchor bolts provide a template with setting out lines clearly
marked for positioning
the bolts when casting in.
Grouting at Supports:
Do not grout if the temperature of the base plate or the footing surface exceeds
38 C.
Methods: Use high strength cementitious grout. Minimum thickness: 15mm, Maximum
thickness: 35mm
Finishes
Steel work Coating System
Definition:
Steel work coating system shall be deemed to include powder coating, painting, g
alvanizing and fire
protection coatings included in the scope of this sections, and the applicable s
urface preparation methods.
Primer: Two pack epoxy zinc phosphate to min. 60-70 microns DFT.
Barrier Coat: Polyurethane to min. 60-70 microns DFT Color and texture to Engine
er s choice.
Surface Preparation
Steel Surfaces Generally: (Including surfaces not otherwise treated, and contact
surface with concrete
encasement or grout): Remove loose mill scale, loose rust, oil, grease, dirt, gl
obules of weld metal weld
slag and other foreign matter.
Insulated Profiled Aluminium Roofing / Cladding
The Aluminium sheeting shall comprise of profiled aluminium sheeting in composit
e insulated panel
form. The material shall conform to relevant BS specification. The fixing shall
be as per recommended
manufacturer's detail and to Engineer's approval. The end laps shall be minimum
200mm.
The aluminium sheeting shall be of a quality not less than the requirement of BS
4300/6 conforming to
alloy 3105 with H6 or H8 temper.
The aluminium sheeting shall further conform to the requirements for material an
d finishes as laid down
in BS 4868 1972 Profiled Aluminium Sheet for Building".
The roofing and cladding system shall be fully co-ordinated with the space frame
design, roof lights,
drainage and other services. Slope shall be provided for effective drainage as p
er drawings and as instructed
by the Engineer. External and internal flushing, gutters etc. shall be provided
as required. Allow for any
openings required for services such as AC ducts to pass through.
The scope of work shall include design, engineering, fabrication, supply and ins
tallation of roofing /
cladding specified. Shop drawings including but not limited to design, fabricati
on, and installation and
fixing details including necessary calculations and details at all junctions sha
ll be submitted for approval.
Outer Skin
The outer skin is of aluminium alloy 3105 sheet 0.7mm gauge with 45/250 trapezoi
dal profile, (min
45mm high), cover width 1000mm with a factory applied semi-gloss, two coat PVF2
paint system. Color to
Engineer s choice.
Insulation Core
The insulation core comprises factory injected rigid closed cell fire retardant
polyurethane foam. The
minimum depth of insulation will be 50mm between the liner sheet and the valley
bottom of the outer
sheet. The thermal 'U' valve shall be 0.4 W/m2 deg.C or less. The contractor sha
ll ensure that the
thermal insulation material has an ozone depleting potential (ODP) of zero and a
low Global warming
potential of less than five (GWP<5).
Material Property
Test Method
Value
Density
ISO 845
35-40 Kg/m
Compression Strength
ISO 844
C10 = 1.5 Kg/cm
Modulus of Compressibility
ISO 844
37 Kg/cm
Tensile Strength
ISO 1920
2.8 Kg.cm
Thermal Conductivity
ISO 2581
0.019 Watt/m.deg.K
Flame Resistance
ISO 3582
Burning extent = 4 cm.
Self-extinguishing = 26 secs
time.
Water Vapour Transmission
ISO 1663
72 gram/m 24hr
(at 38%-90% Relative Humidity)
End laps are to be 200mm and sealed with two runs of sealant strip (Specificatio
n as side laps).
Flashings
External Trims and Flashings will be manufactured from 1.2mm gauge aluminium to
match the color and
finish of the external sheet where applicable.
Internal flashings where applicable will match material gauge, color and finish
of the internal sheet.
Fixing Accessories
Roof and inclined panels to be fixed to steel purlins with stainless steel grade
316 self-tapping screws
complete with stainless steel (or aluminium) washer incorporating neoprene seali
ng washer and PVC color
cap.
The screws for roof panels shall be fixed through the profile crown and shall in
corporate aluminium and
vulcanized rubber saddle washer to match the roof sheet color. The screw length
shall be 127mm and
diameter min. 6mm. The washer size shall be 22mm.
The screws for inclined panels shall be fixed through the profile trough. The sc
rew length shall be 76mm
and diameter min. 6mm. The washer size shall be 19mm.
Purlin and sheeting rails should be covered by PVC barrier tape extending 10mm p
ast the face of this purlin.
Flashings and side laps to be fastened with an all-aluminium sealed rivet includ
ing mandrill and pin.
Isolating grommets shall be used to prevent contact between screw and sheet.
The joining between the roofing and inclined cladding of the space frame sides s
hall be completely scaled
and water tight.
The Contractor shall submit three sets of shop drawings and data details which s
how the manufacturer s
intents in complying with the requirements of this specification section for the
exterior elements as follows:
Samples
Provide sample panel for showing the construction of the Roof. Actual applied sa
mples of the approved
color to be provided as per the Engineer s requirement.
Warranties
. Complete weather tight work within specified tolerances.
. Structural soundness and freedom from distortion and within elastic deflection
limits specified.
. Metal finish will not crack, peel, pit, corrode or dis-color.
. Sealants and gaskets shall remain free from deterioration, oxidation or disloc
ation due to sunlight and
weather conditions.
. Completed installation shall remain free from rattles, wind whistles and noise
due to thermal and
structural movements and wind pressure.
The roof lights shall be entirely self-supporting over a structured box rafter s
ystem, transferring loads
directly to suitable building curbs. Thus totally eliminating the requirement fo
r structured steel supporting
frame work. The main structured rafters shall be formed to required geometry. Th
e roof light shall be
positively drained via integral extruded condensation channels. The roof light s
hall be pyramid shaped
with concealed external fixings. The roof lights and fixing system shall be engi
neered in accordance with:-
Shop drawings showing details of fixing, drainage etc shall be submitted for app
roval. The roof light
system shall be fully coordinated with the supporting structure & its finishes.
Required samples shall be
submitted for approval on site.
The roof light units shall be pyramid shaped, double glazed installed with a gut
ter system to ensure
effective drainage of each unit.
Timber Trellis
The work shall conform to the codes and standards of ASTM, BS , and UI. Affidavi
ts shall be submitted
from the supplier indicating the species grades and moisture content of all fram
ing timber if requested
by the Engineer. The timber shall be new, sound, kiln-dried and seasoned, free f
rom bows, twists,
crooks and waves that cannot be corrected in process of bridging of nailing. Moi
sture content shall not
exceed 5%.
The work shall be completely coordinated with the other adjacent works. Submit s
hop drawings after
verifying dimensions and works of other trades which adjoin materials.
All external timber having direct contact with concrete or masonry shall be give
n a pressure
preservative treatment and shall be accompanied upon delivery with certificates
from the treatment
company certifying the pressure used. The timber shall be fire-retardant in acco
rdance with the governing
code, factory treated and certificates shall be submitted from the manufacturing
company to the
Engineer.
Rough hardware such as nails, screws, clips, etc. shall be hot-dipped galvanized
. Anchor bolts shall conform
to ASTM, dramatic & length required with hooked end at concrete embedded conditi
ons. Provide standard
steel washers & nuts field welding shall not be allowed. It is not the intent of
this specification to define the
types, sizes and installation methods for each item of work. The methods of deta
iling and construction
shall be in equal in quality of similar details as may be shown on the drawings.
The work that is finished
shall be stained and shall be free from defects or blemishes on surface exposed
to view that will show
after the finish coat is applied. Joints shall be tight and so formed to conceal
shrinkage. All nail heads in
finished work shall be sunk.
Ladders
The ladders shall be used for access to the roof. The ladder shall be made of ga
lvanized mild steel flat
section of size 15mm x 60mm and angle sections with 40mm ladder rungs spaced at
300mm with collar
fixing; safety cage construction with security gate hinged gate at bottom of cag
e with padlock provision all
epoxy paint coated.
Louvered Aluminium Doors
Refer section 16 of particular specification for Doors.
11.4 Schedule of finishes
Refer to Tender Drawings for the project specific schedule of finishes.
Note: Availability of all tile sizes mentioned is to be confirmed from approved
manufacturers. Different
manufacturers vary their sizes to suit the modules.
11.5 Floor Finish
Glazed Ceramic tiles 8mm thick of nominal size 500x500mm as shown on the drawing
s including cement
sand bedding to give overall thickness as per Engineer's approval. Allow for 4 c
olor / range variations. The
tile grout shall be waterproofed and matching the color of the tiles or as direc
ted by Engineer. The tiles
shall be laid to falls and cross falls and drains shall be fixed to the center o
f 4 tiles. Shop drawings
showing the design pattern and fixing details at junctions shall be submitted fo
r approval. Allow for
rounded edge tiles where edges are exposed to view. Allow for waterproofing in a
ll areas of the building that
are exposed to the exterior.
Epoxy Resin floor coating, high performance, heavy duty, (Nitofloor FC 140 or eq
ual), 2 coats, minimum
100 microns on cement sand screed laid to falls and cross falls to make up the r
equired levels.
Epoxy Resin floor, exterior quality, slip resistant having dry film thickness of
500 micron, laid on cement
sand screed laid to falls to make up the required level.
Non-slip Ceramic tiles size 300x300x8mm thick for toilets and kitchen, colored,
laid to pattern on mortar
and sand over seamless waterproofing. The tiles shall be laid to falls and cross
falls as per drainage points.
Drains shall be fixed to the center of 4 tiles. Allow for 2 color variation in t
iles and matching water proofed
grout. Submit shop drawings showing the design pattern and fixing details at jun
ctions. Allow for rounded
edge tiles where edges of tiles are exposed.
Interlock block pavers - The pavers shall be precast blocks to size, shape, patt
ern, color and layout to the
approval of Engineer. The pavers shall be uniform in shape and color, supplied b
y an approved
manufacturer conforming to the requirements of BS7617 It shall be laid on a well
compacted bed of
50mm layer of clean, sharp, crushed sand over a minimum 250mm layer of road base
material
compacted to 95% of MDD as obtained in BS1377 test 13. Field test to be carried
out at a frequency of
2 tests per 1000 m2 as per BS 1377 Test 15B) and laid over a properly watered an
d compacted base
course.
Other properties
Value
Minimum nominal thickness
60mm thick for pedestrian areas & 80mm thick for vehicular areas
Cement
BS 12, 4027, BS 146
Aggregate
BS 882
Water
BS 3148 (pH value 7-a)
Pigments
BS 1014
Compressive Strength
Not less than 49 N/mm2
Certificate of Compliance
BS 6717
Other Properties
For other specific floor finish types refer to tender drawings.
11.6 Skirting Finish
Ceramic Tile:
500 x 100 x 8mm thick ceramic skirting coved type with round edge, including all
external and internal
angles. The skirting shall match in color and range to the floor tiles. Separate
the skirting from the
wall finish by a 10mm x 10mm painted channel groove only where the wall is not c
eramic tiles finish.
Terrazzo Tiles:
100 x 20mm thick polished terrazzo skirting with profiled top edge set flush wit
h the wall finish.
Epoxy Coating:
300mm high heavy duty high performance epoxy resin based coating (Nitofloor FC14
0 or equal). 2 coats on
15mm thick sand cement render. For other specific skirting refer to tender drawi
ngs.
11.7 Wall Finish
Proprietary self-colored cement render based on selected sand and cement as desc
ribed in BS 5262 to be
applied in one coat to block work and / or concrete suited to receive render. Po
orly keyed surfaced like
smooth concrete shall have a stipple coat applied on it. The cement render shoul
d be through colored and
should have excellent weather and fire (Class 0) resistance and durability.
No painting is required. The render shall have a scraped finish with Ashlar groo
ves marked on surface made
by approved Ashlar cutters. Allow for 2 color variation. Color, pattern and shap
e of Ashlar grooves shall be
as per Engineer's approval. The mixing of cement render shall be done using a su
itable render spray machine,
drill and whisk or tumble mix ashlar cut and 28mm for 10mm ashlar cut.
Cement render shall not be applied in rain or if exposure to rain is likely duri
ng setting and drying.
Curing with clean water required during rapid drying condition. Exact color matc
hing is to be achieved.
Shop drawings showing pattern and shape of ashlars grooves shall be submitted fo
r approval.
15mm thick sand cement render smoothed finish with three coats of approved acryl
ic / silk emulsion
paint.
Three coats of approved paint. In cases where the paint is applied directly onto
poorly constructed block
work allow for appropriate sealant or plaster to be applied as per Engineers ins
truction. The contractor
shall ensure that the paints used are certified with low VOC content.
Colored ceramic tiles 300 x 200 x 6mm thick on plaster to full height of walls i
f no false ceiling or 100mm
above false ceiling. Allow for 3 color variation and or pattern and fixing of ti
les in pattern of varying size
to the approval of Engineer. Tile grout and adhesive shall be waterproof epoxy t
ype and grout shall be
matching in color to the tile. RE, coved tiles and angles to be used at all junc
tions including wall / floor
junctions.
Note: These walls shall be finished by the end user based on their finishes requ
irements.
11.8 Ceiling Finish
Three coats of approved paint to the soffit of the hollow core slab.
Proprietary self- colored cement render based on selected sand and cement as des
cribed in BS 5262 to be
applied in one coat to concrete suited to receive render. Smooth concrete shall
have a stipple coat applied
on it. The render should be through colored and should have excellent weather an
d fire (Class O)
resistance and durability. The render shall have a scraped finish, color to Engi
neer's approval. The cement
render shall be mixed using a suitable render spray machine, drill and whisk or
tumble mix, and applied
by traditional methods to an initial thickness of 18mm. The render shall be rule
d level and flattened with
a spatula and allowed to harden (5 - 16 hours) depending on weather and backgrou
nd condition. When
render is green (set but not fully hardened) it shall be scraped using approved
scraping tool in circular
motion, and brushed down using a soft bristle brush. No more than 3mm should be
removed from the
surface, leaving a minimum finished thickness of 15mm. Amend defects if any. Cem
ent render shall not be
applied in rain or if exposure to rain is likely during setting and drying. Curi
ng with clean water is
required during rapid drying condition. Exact color matching is to be achieved.
H.W Trellis or pergolas with proprietary preservative treated and stained painte
d.
Thickness
0.7mm minimum Un-perforated Aluminium
Edge Detail
5mm bevelled on all sides
Pattern
Plain
Finish
Electro statically applied polyester paint, 45 microns, high opacity
Color
White, RAL shade to Engineer s approval, 20% gloss high opacity
Acoustic Insert
25mm thick, 45kg/m3 density mineral wool insulation faced with
one side aluminum foil and other side black glass tissue
. Vanity Wash Basin, size as per Drawings, under counter, complete with traps et
c.
. Wash Basin pedestal type, size as per drawings complete with traps etc.
. European WC with matching cistern and double seat, open front type with hand s
pray.
. Kitchen Sink: 18/8 stainless steel size as per drawings single/double bowl, co
unter mounted with pillar
mounted sink mixer with swivel nozzle.
. Single Lever mixer type for wash basin with pop-up waste set.
. Spray combination consisting of angle-valve, flexible metal hose, wall holder
and trigger controlled hand
spray. The assembly shall be located on the right side of WC.
. Angle valve to wash basin and W.C
. Water supply concealed valve.
. Grab bar as shown in drawings for all Accessible Toilets
The height from bottom of fascia to finished floor level shall not be less than
685mm so as to cater to
the requirements of knee clearance for wheelchair accessibility as described in
ANSI Standards
A117.1.2003 Section 306.
The mirror shall be 6mm thick with ply backing as per required size.
The color and type of granite shall be as per Engineer choice. Samples shall be
submitted for approval.
Steel Staircase Handrail and Balustrade
The handrail shall be Galvanized and painted mild steel pipe of 50mm dia and in
compliance with IBC
Section 1012 as shown in drawings. Color to Clients / Engineers approval.
Balustrades shall be galvanized and painted mild steel pipe of 25mm dia bolted t
o Channel section
Stringer Beams which also shall be galvanized and painted to client / architects
approval.
Treads shall be 4mm thick galvanized heavy duty chequered plate welded between c
hannel section
stringer beams.
Fixing detail shall be as per drawings. Contractor shall submit detailed shop /
fabrication drawings for
Engineer s approval.
Timber Truss & Ceiling Planks
The timber used for the outdoor pergolas over walkways shall be made of good qua
lity hard wood as
specified in the carpentry & joinery general specification. The timber shall be
new, sound, kiln-dried
and seasoned, free from bows, twists, crooks and waves that cannot be corrected
in process of bridging of
nailing.
Moisture content shall not exceed 5%. The design timber posts and beams shall co
nform to relevant
BS standards. The design and installation shall be fully coordinated with the ad
joining works.
Submit shop drawings and calculations showing details of design and fixing for a
pproval. Rough hardware
such as nails, screws, clips etc. shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
The work that is finished shall be stained and shall be free from defects or ble
mishes. Joints shall be tight
and so formed to conceal shrinkage. All nail / screw heads in finished work shal
l be sunk.
Galvanized Steel Ladder for Roof Access.
615mm wide galvanized steel ladder with 300mm center to center vertical distance
between steps shall be
provided near the office building (Block-A). Hardwood stiffeners shall be provid
ed as required. Brackets
shall be provided at every 500mm vertical distance and shall be fixed to the wal
l with anchor bolts. Shop
drawing showing details of ladder and fixing shall be submitted for Engineer's a
pproval.
11.14 Door schedule (as per tender drawings/BOQ)
11.15 Door
Frame types
Frame for Wooden door
. Solid Wood, color and finish to match the leaf and subject to Engineer s approva
l
. 50mm Standard size all around
. Covers the full width of wall including finishes
. Nylon anti-bang gasket
. Solid wood Architrave
Leaf Types
Leaf for internal wooden doors
50mm thick flush door 75% solid wood filling, with 10 mm mahogany lipping and 6
mm MDF on both
sides pressed in 0.6 mm a quality mahogany veneer with 3 mm grove on both sides
stained as per
Engineer s approved color.
The contractor shall ensure that all windows and sliding windows, in conjunction
with a suitable glazing
shall have efficient thermal barriers and should achieve a target area average w
eighted U-Value of 1.90
W/m2K. The Solar Heat Gain Coefficient for the glazing unit shall be a maximum o
f 0.23
12 PLUMBING
12.1 Common Motor requirements for plumbing equipment
General
Section includes
. Single phase electric motors.
. Three phase electric motors.
Reference Standards
ABMA STD 9
Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers
Association, Inc. ; 1990 (Reapproved 2008)
IEEE 112
IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators; Inst
itute
of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004.
NEMA MG 1
Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edit
ion
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments an
d
Supplements.
Submittals
. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and conn
ection requirements.
. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power fac
tor for three phase motors
larger than 1/2 horsepower.
. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connect
ions, lubrication, and wiring
instructions.
. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.
. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacemen
t sizes, and lubrication
instructions.
Quality Assurance
. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of electric m
otors for plumbing use,
and their accessories, with minimum five years documented product development, t
esting, and
manufacturing experience.
C. Construction:
1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.
2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.
3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulatio
n class, service
factor, and motor enclosure type.
4. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger: Energy Efficient Type.
Application
A. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the eq
uipment manufacturer's
standard and need not conform to these specifications.
B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans, oil burners, and centrifugal pump
s: Split phase type.
C. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capaci
tor type.
D. Single phase motors for fans, pumps, blowers, and air compressors: Capacitor
start type.
E. Single phase motors for fans, blowers, and pumps: Capacitor start, capacitor
run type.
F. Motors located in exterior locations, wet air streams downstream of sprayed c
oil dehumidifiers, draw
through cooling towers, air cooled condensers, humidifiers, direct drive axial f
ans, roll filters, explosion
proof environments, and dust collection systems: Totally enclosed type.
G. Motors located in outdoors, in wet air streams downstream of sprayed coil deh
umidifiers, in draw
through cooling towers, and in humidifiers: Totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy-
treated type.
H. Motors located outdoors and in draw through cooling towers: Totally enclosed
weatherproof epoxysealed
type.
Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperatur
e rise) insulation,
minimum 1.0 Service Factor, pre-lubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic re
set overload protector.
Single phase power capacitor start motors start motors
A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/ca
pacitor- run motors with
two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating
speeds.
Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service
Factor, pre-lubricated
ball bearings.
Three phase power squirrel cage motors
A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.
C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design
B
characteristics.
D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Desi
gn B motors.
E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine
free from electrical or
mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.
G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with en
d brackets of cast
iron or aluminum with steel inserts.
H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors
embedded in motor
windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor
starter; refer to Section
26 2913.
I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equippe
d with plugged provision
for re-lubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Cal
culate bearing load
with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard sh
aft extension.
Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.
J. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.
K. Part Winding Start Where Indicated: Use part of winding to reduce locked roto
r starting current to
approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while providing ap
proximately 50 percent
of full winding locked rotor torque.
L. Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressu
re with rotor and
starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with wate
rproof non-washing
grease.
M. Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested i
n accordance with IEEE
112.
N. Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested
in accordance with
IEEE 112.
Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in
any position.
C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.
Schedules
Reference Standard
ASTM A269
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service; 2010.
EJMA (STDS)
EJMA Standards; Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association; 2003.
Submittals
A. Product Data:
1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, f
ace-to-face length,
live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per meter and per assembly,
fundamental
frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid.
2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maxim
um expansion
compensation.
Products
Flexible pipe connectors steel piping
A. Inner Hose: Carbon Steel.
B. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided, stainless steel.
C. Exterior Sleeve: None.
D. Pressure Rating: 1380 kPa and 121 degrees C.
E. Joint: Flanged.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Maximum offset: 20 mm on each side of installed center line.
Accessories
A. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A269.
B. Pipe Alignment Guides:
1. Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard
pipe, frame with four
mounting holes, clearance for minimum 25 mm thick insulation, minimum 75 mm trav
el.
C. Swivel Joints:
1. Fabricated steel body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubbe
r (Buna-N) o-ring seals.
Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association) S
tandards.
C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equ
ipment.
D. Provide line size flexible connectors.
E. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end
immediately adjacent to
isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indi
cated otherwise.
F. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so mov
ement is directed along
axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast conne
ctions or apparatus.
G. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction o
f piping. Provide loops,
pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.
H. Substitute grooved piping for vibration isolated equipment instead of flexibl
e connectors. Grooved
piping need not be anchored.
Reference Standards
ASME B40.100
Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2005.
ASME MFC-3M
Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004.
ASTM E1
Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers; 2007.
ASTM E77
Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers; 2007.
AWWA C700
Cold Water Meters -- Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case; American Water
Works Association; 2009 (ANSI/AWWA C700).
AWWA C701
Cold Water Meters -- Turbine Type, for Customer Service; American Water
Works Association; 2012.
AWWA C702
Cold Water Meters -- Compound Type; American Water Works Association;
2010.
AWWA C706
Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold Water Meters; American
Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C706).
AWWA M6
Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance; American
Water Works Association; 2012.
UL 393
Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions
UL 404
Gages, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range a
nd location for manufactured
components.
B. Samples: Submit one of each type of instrument specified.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumen
tation.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client's use in maintenance
of project.
1. Extra G age Oil for Inclined Manometers: One bottle.
2. Spare for one year as per manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Extra Pressure Gages: One of each type and size.
Field Conditions
Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for req
uired rough-in, taps, supports
and test plugs.
Products
Positive Displacement Meters (Liquid)
A. AWWA C700, positive displacement disc type suitable for fluid with bronze cas
e and cast iron frostproof,
breakaway bottom cap, hermetically sealed register, remote reading to AWWA C706.
B. Meter: Brass body turbine meter with magnetic drive register.
1. Service: Cold water, 50 degrees C.
2. Service: Hot water, 93 degrees C.
C. The meters must have data logging capability and be capable of connecting to
a central monitoring
system so that information on the water consumption can be recorded.
Pressure Gages
Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon t
ube, rotary brass
movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on whit
e background.
A. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.
B. Size: 115 mm diameter.
C. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
D. Scale: Psi and KPa.
Dial Thermometers
A. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Dial type bimetallic actuated; ASTM E1; stainl
ess steel case, silicone
fluid damping, white with black markings and black pointer, hermetically sealed
lens, stainless steel
stem.
1. Size: 125 mm diameter dial.
2. Lens: Clear glass.
3. Accuracy: 1 percent.
4. Calibration: Degrees F.
B. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Dial type bimetallic actuated; ASTM E1; stai
nless steel case,
adjustable angle with front recalibration, silicone fluid damping, white with bl
ack markings and black
pointer, hermetically sealed lens, stainless steel stem.
1. Size: 125 mm diameter dial.
2. Accuracy: 1 percent.
3. Calibration: Degrees F.
C. Thermometers - Dial type vapor or liquid actuated; ASTM E1; stainless steel c
ase, with brass or copper
bulb, copper or bronze braided capillary, white with black markings and black po
inter, glass lens.
1. Size: 115 mm diameter dial.
2. Length of Capillary: Minimum 1500 mm.
3. Accuracy: 2 percent.
4. Calibration: Degrees F.
Thermometer Supports
A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensi
ons as required, and with
cap and chain.
B. Flange: 75 mm outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet
metal air ducts, with brass
perforated stem.
Test Plugs
A. Test Plug: 6 mm or 13 mm brass fitting and cap for receiving 3 mm outside dia
meter pressure or
temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 93 degrees C.
B. Test Plug: 6 mm or 13 mm brass fitting and cap for receiving 3 mm outside dia
meter pressure or
temperature probe with Nordel core for temperatures up to 176 degrees C.
C. Test Plug: 6 mm or 13 mm brass fitting and cap for receiving 3 mm outside dia
meter pressure or
temperature probe with Viton core for temperatures up to 204 degrees C.
D. Test Kit: Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing one 60 mm di
ameter pressure gages,
one gage adapters with 3 mm probes, two 25 mm dial thermometers.
Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outle
t to AWWA M6. Provide
full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters.
C. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on s
uction and discharge of
pump. Pipe to gage.
D. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate e
ach gage. Provide siphon
on gages in steam systems. Extend nipples and siphons to allow clearance from in
sulation.
E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge
pipes smaller than 60 mm
for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from ins
ulation.
F. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.
G. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmit
ter, or sensor sockets.
Refer to Section 23 0943. Where thermometers are provided on local panels, duct
or pipe mounted
thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or pipe mounted thermometers are
not required.
H. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 3 m downstream of mixing dampers, co
ils, or other
devices causing air turbulence.
I. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
J. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with larg
est appropriate scale.
K. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from n
ormal operating level.
Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
L. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and c
alibrate to zero.
M. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets.
12.4 Vibration and Seismic Controls for plumbing piping and equipment
General
Section Includes
A. Equipment support bases.
B. Vibration isolators.
C. Roof curbs.
Reference Standards
ASCE 7
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ; 2011
ASHRAE (HVACA)
ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2011.
SMACNA (SRM)
Seismic Duct Restraint Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association; 2008.
Submittals
A. Product Data:
Quality Assurance
A. Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products s
pecified in this section,
with not less than five years of documented experience.
Products
Performance Requirements
General:
A. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all unif
orm deflection and stability
requirements under all operating loads.
B. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading.
C. Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection
curve over deflection range of
not less than 50 per cent above specified deflection.
D. Lateral to vertical stiffness ratio to not exceed 0.08 with spring deflection
at minimum 75 per cent of
specified deflection.
E. All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating c
learance of 50 mm
between the base and floor or support beneath unless noted otherwise.
Vibration Isolators
Non-Seismic Type:
A. All Elastomeric-Fiber Glass Pads:
1. Configuration: Flat or molded.
2. Thickness: 6 mm minimum.
3. Assembly: Single or multiple layers using bonded, galvanized sheet metal sepa
ration plate between
each layer with load plate providing evenly distributed load over pad surface.
B. Elastomeric Mounts:
1. Material: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds.
2. Assembly: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate
with anchor hole
bolted to supporting structure.
C. Steel Springs:
1. Assembly: Freestanding, laterally stable without housing.
2. Leveling Device: Rigidly connected to equipment or frame.
E. Elastomeric Hangers:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing elastomeric isolation element to preve
nt rod contact with
housing and short-circuiting of isolating function.
2. Incorporate steel load distribution plate sandwiching elastomeric element to
housing.
F. Spring Hanger:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elast
omeric element preventing
metal to metal contact.
2. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.
Roof Curbs
Non-Seismic Type:
A. Vibration Isolation Curb Rail:
1. Location: Between existing roof curb and rooftop equipment.
2. Construction: Aluminium.
3. Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section.
4. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials.
Seismic Type:
A. Vibration Isolation Curb:
1. Location: Between structure and rooftop equipment.
2. Construction: Steel.
3. Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section.
4. Snubbers consist of minimum 6 mm thick resilient pads to avoid metal-to- meta
l contact without
compromising vibration isolating capabilities.
5. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials.
Execution
Installation General
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Bases:
Reference Standards
ASME A13.1
Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechani
cal
Engineers; 2007.
ASTM D709
Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved
2007).
Submittals
A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mech
anical identification.
B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag numb
er, location, function,
and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product requi
red.
D. Samples: Submit labels x mm in size.
E. Manufacturer s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and inst
allation.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.
Products
Identification Application
A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.
B. Air Terminal Units: Tags.
C. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.
D. Control Panels: Nameplates.
E. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling.
F. Ductwork: Nameplates.
G. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.
H. Instrumentation: Tags.
I. Major Control Components: Nameplates.
J. Piping: Tags.
K. Pumps: Nameplates.
L. Relays: Tags.
M. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.
N. Tanks: Nameplates.
O. Thermostats: Nameplates.
P. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
Q. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.
Nameplates
Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
A. Letter Color: White.
B. Letter Height: 6 mm.
C. Background Color: Black.
D. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.
Tags
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on li
ght contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 40 mm diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 40 mm diameter with
smooth edges.
C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
Stencils
Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
A. 20-30 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200 mm long color field, 15
mm high letters.
B. 40-50 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200 mm long color field, 20
mm high letters.
C. 65-150 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 300 mm long color field, 30
mm high letters.
D. 200-250 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 600 mm long color field, 6
5 mm high letters.
E. Over 250 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 800 mm long color field,
90 mm high letters.
F. Ductwork and Equipment: 65 mm high letters.
G. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 9000, semi-gloss enamel, colors con
forming to ASME A13.1.
Pipe Makers
A. Comply with ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, pref
ormed to fit around pipe or
pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identific
ation of fluid being
conveyed.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive
adhesive backing and
printed markings.
D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic
ribbon tape, minimum
150 mm wide by 0.10 mm thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
E. Color code as follows:
1. Potable, Cooling, Boiler, Feed, Other Water: Green with white letters.
2. Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters.
3. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Orange with black letters.
4. Flammable Fluids: Yellow with black letters.
5. Combustible Fluids: Brown with white letters.
6. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters.
Ceiling Tracks
A. Description: Steel with 20 mm diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow.
2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.
3. Plumbing Valves: Green.
4. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.
Execution
Preparation
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9000 for stencil painting.
Installation
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or
adhesive.
Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear
lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 9000.
D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with man
ufacturer's instructions.
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 150 to 200 mm below finished grade,
directly above buried
pipe.
G. Use tags on piping 20 mm diameter and smaller.
1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
3. Locate identification not to exceed 6 m on straight runs including risers and
drops, adjacent to each
valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at eac
h obstruction.
H. Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit ide
ntification number and area
served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration
of structure or enclosure,
and at each obstruction.
I. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings.
Locate in corner of panel
closest to equipment.
Reference standards
ASTM A666
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
ASTM B209
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
2010.
ASTM B209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
ASTM C177
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C195
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007.
ASTM C449
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement; 2007.
ASTM C518
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C533
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;
2011.
ASTM C534/C534M
Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form ; 2011
ASTM C552
Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007.
ASTM C553
Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications; 2011.
ASTM C592
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type
Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2012.
ASTM C612
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2010.
ASTM E84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
NFPA 255
Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
UL 723
Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of m
aterials and thickness for
equipment scheduled.
B. Samples: Submit one samples of any representative size illustrating each insu
lation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acc
eptable workmanship and
installation standards will be achieved.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with not less than five years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of wor
k specified in this
section with minimum five years of experience.
Field Conditions
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adh
esives, mastics, and
insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 h
ours.
Products
Requirements for all products of this section
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, ma
ximum, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Glass Fiber Flexible
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.052 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 232 degrees C.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded
to aluminized film.
1. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
C. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
1. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
2. Compatible with insulation.
D. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
E. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
Cellular Glass
Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 2.
A. 'Ksi' Value: 0.059 at 38 degrees C.
B. Service Temperature: Up to 482 degrees C.
C. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.007 ng/Pa s m.
D. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume, maximum.
E. Density: Minimum 109 kg/cu m.
A. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
B. Insulating Cement:
1. ASTM C449/C449M.
B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insul
ation.
Jackets
A. PVC Plastic:
1. Jacket: Sheet material, off-white color.
a) Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
b) Maximum Service Temperature: 66 degrees C.
c) Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
d) Thickness: 0.25 mm.
e) Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
2. Covering Adhesive Mastic:
a) Compatible with insulation.
B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 220 g/sq m plain weave cotton fabric treated with di
lute fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive:
a) Compatible with insulation.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
C. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locatio
ns.
D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insula
tion.
Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or band
s.
E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smo
oth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
F. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate ent
ire system.
G. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature:
Provide vapor barrier
jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor bar
rier adhesive.
H. For hot equipment containing fluids 60 degrees C or less, do not insulate fla
nges and unions, but bevel
and seal ends of insulation.
I. For hot equipment containing fluids over 60 degrees C, insulate flanges and u
nions with removable
sections and jackets.
J. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature:
Provide standard jackets,
with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field- applied. Finish with gl
ass cloth and adhesive.
K. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Equipment 40 mm diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish ja
cket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 150 mm long, of same thickness and contour as a
djoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density i
nsulating material suitable
for the planned temperature range.
Schedules
Plumbing Systems:
A. Cooled Cold Water System:
1. Cooled Cold Water Booster Pump: 40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation.
2. Cooled Cold Water Recirculation Pump: 40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation
3. Cooling Water Circulation Pump: 40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation.
Reference Standards
ASTM A666
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
ASTM B209
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
2010.
ASTM B209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
ASTM C177
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C195
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement: 2007.
ASTM C449
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement; 2007.
ASTM C518
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C533
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;
2011.
ASTM C534/C534M
Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2011.
ASTM C547
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.
ASTM C552
Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007.
ASTM C578
Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation;
2011be1.
ASTM C585
Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 2010.
ASTM C591
Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation; 2011.
ASTM C610
Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation; 2011.
ASTM C795
Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic
Stainless Steel; 2008.
ASTM D1056
Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or
Expanded Rubber; 2007.
ASTM D2842
Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006.
ASTM E84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
NFPA 255
Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
UL 723
Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of m
aterials and thickness for
each service, and locations.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insu
lation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acc
eptable workmanship and
installation standards will be achieved.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Produc
ts specified in this
section with not less than five years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of wor
k specified in this
section with minimum five years of experience.
Products
Requirements for all products of this section
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, ma
ximum, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Glass Fiber
A. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177, 0.035 at 24 degrees C.
2. Maximum service temperature: 454 degrees C.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain ad
hered to jacket.
1. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177, 0.035 at 24 degrees C.
2. Maximum service temperature: 343 degrees C.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to alum
inized film; moisture
vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.029 ng/Pa s
m.
D. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
F. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
G. Fibrous Glass Fabric:
1. Cloth: Untreated; 305 g/sq m weight.
2. Blanket: 16 kg/cu m density.
3. Weave: 5x5.
K. Insulating Cement:
1. ASTM C449/C449M.
Cellular Glass
Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 1.
A. 'Ksi' value: 0.053 at 38 degrees C.
B. Service Temperature: Up to 482 degrees C.
C. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.007 ng/Pa s m.
D. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume, maximum.
Expanded Polystyrene
Insulation: ASTM C578; rigid closed cell.
A. 'Ksi' value: 0.033 at 24 degrees C.
B. Maximum service temperature: 74 degrees C.
C. Maximum water vapor permeance: 287 ng/Pa s sq m
Expanded Perlite
Manufacturers:
A. Schundler Company; Model: www.schundler.com.
Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers.
Insulating Cement:
ASTM C449/C449M.
Polyisocyanurate Cellular Plastic
Insulation Material: ASTM C591, rigid molded modified polyisocyanurate cellular
plastic.
A. Dimension: Comply with requirements of ASTM C585.
B. 'Ksi' value: 0.026 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
C. Minimum Service Temperature: -51 degrees C.
D. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees C.
E. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance w
ith ASTM D2842.
F. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 5.8 ng/(Pa s m).
G. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
Polyethylene
Insulation: Flexible closed-cell polyethylene tubing, split lengthwise for insta
llation, complying with
applicable requirements of ASTM D1056.
A. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177; 0.036 at 24 degrees C.
B. Maximum Service Temperature: 93 degrees C.
C. Density: 32 kg/cu m.
D. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 1.0 percent by volume.
E. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.073 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
F. Connection: Contact adhesive.
Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulati
on.
Jackets
PVC Plastic.
A. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white co
lor.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -18 degrees C.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 66 degrees C.
3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.0029 ng/Pa s m, maximum, when tested in accord
ance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
4. Thickness: 0.25 mm.
5. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
ABS Plastic:
A. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white co
lor.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
2. Maximum Service Temperature of 82 degrees C.
3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.018 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
4. Thickness: 0.76 mm.
5. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
Canvas Jacket: UL listed 220 g/sq m plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilut
e fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
C. Lagging Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.
1. Thickness: 0.40 mm sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 50 mm laps.
4. Fittings: 0.4 mm thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protec
tive liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.38 mm thick aluminum.
6. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.25 mm thick stainless steel.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire s
ystem including fittings,
valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expan
sion joints.
E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal
laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinc
h expanding staples
and vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material
and thickness as adjacent
pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
F. For hot piping conveying fluids 60 degrees C or less, do not insulate flanges
and unions at equipment,
but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 60 degrees C, insulate flanges and union
s at equipment.
H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or f
ield-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.
Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and th
ickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
J. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe pene
trations. Finish at
supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section
07 8400.
K. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 3 me
ters above finished
floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
L. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joint
s, and valves with insulation
of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh rei
nforced vapor barrier
cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizont
al piping.
M. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose ser
vice jacket with selfsealing
lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with
N. 0.025 mm thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous co
mpound; outer surface
faced with a polyester film.
O. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of
like material, thickness, and
finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cov
er with aluminum jacket
with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
Schedules
Plumbing Systems:
A. Domestic Hot Water Supply:
1. Glass Fiber Insulation:
Cooling Systems:
A. Chilled Water: Preinsulated HDPE (refer to relevant specification section)
B. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils:
1. Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation:
. Thickness: 15 mm.
Reference Standards
ANSI Z21.22
American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas
Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 1999, and addenda A&B
(R2004).
ASME B16.3
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
ASME B16.4
Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2011.
ASME B31.1
Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2012 (ANSI/ASME B31.1).
ASME B31.9
Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2011 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).
ASME (BPV IV)
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for
Construction of Heating Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers;
2010.
ASME (BPV IX)
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and
Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2010.
ASTM A47/A47M
Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings;
1999 (Reapproved 2009).
ASTM A53/A53M
Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
ASTM A123/A123M
Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
ASTM B88
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
ASTM B88M
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric);
2005 (Reapproved 2011).
ASTM B280
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air
Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service; 2008.
ASTM D1785
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2012.
ASTM D2235
Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-
Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved
2011).
ASTM D2239
Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDRPR)
Based on Controlled Inside Diameter; 2012.
ASTM D2241
Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-
Rated Pipe (SDR Series); 2009.
ASTM D2447
Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter; 2003.
ASTM D2466
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40; 2006.
ASTM D2564
Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).
ASTM D2609
Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene
(PE) Plastic Pipe; 2002 (Reapproved 2009).
ASTM D2665
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2012.
ASTM D2680
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping; 2001
(Reapproved
2009).
ASTM D2683
Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for
Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing; 2010
ASTM D2729
Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and
Fittings; 2011.
ASTM D2751
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2005.
ASTM D2846/D2846M
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems;
2009b.
ASTM D2855
Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).
ASTM D3034
Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2008.
ASTM F437
Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2009.
ASTM F438
Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2009.
ASTM F439
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2011.
ASTM F441/F441M
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2009.
ASTM F442/F442M
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR); 2009.
ASTM F628
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core;
2008.
ASTM F679
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-
Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2008.
ASTM F876 -
Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing;2010
ASTM F877
Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic
Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2011.
ASTM F1281
Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene/Aluminum/Crosslinked
Polyethylene (PEX-AL-PEX) Pressure Pipe; 2011.
ASTM F1282
Standard Specification for Polyethylene/Aluminum/Polyethylene
(PE-AL-PE) Composite Pressure Pipe; 2010.
AWWA C651
Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association;
2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651).
AWWA C901
Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 In. (13 mm) Through 3 In.
(76 mm), for Water Service; American Water Works Association; 2008.
ICC-ES AC193
Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2012.
MSS SP-58
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the
Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.
MSS SP-67 -
Butterfly Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
MSS SP-70
Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
MSS SP-71
Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011
MSS SP-78
Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
MSS SP-80
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization
Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2008 (with 2012 Errata).
MSS SP-85
Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
MSS SP-110
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared
Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry, Inc.; 2010.
NFPA 54
National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
NFPA 58
Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.
NSF 61
Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2012.
Submittals
Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accesso
ries.
Quality Assurance
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C. All valves shall be coated with 300 micron epoxy internally and externally.
D. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable sta
te labor regulations.
E. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME (BPV IX).
F. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM
specification, potable
water certification, water pressure rating.
Field Condition
Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
Products
Sanitary Sewer Piping, Buried within 1500MM of Building
UPVC Pipes & Fittings: BS EN 1401-1
Sanitary Sewer Piping Above Grade
A. ABS or MuPVC (cPVC) solvent weld waste pipes & fittings 50mm (2") and below:
ASTM D2751 or
BS 5255 or BS EN 1566-1:2000
1. Pipes shall be extruded and fittings shall be injection molded.
2. Ring seal joints shall be provided to accommodate expansion.
3. Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D2235 cement or BS 4346: Part 3 cement or BS
6209 as
applicable.
B. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H).
C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved ho
using segments with
continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to se
cure and compress
gasket.
1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.
2. Housing Material: Malleable iron or ductile iron, galvanized.
3. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.
4. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.
Gate Valves
A. Up To and Including 80 mm:
MSS SP-80, Class 250, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, inside
screw, solid wedge
disc, threaded ends.
B. 50 mm and Larger:
MSS SP-70, Class 250, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, hand wheel
, solid wedge disc,
flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 150 mm and larger mounted
over 2400 mm
above floor.
Globe Valves
A. Up To and Including 80 mm:
MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, hand wheel, bronze disc, threade
d ends.
B. 50 mm and Larger:
MSS SP-85, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, hand wheel, outside screw and yoke
, renewable bronze
plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for
valves 150 mm and
larger mounted over 2400 mm above floor.
Ball Valves
Construction, 100 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 250, 2760 kPa CWP, bronze bo
dy, 304 stainless
steel ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof ste
m, lever handle with
balancing stops, threaded or flanged ends with union.
Butterfly valves
A. Construction 40 mm and Larger: MSS SP-67, 1380 kPa CWP, cast or ductile iron
body, nickel-plated
ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer ends, extended neck, 1
0 position lever handle.
B. Provide gear operators for valves 150 mm and larger, and chain-wheel operator
s for valves mounted
over 2400 mm above floor.
Flow Controls
A. Construction: Class 250, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet,
temperature and pressure
test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain.
B. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating
pressure range of 10 times
minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 24 kPa kPa.
MSS SP-80, Class 250, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, s
older ends.
B. Over 50 mm:
MSS SP-71, Class 250, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and seat
, flanged ends.
Spring Loaded Check Valves
Class 250, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N
seals, wafer style ends.
Water Pressure Reducing Valves
A. Up to 50 mm:
MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric
reinforced diaphragm,
strainer, threaded single union ends.
B. Over 50 mm:
MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, f
langed.
Relief Valves
A. Pressure Relief:
AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automati
c, direct pressure
actuated.
B. Temperature and Pressure Relief:
AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs
, automatic, direct
pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 98.9 degrees C, capacity ASME (BPV
IV) certified
and labelled.
Strainers
A. Size 50 mm and Under:
Threaded brass body for 1200 kPa CWP, Y pattern with 0.8 mm stainless steel perf
orated screen.
Class 250, threaded bronze body 2070 kPa CWP, Y pattern with 0.8 mm stainless st
eel perforated
screen.
B. Size 40 mm to 100 mm:
Class 250, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1.6 mm stainless steel perforated s
creen.
C. Size 125 mm and Larger:
Class 250, flanged iron body, basket pattern with 3.2 mm stainless steel perfora
ted screen.
Execution
Examination
Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
Preparation
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar me
tals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perp
endicular to walls.
D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with u
se of space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,
joints, or connected
equipment. Refer to Section 22 0516.
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for insta
llation of insulation and
access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 0719.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and
location of access doors
with Section 08 3100.
I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less
than 0.8 m in non-traffic
area and 1.2 m in traffic area m of cover.
J. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof as
sembly
K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape,
brush clean, and apply
one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
L. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility
companies.
M. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready f
or finish painting. Refer to
Section 09 9000.
N. Excavate in accordance with Section 31 2316.
O. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 2323.
P. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
Q. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
R. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in wea
ther proof hood.
S. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
T. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.
Application
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections
.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solde
r adapters to pipe.
D. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, o
r vertical risers.
E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
F. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isola
te equipment.
G. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
H. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.
Tolerances
A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 10 mm vertically of locat
ion indicated and slope to
drain at minimum of 1:50 slope.
B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1:400 and arrange to drain at low points.
C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service d
istribution piping to have
initial minimum pressure of 1.75 kPa. Provide regulators on each line serving gr
avity type appliances,
sized in accordance with equipment.
Schedules
Pipe Hanger Spacing:
A. Metal Piping:
1. Pipe size: 15 mm to 32 mm:
Reference Standards
ASME A112.6.3
Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2001 (R2007).
ASME A112.6.4
Roof, Deck, and Balcony Drains; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2003.
ASSE 1011
Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary
Engineering; 2004 (ANSI/ASSE 1011).
ASSE 1012
Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; American
Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2009 (ANSI/ASSE 1012).
ASSE 1013
Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced
Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers; American Society of
Sanitary Engineering; 2011.
ASSE 1019
Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining
Type; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2011 (ANSI/ASSE 1019).
ASTM C478
Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections; 2012.
ASTM C478M
Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections [Metric]; 2012.c
DIN 19580
Drainage Channels for Vehicular and Pedestrian Areas - Durability,
Mass per Unit Area and Evaluation of Conformity; 2010.
PDI-WH 201
Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2010.
Submittals.
A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and ho
les.
C. Certificates: Certify that grease interceptors meet or exceed local authority
requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instruction
s: Indicate assembly and
support requirements.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, ba
ckflow preventers,
water hammer arrestors, etc.
F. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.
G. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, explo
ded assembly views.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client s use in maintenance of
project.
1. Extra Loose Keys for Outside Hose Bibbs: One.
2. Extra Hose End Vacuum Breakers for Hose Bibbs: One.
Quality Assurance
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this
section with not less than five years documented experience.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
Products
Drain
A. Roof Drains:
1. Assembly: ASME A112.6.4.
2. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump.
3. Strainer: Removable polyethylene dome with vandal proof screws.
4. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type, refer to Section relevant:
a. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop.
b. Adjustable under deck clamp.
c. Roof sump receiver.
d. Waterproofing flange.
e. Controlled flow weir.
f. Leveling frame.
g. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation.
h. Perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof.
i. Perforated stainless steel ballast guard extension.
B. Parapet Drains:
Lacquered cast iron body with aluminum flashing clamp collar and epoxy coated sl
oping grate.
C. Canopy and Cornice Drains:
Lacquered cast iron body with aluminum flashing clamp collar and epoxy coated fl
at strainer.
D. Roof Overflow Drains:
Lacquered cast iron body and clamp collar and bottom clamp ring; pipe extended t
o mm above
flood elevation.
E. Downspout Nozzles:
ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, w
eep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel- bronze strainer.
H. Floor Drain (FD-2):
ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, w
eep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable round nickel bronze strainer w
ith removable
perforated sediment bucket.
I. Floor Drain (FD-3):
ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, w
eep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel- bronze strainer with p
olished bronze
funnel or anti-splash rim.
J. Floor Drain (FD-4):
ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, w
eep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel- bronze extra heavy dut
y strainer.
K. Floor Drain (FD-5):
ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, w
eep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel- bronze extra heavy dut
y strainer with
hinged grate and sediment bucket.
L. Floor Drain (FD-6):
Lacquered cast iron two piece body with drainage flange, heavy duty grate 150 mm
wide, 300 mm
long, dome strainer, end plates with gaskets.
Cleanouts
A. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas (CO-1):
Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover.
C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-3):
Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threade
d top assembly,
and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed co
ver to accept
floor finish in finished floor areas.
D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-4):
Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, a
nd round stainless
steel access cover secured with machine screw.
E. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (CO-5): Calked or threaded
type.
Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose
thread spout,
chrome plated where exposed with handwheel, integral vacuum breaker in conforman
ce with ASSE
1011.
B. Interior Mixing Type Hose Bibbs:
Bronze or brass, wall mounted, double service faucet with hose thread spout, int
egral stops, chrome
plated where exposed with handwheels, and vacuum breaker in conformance with ASS
E 1011.
Hydrants
Floor Hydrants:
ASSE 1019; chrome plated (finish subject to architect's approval) lockable reces
sed box, hose thread
spout, lock shield and removable key, and vacuum breaker.
Back Water Valves
A. Cast Iron Back Water Valves: ANSI A112.21.2M; lacquered cast iron body and co
ver, brass valve,
extension sleeve, and access cover.
B. Plastic Back Water Valves: ABS body and valve, extension sleeve, and access c
over.
Backflow Preventers
Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:
ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; t
wo independently operating,
spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve lo
cated between check valves;
third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; n
on- threaded vent outlet;
assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
Check Valves
A. Up To and Including 50 mm:
Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, threaded ends.
B. Over 50 mm:
1. Type: Wafer type silent check valves.
2. Ductile iron body, stainless steel trim, stainless steel or CF8M disc and sea
t, flanged ends.
B. Grease Interceptors:
1. Construction:
a. Material: Epoxy coated fabricated steel.
b. Rough-in: On floor.
c. Accessories: Multi-weir baffle assembly, integral deep seal trap, removable i
ntegral
flow control, sediment bucket.
d. Cover: Steel, epoxy coated, non-skid with gasket, securing handle, and enzyme
injection port,
recessed for floor finish.
C. Oil Interceptors:
1. Construction:
a. Material: Epoxy coated fabricated steel.
b. Rough-in: On floor.
c. Accessories: Integral deep seal trap, removable integral flow control, adjust
able draw-off
assembly, sediment bucket.
d. Cover: Steel, epoxy coated, non-skid with gasket, securing handle, and enzyme
injection port,
recessed for floor finish.
D. Sediment Interceptors:
Mixing Valves
Thermostatic Mixing Valves:
A. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows
, integral temperature
adjustment.
B. Accessories:
1. Check valve on inlets.
2. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet.
3. Stem thermometer on outlet.
4. Strainer stop checks on inlets.
Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleano
ut plugs with mixture of
graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage s
ystem.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where co
ntamination of domestic
water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler syste
ms, premise isolation,
irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs.
F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on ho
t and cold water supply
piping to lavatories sinks washing machine outlets as per the requirement and co
nsultant's approval.
B. Pumps.
1. Circulators.
2. Sump Pumps.
Reference Standards
Administrative Requirments
A. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct a pre-installation meeting one week prior t
o the start of the work of
this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
B. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and ex
peditious manner.
Submittals
A. Product Data:
1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connect
ions to other
equipment and piping.
2. Indicate pump type, capacity, and power requirements.
3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with p
ump and system
operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
Warranty
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.
B. Collectors: 5 years warranty
C. Storage Tank: 5 Years
D. Accessories: 1 Year
Products
Residential Electric Water Heaters
A. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage.
B. Electrical Characteristics:
C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel, thermally insulated with one inch (25 mm) thi
ck glass fiber; encased in
corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish.
D. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature r
ange from 120 to 170
degrees F (49 to 77 degrees C), flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, enclosed
controls and electrical
junction box and operating light. Wire double element units so elements do not o
perate simultaneously.
E. Accessories: Provide:
1. Water Connections: Brass.
2. Dip tube: Brass.
3. Drain Valve.
4. Anode: Magnesium
The solar circuit shall be an 'active' pumped system. The closed circuit is cont
rolled by a temperature
differential controller that gives preference to any effective energy available
from solar rather than the
back-up boost.
Solar Panel
Each collector shall have a nominal effective absorption surface area of 2.34 m2
or as recommended by the
Manufacturer.
Collectors shall be accredited to EN 12975, 30 mm mineral wool insulation in bas
e, aluminium outer casing
and aluminium absorber plate. The absorber plate shall be highly selective vacuu
m coated having a
minimum absorbance of 90% and maximum emissivity of 15%. The collector shall be
glazed with low iron
toughened glass of a minimum thickness of 3.2mm with 98% transmittance.
The collectors shall have maximum operating pressure of 10 bar & stagnation temp
erature of 234 deg C.
Technical Data:
Storage capacity
750 litres
Quantity:
1 no.
Nominal Rating:
9 KW
Working Pressure
6 Bar max
Test Pressure:
7.6 Bar
Connections:
Heat Exchanger
All parts in contact with water are made entirely of stainless steel AISI-316Ti
or Duplex. Anti- Legio
design fully compliant with European anti-legionella recommendations. Connection
for electric immersion
heater in upper part of storage tank for low seasonal heating. 3 front connectio
ns for dial thermometer and
optional temperature sensors. All connections in the front side of the tank. Pre
-assembled in the factory for
simple on-site installation.
Insulation
Insulation shall be made of Polyester Fiber Fleece minimum 80 mm thick, all conn
ection openings shall be
precise laser cut to reduce heat loss; the material shall be flame retardant to
DIN 4102-1 class 2. The
insulation shall be enclosed in a Poly propylene outer sheeting of 1.2 mm which
shall have aluminum closure
strip which shall allow quick opening.
The position of the solar heating coil made of stainless steel AISI-316Ti or Dup
lex is located 80 to 240 mm
above the bottom of the tank. This compact design achieves a utilization of 97%
of the water heater volume
and ensures a low water temperature in the solar return line to reduce the therm
al losses of the solar panels.
Heating Elements
Incoloy 825 (UNS NO 8825) electric immersion heating element with low watt densi
ty, star configured for 3
phase operation, with individual thermostat with temperature adjustment 30C - 75C
or safety temperature
limiter (98C), factory preset to 60C, screwed connections, All elements electrical
ly tested, wired and preassembled
for easy installation. The heating element shall have efficiency factor of 80%.
All parts shall meet
European safety standards.
Anodes
The Tank shall be provided with Non sacrificial titanium anodic protection which
shall give a permanent
potential control, no anode consumption & shall be maintenance free.
Circulating Pump
A circulating pump module shall be supplied along with the storage to circulate
the fluid between the storage
and the collectors. The working of this pump shall be controlled through a delta
T controller. The pump shall
circulate the fluid only if the temperature in the system falls below the set po
int and if there is enough
radiation to heat the fluid.
The solar pump shall be of a centrifugal design and circulate (as required) L/s
at a total pressure head of (as
required) kPa.
Solar Controller
A differential control unit that has to be easy to install and operate in temper
ature of up to 55 Deg c.
Materials:
A. Hose: AISI 316L Stainless steel
B. Insulation: Rubber (13mm or 19 mm)
C. Braid: Special polyamide PA 6.6(optional)
D. Fittings: Carbon steel or Stainless steel
E. Max. Working pressure: 16 Bars
F. Working Temperature: -40C to 150C
Configuration:
A. PPM Chlorine measurement
B. 2 x all range configurable setpoints
C. All range proportional band
D. Selectable mode control for OFF, ON/OFF, P, PI, PD, PID
E. Minimum and Maximum alarm
F. Minimum and Maximum Dosing from 0 to 100%
G. Date, Time & language
Outputs
A. 4 x On/Off or Pulsewidth, at 230 VAC (2A) or free contact.
B. 2 x pulse frequency - reed relay (48 VDC / 40 mA)
C. 2 x configurable analogical outputs 0/4... 20 mA
Safety
A. 2 x independent chemical levels
B. 1 x relay for general alarm NO/NC, up to 230 VAC, 2A
C. 1 x input for ON/OFF remote control or flow detector
D. Maxim. Dosing time from 0 to 240 min
E. Flow detector alarm delay 0 a 3600 s
F. Start-up delay 0 to 15 min
G. General alarm delay 0 to 3600 s
Sensor, cables, acrylic support and all needed accessories included as a plug an
d play principle
Electromagnetic diaphragm dosing pump, 4, 5 L/h @ 7 Bar
PVDF liquid head
Stroke length manual adjustment
4 steps frequency adjustment
External pulses accepted- 1 ph 230V, 50/60 Hz, 0.01 kW
Suction valve, Injection valve, 6 meters hose and connection accessories
Low level switch
Dosing tank 100 L capacity
Chlorine Dioxide Detector
A. Gas Sensor compact Module with electrochemical cell to monitor ClO2 gas, requ
iring minimal
maintenance internal continuous self-diagnostics and automatically fault indicat
ion.
B. Non-intrusive one-person calibration interval of 180 days
C. 2-wire loop powered for easy installation and direct interface to common PLC
D. Integral scrolling LCD 2-line, 16 character display
E. Aluminum enclosure
F. 4-20 mA output
G. To be mounted in any orientation
Sump Pumps
A. Type: Vertical centrifugal, direct connected, simplex arrangement.
B. Casing: Cast iron volute with radial clearance around impeller, inlet straine
r, slide away couplings.
C. Impeller: Cast iron; open non-clog, keyed to corrosion resistant alloy steel
shaft.
D. Support: Cast iron pedestal motor support on steel floor plate with gas tight
gaskets.
E. Bearings: Forced grease lubricated bronze sleeve spaced maximum 48 inches (12
00 mm) and grease
lubricated ball thrust at floor plate.
F. Drive: Flexible coupling to vertical, solid shaft ball bearing electric motor
.
G. Sump: Steel cover plate with steel curb frame for grouting into concrete sump
with inspection opening
and cover, and alarm fittings.
H. Controls (Simplex): Float switch with float rod, stops, and corrosion resista
nt float, and separate
pressure switch high level alarm with transformer, alarm bell and stand-pipe.
Execution
Installation
A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as
required by code, and
complying with conditions of certification, if any.
B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve opera
ting system.
C. Pumps:
1. Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches (600 mm
) below lowest
invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches (150 mm) clearance from bottom of sump
pit.
2. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
3. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized sof
t seated check valve and
balancing valve on discharge.
4. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support
piping adjacent to
pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbo
ws on pump
suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and over.
5. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor bin
ding and cavitation,
are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 p
ercent of midpoint
of published maximum efficiency curve.
6. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.
7. Provide electrical interlocking from cooling condensate pump safety switch to
associated HVAC
unit(s) furnished under other Sections.
D. Solar hot water collectors must be installed with tilt and exposed to direct
sun (without shadowing).
They should be tilted towards equator (south direction) with angle of 25. Single
unit or multiple units
can be connected together in parallel and connected to common Headers (CWS, HWS,
and HWR) to
cover the desired daily hot water load and shall be as per the design of special
ist solar manufacturer.
E. The system shall also be equipped with all necessary safety devices that guar
antee the system shall
function in a satisfactory way. A pressure reduction valve should also be fitted
to maintain the
incoming pressure less than 6 Bar.
F. It shall be the contractors responsibility to ensure that all civil, electric
al, mechanical (piping etc) and
all work related to solar water heater system are done according to the specific
ations. All hot water
piping shall be adequately insulated to ensure minimum heat losses during re-cir
culation. A hot water
circulation pump set (with 24 hrs timer) shall be provided to ensure continuous
hot water availability in
the ring main.
Field Quality Control
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representat
ive to supervise the field
assembly of components and installation of solar system, including piping and el
ectrical connections.
Test and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipm
ent.
B. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices,
inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes includin
g chips, scratches, and
abrasions with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
Commissioning
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service
.
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submi
ttal and installation
requirements. Do not proceed with startup until wiring installation is acceptabl
e to equipment supplier.
Schedules
Refer Drawings for Equipment Schedules.
12.11 Plumbing Fixtures
General
Related Documents
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple
mentary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly ap
plicable to this Section,
and this Section is directly applicable to them.
Summary
This section includes the furnishing of all labor and materials necessary for a
complete installation of all
plumbing fixtures indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
Reference standards
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje
ct unless identified by a
specific edition date.
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract
shall be applicable to this
Project.
1. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable
requirements and
standards addressed within the following references:
Submittals
A. Product Data:
Provide manufacturer s data sheets indicating code and Standards compliance, illus
trations of fixtures,
physical sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim and finishes.
B. Record Documents:
1. Provide full written description of manufacturer s warranty.
2. Manufacturer s installation instructions.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:
Extra Materials
Provide two service kits for each type of faucet, flush valve, Ablution valve an
d all other trim/accessories
having serviceable parts.
Field Measurements
Verify that field measurements are either as indicated on Shop Drawings or as in
structed by the
manufacturer. Designate within Submittals that measurements have been verified,
and note which
measurements are the basis for construction.
Products
Materials General
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 316, 0.034-inch (22-gage) minimum thickness.
B. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized afte
r fabrication.
C. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B
456, Type SC
D. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class
1, Quality q2, and
with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating.
E. Steel channels, ASTM A 36, hot-dip galvanized for vanity counter support.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory uni
t, or of galvanised steel
where concealed.
G. Solid surface: Nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the same compositi
on throughout the
part with a composition of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigme
nt.
General
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, feder
al, state and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdic
tion.
B. Provide plumbing fixtures as indicated and scheduled on the Contract Drawings
and as specified
herein.
C. Fixtures, trim and accessories of any one type shall be by the same manufactu
rer.
D. All vitreous china fixtures shall be white in color unless noted otherwise on
Drawings.
E. All plumbing fixture trim within public toilet rooms shall be furnished with
vandal-proof trim.
F. All exposed brass fixture trim shall be heavily chrome plated.
G. Fittings and piping shall be brass and, wherever exposed, shall be polished c
hrome-plated. Provide
tight fitting wall or floor escutcheons of chrome-platedbrass or stainless steel
wherever pipes pass
through floors, walls or ceilings.
H. Fixture supplies shall be loose key angle stops with 1/2" I.P.S. female inlet
s and shall include wall
flanges and brass risers. All components shall be chrome plated. In all cases, a
ll piping, tubing, fittings
and faucets shall be installed using mechanical non-slip connections, such as bu
ll-nose, flanged,
ferrule or threaded fittings. Fittings requiring a friction fit using slip-on or
gasket connections are not
acceptable. [Exception: Hose type riser supplies are acceptable when supplied an
d required by the
fixture manufacturer]. Supply riser tubing for lavatories and sinks shall be min
imum 3/8 O.D.
I. Provide A.D.A. compliant molded insulation on exposed water and drain piping
beneath handicap
accessible lavatories and sinks. Insulation shall be designed to allow removal a
nd re-installation for
pipe servicing.
J. Unless noted otherwise, install each lavatory, sink and drinking fountain wit
h chrome-plated, 17 gauge
trap with cleanout plug that is easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Sli
p joints shall be
permitted only on the fixture trap inlet, within the trap seal and at outlet con
nection to the trap adapter.
K. Wall mounted lavatories, urinals and drinking fountains shall be supported wi
th commercial carriers
bolted to floor, model to suit installation. Provide concealed arm type carriers
for lavatories.
L. Fixtures shall have flow control devices to limit the flow of water to a maxi
mum rate in accordance
with the following table:
Item
Capacity
Shower Valve or Head
5 litres / min at 551.6kPa
Pantry tap
4.5 litres / min at 417.7kPa
Bathroom wash basin tap, drinking fountain
1.5 litres / min at 417.7kPa
Toilet dual flush
4.5/ 3 litres / min at 417.7kPa
Bidets
6.0 litres/min at 413.7 kPa
Urinals
0.5 litres /flushing cycle at 417.7kPa
Flow Control
M. Stainless Steel Sinks
1. Stainless steel sinks shall be 18 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel with insula
tion undercoating.
2. Provide stainless steel covers for all unused sink faucet/accessory holes.
3. Covers shall be secured with stainless steel bolt and wing nut. Snap-in type
covers are not
acceptable. Covers shall provide a watertight seal by utilizing rubber gasket or
plumbers putty.
4. Sink strainer shall be 316 stainless steel.
N. Housekeeping Mop Sinks
1. Provide mop sink having dimensions as scheduled on Contract Drawings
2. Receptor shall be precast terrazzo composed of marble chips and Portland ceme
nt, ground smooth,
grouted and sealed to resist stains.
3. Stainless steel caps shall be cast integral on all curbs.
4. Shoulders shall not be less than 9-3/4" high inside (12 high outside) measurem
ent, and not less
than 1-1/4" wide. Drop front shoulders shall have 6 high outside measurement.
5. Tiling flanges shall be cast integral and extend 1" above shoulder on 1, 2 or
3 sides (as required per
Project).
6. Drain shall be cast brass with stainless steel strainer cast integral and sha
ll provide for a code
compliant connection to a 3" pipe.
O. Water Closets
1. Water closets shall be vitreous china, wall-mounted. Conforming to BS 3402 Sh
all be with seat and
cover, hand shower set (Shattaf assembly), Angle valve , concealed cistern- self-
supporting &
completely pre-assembled complete with frame and wall union, push plates. Comply
ing with
German standard and dual flush -flow volume adjustable from 4.5 to 3 litres.
2. Water closet bowl gaskets shall be neoprene, felt gaskets and wax rings are n
ot permitted.
3. For wall mounted WC, it shall be supported with extra-heavy duty commercial c
arriers bolted to
floor and rated for a 500 pound load. Carrier model shall be designed for the ac
tual fixture being
supported and provided with all options and accessories manufactured by the carr
ier manufacturer
for a complete installation. Provide auxiliary foot support as recommended by th
e manufacture to
prevent bending of fixture support stud bolts.
4. Water closet seats shall be commercial/institutional grade, white in color, h
ave open front and
stainless steel self-sustaining check hinges.
P. Bidet, if applicable
Vitreous china, 4 hole model, Floor mounted. Conforming to BS 3402 Complying wit
h German
standard and maximum flow 6.0 litres/min at 413.7 kPa, with flushing rim and ver
tical spray, for deckmounted
faucet with diverter and vacuum breaker. Shall have Integral overfl ow complete
with
mounting hardware.
Q. Squatting Pan, if applicable
Vitreous China BS 3402 , One Piece Squatting WC pan with foot rest inlcuded, wit
h P-trap, hidden
dual-flush system, complete with 1/2in inclined bib tap, flexible hose, jet and
wall hook. Complying
with German standard and dual flush-flow volume adjustable from 4.5 to 3 litres.
R. Wash Basin
1. Vitreous China Recessed type Wash Basin conforming to BS 3402, with undercoun
ter sink and
chrome plated pop-up and waste plate conforming to Standards, bottle tarp 1 dia. c
hrome plate
pair of angle valve with chrome plated pulling-rod conical head.
2. Shall be installed complete with steel subframe (over Concrete upstand- to be
covered in Concrete
section) and stone surface on horizontal and vertical surfaces as per the drawin
gs.
S. Urinals, if applicable
White vitreous China Wall Hung Urinal with partition walls, Conforming to BS 340
2 , with P- trap,
50mm dia waste elbow with rubber seal, rear spud and inlet connector. Shall be ei
ther waterless or
less-water-consumption type (0.5 lit/ flushing cycle).
T. Flush Valves
All electronic flush valves shall be provided with manual override activators.
U. Faucets (normal toilets and ablution taps)
1. Chrome plated Basin Mixer with mixing device, pop-up waste, flexible connecti
on hose and other
associated components to make the basin mixer system complete. Shall have low fl
ow head and
aerator technology. Similar properties for Ablution taps, with different physica
l design, as per the
drawings.
2. Faucet flow control devices shall be located at the spout outlet.
3. Mains/4XAA alkaline batteries (minimum 2-Year lifespan), Hands free infrared
activation. Sensing
distance: 10-31cm. Respond time: 1 Second.
4. Provide vacuum breakers for all faucets that have threaded or serrated hose c
onnection outlets.
5. Gooseneck spout outlets shall terminate five inches minimum and five & one ha
lf inches maximum
above top rim of lavatory or sink. Horizontal dimension from spout inlet to spou
t outlet shall be a
minimum five & one half inches.
6. Provide integral hot and cold water inlet check stops in all mixing type sink
faucets that have hose
connection outlets.
7. All non-public use electronic faucets shall be designed and manufactured to a
llow continuous water
flow during usage for at least sixty seconds after initial activation.
8. All electronic lavatory faucets located within public toilet rooms shall be d
esigned and
manufactured to allow continuous water flow during usage for a maximum duration
of ten seconds
after initial activation.
9. AC powered electronic faucets located within VIP areas shall be connected to
the emergency
electrical system.
10. All lavatory faucets within general toilets shall have low-profile (non- goo
seneck) spouts and
electronic sensor activation.
V. Shower/ Ablution Mixing Valves, where applicable
1. Shower/ Ablution mixing valves shall be ASME A112.18.1M, CSA B125, ASSE 1016
and ADA
compliant, having combination thermostatic/pressure balancing replaceable cartri
dge, integral
check valves, integral stops and high temperature limit set at 110 F.
2. Thermostatic/pressure balance mixing valves shall have brass body constructio
n with polished
chrome plated finish, lever control handles for volume and temperature, and 1/2"
NPT connections.
3. Provide accessories as scheduled on Contract Drawings.
W. Spray Hose Assembly
Spray hose assembly shall be consisting of hand-spray with trigger control, wall
holder, metal tube and
angle valve or approved Equal.
Fixtures Schedule
Refer to the layout drawings for the quantity of Fixtures.
Execution
Fabrication
A. General: Only a maximum 37 mm diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo
, as approved by
the Engineer, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On
either interior surface
not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by either
a printed, waterproof
label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model n
umber.
B. Surface- Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicate
d, fabricate units with
tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Provide concealed anchorage wherev
er possible.
C. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permi
t rigid, tamperproof, and
theft proof installation.
Examination
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation
of fixtures.
B. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installa
tion of countertop
lavatories, sinks, faucets and related trim and accessories.
C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
Preparation
Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes required by
code, as recommended
by the manufacturer, and as indicated in Contract Drawings fixture rough-in sche
dule.
Installation
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local req
uirements, referenced
standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction
.
B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer s published recommend
ations.
C. Furnish and install all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services and p
erform all operations
required in connection with or properly incidental to the installation of comple
te plumbing fixtures, as
indicated on Contract Drawings, reasonably implied therein or as specified herei
n, unless specifically
excluded.
D. Each piece of trim shall be furnished whether specifically mentioned or not,
in order to provide a
complete first-class installation. Furnish and install all required water, waste
, soil and vent connections
to all plumbing fixtures, together with all fittings, supports, fastening device
s, cocks, valves, traps, etc.,
leaving all in complete working order.
E. Provide accessible check valves in the individual cold and hot water fixture
supply lines serving mixing
valve type faucets or assemblies having hose connection outlets that are not equ
ipped with integral
check stops.
F. Coordinate mounting heights of plumbing fixtures with architectural details/e
levations.
G. Install A.D.A. compliant water closet flush valve handles on wide side of toi
let stalls.
H. Install fixtures and trim in accordance with manufacturer s instructions.
I. All exposed chrome plated, polished or enameled fixtures and trim shall be in
stalled with special care,
leaving no tool marks on finishes. Install flexible brass fixture supply risers
using manufactured tube
bending tools. Bending tubes only with the use of hands shall not be permitted.
J. Install each fixture trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
K. Provide chrome-plated deep escutcheons where required to cover non-chrome- pl
ated piping projecting
through walls.
L. Thoroughly fill spaces between fixtures and walls, countertops and/or floors
with waterproof, mold
resistant, non-toxic, non-shrinkable white tile caulking.
M. Install components firmly fixed, level and plumb.
N. Install and secure all wall mounted fixtures in place with commercial carrier
s and bolts as per
manufacturer s instructions. Fixture weight shall not be transmitted to walls, par
titions or service
piping. Installation shall prevent any movement of fixture during use.
O. All non-monolithic shower/ Ablution floors shall be provided with drain pan a
ttached to floor drain
flange in accordance with the latest edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code. Refer
to Architectural
Contract Specifications and Drawings for pan materials and additional installati
on requirements.
Electrical Connections
Item requiring connection to electric supply shall have characteristics in accor
dance with the Electrical
Drawings and shall be installed in accordance with appropriate paragraphs of Ele
ctrical Division.
Testing
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splas
hing, noise or overflow.
B. Adjust and set sensor faucet mixing valves to provide desired water temperatu
re at spout outlet.
C. Insure that all traps are filled with water and maintain trap seal. Each fixt
ure shall be filled and then
drained. Traps and fixture connections shall be proven water tight by visual ins
pection.
D. After fixtures have been installed and water systems are pressurized, test ea
ch fixture and associated
trim for proper operation and inspect for leaks. Replace malfunctioning fixtures
and components, then
retest. Repeat procedure until all components operate properly.
Cleaning
A. Thoroughly clean all plumbing fixtures and equipment furnished under this Con
tract prior to final
acceptance.
B. Thoroughly flush and clean all faucet spout outlet screens and flow control d
evices.
Reference standards
ABMA STD 9
Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American
Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).
IEEE 112
IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004.
NEMA MG 1
Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; Most Recent Edi
tion
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable
Amendments and Supplements.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and con
nection requirements.
B. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power fa
ctor for three phase motors
larger than 1/2 horsepower.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connec
tions, lubrication, and
wiring instructions.
D. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replaceme
nt sizes, and lubrication
instructions.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of electric
motors for HVAC use,
and their accessories, with minimum five years documented product development, t
esting, and
manufacturing experience.
B. Conform to NFPA 70.
C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwrite
rs Laboratories Inc. as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
C. Construction:
1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.
2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.
3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulatio
n class, service
factor, and motor enclosure type.
4. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger: Energy Efficient Type.
Applications
A. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the eq
uipment manufacturer's
standard and need not conform to these specifications.
B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans, oil burners, and centrifugal pump
s: Split phase type.
C. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capaci
tor type.
D. Single phase motors for fans, pumps, blowers, and air compressors: Capacitor
start type.
E. Single phase motors for fans, blowers, and pumps: Capacitor start, capacitor
run type.
F. Motors located in exterior locations, wet air streams downstream of sprayed c
oil dehumidifiers, draw
through cooling towers, air cooled condensers, humidifiers, direct drive axial f
ans, roll filters, explosion
proof environments, and dust collection systems: Totally enclosed type.
G. Motors located in outdoors, in wet air streams downstream of sprayed coil deh
umidifiers, in draw through
cooling towers, and in humidifiers: Totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy-treated
type.
H. Motors located outdoors and in draw through cooling towers: Totally enclosed
weatherproof epoxy-sealed
type.
Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in
any position.
C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.
Reference Standards
ASTM A269
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
for General Service; 2010.
EJMA (STDS)
EJMA Standards; Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association; Ninth Edition.
Submittals
A. Product Data:
1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, f
ace-to-face length,
live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per meter and per assembly,
fundamental
frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid.
2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maxim
um expansion
compensation.
Regulatory Requirements
Conform to UL requirements.
Products
Flexible Pipe Connectors Steel Piping
A. Inner Hose: Carbon Steel.
B. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided, stainless steel.
C. Exterior Sleeve: None.
D. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 232 degrees C.
E. Joint: Flanged.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Maximum offset: 20 mm on each side of installed center line.
Accessories
A. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A269.
B. Pipe Alignment Guides:
Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pi
pe, frame with four
mounting holes, clearance for minimum 25 mm thick insulation, minimum 75 mm trav
el.
C. Swivel Joints:
Fabricated steel body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubber (
Buna-N) o-ring seals.
Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association) S
tandards.
C. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end
immediately adjacent to
isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indi
cated otherwise.
D. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so mov
ement is directed along
axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast conne
ctions or apparatus.
E. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction o
f piping. Provide loops,
pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.
13.3 Vibration and seismic controls for HVAC piping and equipment
General
Section Includes
A. Equipment support bases.
B. Vibration isolators.
C. Roof curbs.
Reference Standard
ASCE 7
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ; 2011
ASHRAE (HVACA)
ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. ; 2011
IAS AC172
Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;
International Accreditation Service, Inc. ; 2011
SMACNA (SRM)
Seismic Duct Restraint Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association ; 2008
Submittals
A. Product Data:
1. Provide manufacturer's product literature.
2. Include seismic rating documentation for each isolator and restraint componen
t accounting for
horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each.
2. Fully dimensioned fabrication drawings and installation details for vibration
isolation bases, member
sizes, attachments to isolators, and supported equipment.
3. Include auxiliary motor slide bases and rails, base weights, inertia bases, c
oncrete weights, equipment
static loads, support points, vibration isolators, and detailed layout of isolat
or location and orientation
with static and dynamic load on each isolator.
4. Include selections from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance w
ith the applicable
building code and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements.
5. Clearly indicate the load and capacity assumptions selected. Include copies o
f any calculations.
6. Include the calculations that indicate compliance with the applicable buildin
g code for seismic
controls and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements.
Products
Performance Requirements
General:
A. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all unif
orm deflection and stability
requirements under all operating loads.
B. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading.
C. Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection
curve over deflection range of
not less than 50 per cent above specified deflection.
D. Lateral to vertical stiffness ratio to not exceed 0.08 with spring deflection
at minimum 75 per cent of
specified deflection.
E. All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating c
learance of 50 mm
between the base and floor or support beneath unless noted otherwise.
Vibration Isolators
Non-Seismic Type:
A. All Elastomeric-Fiber Glass Pads:
1. Configuration: Flat or molded.
2. Thickness: 6 mm minimum.
3. Assembly: Single or multiple layers using bonded, galvanized sheet metal sepa
ration plate between
each layer with load plate providing evenly distributed load over pad surface.
B. Elastomeric Mounts:
1. Material: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds.
2. Assembly: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate
with anchor hole
bolted to supporting structure.
C. Steel Springs:
1. Assembly: Freestanding, laterally stable without housing.
2. Leveling Device: Rigidly connected to equipment or frame.
E. Elastomeric Hangers:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing elastomeric isolation element to preve
nt rod contact with
housing and short-circuiting of isolating function.
2. Incorporate steel load distribution plate sandwiching elastomeric element to
housing.
F. Spring Hanger:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elast
omeric element preventing
metal to metal contact.
2. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.
H. Thrust Restraints:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elast
omeric element installed in
pairs to resist air pressure thrusts.
2. Bottom Openings: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.
B. Cable Restraints:
1. Wire Rope: Steel wire strand cables sized to resist seismic loads in all late
ral directions.
2. Protective Thimbles: Eliminates potential for dynamic cable wear and strand b
reakage.
3. Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into accoun
t bracket geometry.
4. Connections:
a. Use overlapping wire rope U clips, cable clamping bolts, swaged sleeves or se
ismically rated
tool-less wedge insert lock connectors.
b. Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation.
C. Rigid Restraints:
1. Structural Element: Sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions a
nd carry both compressive
and tensile loading.
2. Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into accoun
t bracket geometry.
3. Connections: Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent def
ormation.
4. Static Support System: Anchorage capable of carrying additional tension loads
generated by the
vertical component of the rigid brace compression which is additive to any stati
c load requirements
on the system.
5. Vertical Suspension Rods: Attached required bracing of sufficient strength to
prevent rod buckling
from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips.
Roof Curbs
Non-Seismic Type:
A. Vibration Isolation Curb Rail:
1. Location: Between existing roof curb and rooftop equipment.
2. Construction: Aluminum.
3. Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section.
4. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials.
Execution
Installation General
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Bases:
1. Set steel bases for 25 mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
2. Set concrete inertia bases for 50 mm clearance between housekeeping pad and b
ase.
3. Adjust equipment level.
C. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal
operating conditions.
D. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substa
ntially different from
installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When
full load is applied,
adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.
E. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 1.5 kPa stat
ic pressure, and on hanger
supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.
F. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators
or resilient hangers for
scheduled distance.
1. Up to 100 mm Pipe Size: First three points of support.
2. 125 to 200 mm Pipe Size: First four points of support.
3. 250 mm Pipe Size and Over: First six points of support.
4. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 25 mm static def
lection or static
deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 25 mm s
tatic deflection or
1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.
Field Quality Control
A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include stat
ic deflections.
B. Perform testing and inspections of the installation in accordance with Sectio
n 01 4533 - Code-Required
Special Inspections.
Schedule
A. Pipe Isolation Schedule.
1. 25 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 120 diameters from equipment.
2. 50 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 90 diameters from equipment.
3. 80 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 80 diameters from equipment.
4. 100 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 75 diameters from equipment.
5. 150 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 60 diameters from equipment.
6. 200 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 60 diameters from equipment.
7. 250 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 54 diameters from equipment.
8. 300 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 50 diameters from equipment.
9. 400 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 45 diameters from equipment.
10. 600 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 38 diameters from equipment.
11. Over 600 mm Pipe Size: As indicated.
Reference Standards
ASME A13.1
Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers ; 2007
ASTM D709
Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001
(Reapproved 2007).
Submittals
A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mech
anical identification.
B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag numb
er, location, function,
and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue literature for each product req
uired.
D. Samples: Submit two labels x mm in size.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and in
stallation.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.
Products
Identification application
A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.
B. Air Terminal Units: Tags.
C. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.
D. Control Panels: Nameplates.
E. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling.
F. Ductwork: Nameplates.
G. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.
H. Instrumentation: Tags.
I. Major Control Components: Nameplates.
J. Piping: Tags.
K. Pumps: Nameplates.
L. Relays: Tags.
M. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.
N. Tanks: Nameplates.
O. Thermostats: Nameplates.
P. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
Q. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.
Nameplates
Tags:
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on li
ght contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 40 mm diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 40 mm diameter with
smooth edges.
C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
Stencils
A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 20-30 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200 mm long color field, 15
mm high letters
2. 40-50 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200 mm long color field, 20
mm high letters
3. 65-150 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 300 mm long color field, 30
mm high letters
4. 200-250 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 600 mm long color field, 6
5 mm high letters
5. Over 250 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 800 mm long color field,
90 mm high
letters.
6. Ductwork and Equipment: 65 mm high letters.
Pipe Makers
A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, pref
ormed to fit around pipe or
pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identific
ation of fluid being
conveyed.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive
adhesive backing and printed
markings.
D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic
ribbon tape, minimum
150 mm wide by 0.10 mm thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
E. Color code as follows:
1. Heating, Cooling, and Boiler Feedwater: Green with white letters.
2. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Orange with black letters.
3. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters.
Ceiling Tacks
A. Description: Steel with 20 mm diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow.
2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.
3. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.
Execution
Preparation
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9000 for stencil painting.
Installation
A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive
. Apply with sufficient
adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 9000.
D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with man
ufacturer's
instructions.
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 150 to 200 mm below finished grade,
directly above buried
pipe.
G. Use tags on piping 20 mm diameter and smaller.
1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
3. Locate identification not to exceed 6 m on straight runs including risers and
drops, adjacent to each
valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at eac
h obstruction.
H. Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit ide
ntification number and area
served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration
of structure or enclosure, and
at each obstruction.
I. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings.
Locate in corner of panel
closest to equipment.
Reference Standards
AABC MN-1
AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance
Council ; 2002
ASHRAE Std 111
Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,
Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
NEBB (TAB)
Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems;
National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition
SMACNA (TAB)
HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002
Submittals
A. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervi
sor for approval
within 30 days after award of Contract.
B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balanc
ing standard to be
followed and the specific approach for each system and component.
1. Submit to Consultant.
2. Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work
.
3. Include certification that the plan developer has reviewed the contract docum
ents, the equipment and
systems, and the control system with the Consultant and other installers to suff
iciently understand the
design intent for each system.
4. Include at least the following in the plan:
a. Preface: An explanation of the intended use of the control system.
b. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency
measurements to be
performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to
be used.
c. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equi
pment to be tested,
adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.
d. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most
recent
calibration date.
e. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping
drawings
during the process.
f. Final test report forms to be used.
g. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, incl
uding:
1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type).
2) Diffuser proportioning.
3) Branch/sub-main proportioning.
4) Total flow calculations.
5) Rechecking.
6) Diversity issues.
k. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operati
ng at the lowest
possible pressures and methods to verify this.
l. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under a
ll conditions.
m. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verifie
d and set and for
what level (total building, zone, etc.).
n. Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper capac
ity.
o. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurement method
s.
p. Methods for making coil or other system plant capacity measurements, if speci
fied.
q. Time schedule for TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.).
r. Description of TAB work for areas to be built out later, if any.
s. Time schedule for deferred or seasonal TAB work, if specified.
t. False loading of systems to complete TAB work, if specified.
u. Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room
pressure
differentials.
v. Interstitial cavity differential pressure measurements and calculations, if s
pecified.
w. Procedures for field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncomplet
ed work by others,
contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequen
cy).
x. Procedures for formal progress reports, including scope and frequency.
y. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and dist
ribution.
Products
General Requirements
A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.
2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing o
f Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Sy
stems.
4. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
5. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all
times.
Examination
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure
the following
conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in
addition to final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Pumps are rotating correctly.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
15. Service and balance valves are open.
B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prev
ent proper system balance.
C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
Preparation
A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work.
Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or bal
anced.
B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations
. Make instruments
available to Consultant to facilitate spot checks during testing.
C. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
Adjustment Tolerances
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for
supply systems and plus
or minus 5 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 5 percent and minus 5 per
cent of design to space.
Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
Commissioning
A. Perform prerequisites prior to starting commissioning activities.
B. Fill out Pre-functional Checklists for:
1. Air side systems.
2. Water side systems.
C. Furnish to the Commissioning Authority, upon request, any data gathered but n
ot shown in the final
TAB report.
D. Re-check minimum outdoor air intake flows and maximum and intermediate total
airflow rates 4
percent of the air handlers plus a random sample equivalent 2 percent of the fin
al TAB report data as
directed by Commissioning Authority.
1. Original TAB agency shall execute the re-checks, witnessed by the Consultant.
2. Use the same test instruments as used in the original TAB work.
3. Failure of more than 5 percent of the re-checked items of a given system shal
l result in the rejection
of the system TAB report; rebalance the system, provide a new system TAB report,
and repeat
random re-checks.
4. For purposes of re-check, failure is defined as follows:
a. Air Flow of Supply and Return: Deviation of more than 10 percent of instrumen
t reading.
b. Minimum Outside Air Flow: Deviation of more than 20 percent of instrument rea
ding; for inlet
vane or VFD OSA compensation system using linear proportional control, deviation
of more than
30 percent at intermediate supply flow.
c. Temperatures: Deviation of more than 0.5 degree C.
d. Air and Water Pressures: Deviation of more than 10 percent of full scale of t
est instrument reading.
e. Sound Pressures: Deviation of more than 3 decibels, with consideration for va
riations in
background noise.
5. For purposes of re-check, a whole system is defined as one in which inaccurac
ies will have little or
no impact on connected systems; for example, the air distribution system served
by one air handler
or the hydronic chilled water supply system served by a chiller or the condenser
water system.
Scope
Test, adjust, and balance not limited to the following:
A. Fire Pumps
B. Complete fire protection system
C. Plumbing Pumps
D. Condensate Pumps
E. HVAC Pumps
F. Air Cooled Water Chillers
G. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers
H. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units
I. Unit Air Conditioners
J. Air Coils
K. Air Handling Units
L. Fans
M. Air Filters
N. Air Terminal Units
O. Air Inlets and Outlets
P. Fresh Air Handling Units
Q. Thermal Energy Storage system
B. V-Belt Drives:
1. Identification/location
2. Required driven RPM
3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
4. Belt, size and quantity
5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM
6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
C. Pumps:
1. Identification/number
2. Manufacturer
3. Size/model
4. Impeller
5. Service
6. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
7. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
8. Discharge pressure
9. Suction pressure
10. Total operating head pressure
11. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
12. Shut off, total head pressure
E. Chillers:
1. Identification/number
2. Manufacturer
3. Capacity
4. Model number
5. Serial number
6. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual
7. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual
8. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual
9. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual
10. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual
11. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual
12. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual
F. Heat Exchangers:
1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Model number
6. Serial number
7. Steam pressure, design and actual
8. Primary water entering temperature, design and actual
9. Primary water leaving temperature, design and actual
10. Primary water flow, design and actual
11. Primary water pressure drop, design and actual
12. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual
13. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual
14. Secondary water flow, design and actual
15. Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual
G. Cooling Coils:
1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Air flow, design and actual
6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
10. Water flow, design and actual
11. Water pressure drop, design and actual
12. Entering water temperature, design and actual
13. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
14. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual
15. Air pressure drop, design and actual
K. Exhaust Fans:
1. Location
2. Manufacturer
3. Model number
4. Serial number
5. Air flow, specified and actual
6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
7. Inlet pressure
8. Discharge pressure
9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
10. Number of Belts/Make/Size
11. Fan RPM
L. Duct Traverses:
1. System zone/branch
2. Duct size
3. Area
4. Design velocity
5. Design air flow
6. Test velocity
7. Test air flow
8. Duct static pressure
9. Air temperature
10. Air correction factor
S. Vibration Tests:
1. Location of points:
a. Fan bearing, drive end
b. Fan bearing, opposite end
c. Motor bearing, center (if applicable)
d. Motor bearing, drive end
e. Motor bearing, opposite end
f. Casing (bottom or top)
g. Casing (side)
h. Duct after flexible connection (discharge)
i. Duct after flexible connection (suction)
2. Test readings:
a. Horizontal, velocity and displacement
b. Vertical, velocity and displacement
c. Axial, velocity and displacement
Reference Standards
ASTM B209
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
2010.
ASTM B209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
ASTM C518
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C553
Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications; 2011.
ASTM C612
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2010.
ASTM C916
Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 1985
(Reapproved 2007).
ASTM C1071
Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and
Sound Absorbing Material); 2012.
ASTM C1290
Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to
Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts; 2011.
ASTM C1338
Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials
and Facings; 2008.
ASTM E84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
ASTM G21
Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to
Fungi; 2009.
NFPA 255
Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
UL 723
Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of m
aterials and thickness for
each service, and locations.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insu
lation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to en
sure acceptable
workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products o
f the type specified in
this section with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of wor
k specified in this
section, with minimum five years of experience and approved by manufacturer.
Field Conditions
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adh
esives, mastics, and
insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 h
ours.
Products
Requirements for All Products of this Section
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, ma
ximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying
with ASTM C534 Grade 3;
use molded tubular material wherever possible.
A. 'Ksi' Value: 0.032 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM C518.
B. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
C. Maximum Service Temperature: 104 degrees C.
D. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulati
on.
Glass Fiber, Flexible
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, non-combustible blanket.
1. 'Ksi' value: 0.31 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 232 degrees C.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive
rubber based adhesive.
D. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 1.5 mm.
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive
rubber based adhesive.
D. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:
1. Cloth: Untreated; 305 g/sq m weight, glass fabric.
2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.
Jackets
A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 220 g/sq m plain weave cotton fabric treated with di
lute fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive:
a. Compatible with insulation.
B. Mineral Fiber (Outdoor) Jacket: Asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, 2.45 kg
/sq m.
1. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
a. Thickness: 0.8 / 1.0 mm sheet.
b. Finish: Smooth.
c. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 100 mm laps.
d. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 50 mm laps.
e. Fittings: 0.8/1.0 mm thick die shaped fitting covers with factory
attached protective liner.
f. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.6 mm thick aluminum.
g. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.25 mm thick stainless steel.
Duct Liner
A. Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C107
1; flexible blanket;
impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate polymer, acrylic po
lymer, or black
composite.
1. Fungi Resistance: ASTM G21.
2. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 24 degrees C.
3. Service Temperature: Up to 121 degrees C.
4. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 25.4 m/s, minimum.
5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:
a. 25 mm Thickness: 0.45.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide flexible elastomeric cellular insulation.
2. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrati
ons.
3. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, fle
xible connections, and
expansion joints.
Reference Standards
ASTM A666
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
ASTM B209
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheetand Plate; 2010.
ASTM B209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheetand Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
ASTM C177
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus;
2010.
ASTM C195
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement;
2007.
ASTM C449
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating an
d
Finishing Cement; 2007.
ASTM C518
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means
of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C533
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;
2011.
ASTM
C534/C534M
Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2011.
ASTM C552
Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007.
ASTM C553
Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications; 2011.
ASTM C592
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pip
e
Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2012.
ASTM C612 -
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2010.
ASTM E84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
NFPA 255
Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
;
National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
UL 723
Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of m
aterials and thickness for
equipment scheduled.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insu
lation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acc
eptable workmanship and
installation standards will be achieved.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with not less than five years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of wor
k specified in this section
with minimum five years of experience.
Field Conditions
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adh
esives, mastics, and
insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 h
ours.
Products
Requirements for All Products of this Section
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, ma
ximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Glass Fiber, Flexible
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.052 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM
C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 232 degrees C.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded
to aluminized film.
1. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
2. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
3. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
C. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
B. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
C. Insulating Cement:
ASTM C449/C449M.
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
A. Insulation Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complyin
g with ASTM C534 Grade
3, in sheet form.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.032 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM C518.
2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
3. Maximum Service Temperature: 104 degrees C.
4. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insul
ation.
Jackets
PVC Plastic:
A. Jacket: Sheet material, off-white color.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 66 degrees C.
3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
4. Thickness: 0.25 mm.
5. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
C. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locatio
ns.
D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insula
tion.
Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or band
s.
E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smo
oth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
F. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate ent
ire system.
G. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature:
Provide vapor barrier
jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor bar
rier adhesive.
H. For hot equipment containing fluids 60 degrees C or less, do not insulate fla
nges and unions, but bevel and
seal ends of insulation.
I. For hot equipment containing fluids over 60 degrees C, insulate flanges and u
nions with removable
sections and jackets.
J. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature:
Provide standard jackets,
with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field- applied. Finish with gl
ass cloth and adhesive.
K. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Equipment 40 mm diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish ja
cket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 150 mm long, of same thickness and contour as a
djoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.
Schedule
Cooling Systems:
A. Pump Bodies: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation 25mm thick.
B. Air Separators: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation 25mm thick.
C. Expansion Tanks: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation 25mm thick.
D. Chiller Cold Surfaces (Not Factory Insulated): Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Insulation 50mm thick.
E. Cold Thermal Storage Tanks: Glass Fiber Flexible Insulation 100mm thick.
13.8 HVAC Piping Insulation
General
Section Insulation
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
ASTM A666
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
ASTM B209
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate; 2010.
ASTM B209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate [Metric]; 2010.
ASTM C177
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate
Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C195
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement;
2007.
ASTM C449
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal
Insulating and Finishing Cement; 2007.
ASTM C518
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties
by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C533
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation; 2011.
ASTM C534/C534M
Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric
Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2011.
ASTM C547
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.
ASTM C552
Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007.
ASTM C578
Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation; 2011be1.
ASTM C585
Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 2010.
ASTM C591
Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular
Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation; 2011.
ASTM C610
Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation; 2011.
ASTM C795
Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact With
Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008.
ASTM D1056
Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or
Expanded Rubber; 2007.
ASTM D2842
Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid CellularPlastics;
2006.
ASTM E84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2012.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
NFPA 255
Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
UL 723
Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of m
aterials and thickness for each
service, and locations.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insu
lation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acc
eptable workmanship and
installation standards will be achieved.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Produc
ts specified in this
section with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of wor
k specified in this section
with minimum 3 years of experience.
Products
Requirements for All Products pf this section
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, ma
ximum, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Glass fiber
A. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177, 0.035 at 24 degrees C.
2. Maximum service temperature: 220 degrees C.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to alum
inized film; moisture
vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.029 ng/Pa s
m.
C. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
I. Outdoor Breather Mastic:
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
J. Insulating Cement:
ASTM C449/C449M.
Cellular glass
Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 1.
A. 'Ksi' value: 0.053 at 38 degrees C.
B. Service Temperature: Up to 482 degrees C.
C. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.007 ng/Pa s m.
D. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume, maximum.
Expanded Polystyrene
Insulation: ASTM C578; rigid closed cell.
A. 'Ksi' value: 0.033 at 24 degrees C.
B. Maximum service temperature: 74 degrees C.
C. Maximum water vapor permeance: 287 ng/Pa s sq m
Expanded Perlite
Insulation: ASTM C610, molded.
A. Maximum service temperature: 649 degrees C.
B. Maximum water vapor transmission: 0.1 perm.
B. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
C. Insulating Cement:
ASTM C449/C449M.
Polyisocyanurate Cellular Plastic
Insulation Material: ASTM C591, rigid molded modified polyisocyanurate cellular
plastic.
A. Dimension: Comply with requirements of ASTM C585.
B. 'Ksi' value: 0.026 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
C. Minimum Service Temperature: -51 degrees C.
D. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees C.
E. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance w
ith ASTM D2842.
F. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 5.8 ng/ (Pa s m).
G. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
Polyethylene
Insulation: Flexible closed-cell polyethylene tubing, split lengthwise for insta
llation, complying with
applicable requirements of ASTM D1056.
A. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177; 0.036 at 24 degrees C.
B. Maximum Service Temperature: 93 degrees C.
C. Density: 32 kg/cu m.
D. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 1.0 percent by volume.
E. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.073 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
F. Connection: Contact adhesive.
Flexible Elastometric Cellular Insulation
Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying
with ASTM C534 Grade 3;
use molded tubular material wherever possible.
A. 'Ksi' Value: 0.032 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM C518.
B. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
C. Maximum Service Temperature: 104 degrees C.
D. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulati
on.
Jackets
PVC Plastic.
E. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white co
lor.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -18 degrees C.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 66 degrees C.
3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.0029 ng/Pa s m, maximum, when tested in accord
ance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
4. Thickness: 0.25 mm.
5. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
ABS Plastic:
A. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white co
lor.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
2. Maximum Service Temperature of 82 degrees C.
3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.018 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
4. Thickness: 0.76 mm.
5. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
Canvas Jacket: UL listed 220 g/sq m plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilut
e fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
A. Lagging Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
Reference Standards
ASHRAE Guideline 1.
The HVAC Commissioning Process; 2012
Submittals
A. Updated Submittals: Keep the Commissioning Authority informed of all changes
to control system
documentation made during programming and setup; revise and resubmit when substa
ntial changes are
made.
B. DRAFT Pre-functional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures for Control Sy
stem: Detailed written
plan indicating the procedures to be followed to test, checkout and adjust the c
ontrol system prior to full
system Functional Testing; include at least the following for each type of equip
ment controlled:
1. System name.
2. List of devices.
3. Step-by-step procedures for testing each controller after installation, inclu
ding:
a. Process of verifying proper hardware and wiring installation.
b. Process of downloading programs to local controllers and verifying that they
are
addressed correctly.
c. Process of performing operational checks of each controlled component.
d. Plan and process for calibrating valve and damper actuators and all sensors.
e. Description of the expected field adjustments for transmitters, controllers a
nd control
actuators should control responses fall outside of expected values.
4. Copy of proposed log and field checkout sheets to be used to document the pro
cess; include space for
initial and final read values during calibration of each point and space to spec
ifically indicate when a
sensor or controller has passed and is operating within the contract parameters.
5. Description of the instrumentation required for testing.
6. Indicate what tests on what systems should be completed prior to TAB using th
e control system for
TAB work. Coordinate with the Commissioning Authority and TAB contractor for thi
s determination.
C. Startup Reports, Prefunctional Checklists, and Trend Logs: Submit for approva
l of Commissioning
Authority.
D. HVAC Control System O&M Manual Requirements. In addition to documentation spe
cified elsewhere,
compile and organize at minimum the following data on the control system:
1. Specific step-by-step instructions on how to perform and apply all functions,
features, modes, etc.
mentioned in the controls training sections of this specification and other feat
ures of this system.
Provide an index and clear table of contents. Include the detailed technical man
ual for programming
and customizing control loops and algorithms.
2. Full as-built set of control drawings.
3. Full as-built sequence of operations for each piece of equipment.
4. Full points list; in addition to the information on the original points list
submittal, include a listing of
all rooms with the following information for each room:
a. Room number.
b. Room name.
c. Air handler unit ID.
d. Reference drawing number.
e. Air terminal unit tag ID.
f. Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID.
g. Minimum air flow rate.
h. Maximum air flow rate.
5. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance o
f the system.
6. Full as-built print out of software program.
7. Electronic copy on disk of the entire program for this facility.
8. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and
HVAC drawings with
their control system designations.
9. Maintenance instructions, including sensor calibration requirements and metho
ds by sensor type, etc.
10. Control equipment component Submittals, parts lists, etc.
11. Warranty requirements.
12. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (n
ot commissioning tests).
13. Organize and subdivide the manual with permanently labeled tabs for each of
the following data in the
given order:
a. Sequences of operation.
b. Control drawings.
c. Points lists.
d. Controller and/or module data.
e. Thermostats and timers.
f. Sensors and DP switches.
g. Valves and valve actuators.
h. Dampers and damper actuators.
i. Program setups (software program printouts).
H. Training Manuals:
1. Provide three extra copies of the controls training manuals in a separate man
ual from the O&M
manuals.
Products
Test Equipment
A. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initia
l checkout and required
functional performance testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment wi
ll NOT become the
property of client.
B. Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instrume
nts are specific to a
piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in orde
r to accomplish startup
or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as part of
the work at no extra
cost to client; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to become the propert
y of client.
Execution
Preparation
A. Cooperate with the Commissioning Authority in development of the Prefunctiona
l Checklists and
Functional Test Procedures.
B. Furnish additional information requested by the Commissioning Authority.
C. Prepare a preliminary schedule for HVAC pipe and duct system testing, flushin
g and cleaning,
equipment start-up and testing, adjusting, and balancing start and completion fo
r use by the
Commissioning Authority; update the schedule as appropriate.
D. Notify the Commissioning Authority when pipe and duct system testing, flushin
g, cleaning, startup of
each piece of equipment and testing, adjusting, and balancing will occur; when c
ommissioning
activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction notify
ahead of time and be
proactive in seeing that the Commissioning Authority has the scheduling informat
ion needed to
efficiently execute the commissioning process.
E. Put all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continue operation duri
ng each working day
of testing, adjusting, and balancing and commissioning, as required.
1. Include cost of sheaves and belts that may be required for testing, adjusting
, and balancing.
F. Provide test holes in ducts and plenums where directed to allow air measureme
nts and air balancing;
close with an approved plug.
G. Provide temperature and pressure taps in accordance with the contract documen
ts.
1. Provide a pressure/temperature plug at each water sensor that is an input poi
nt to the control
system.
F. Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not by coils.
1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed.
2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage.
Tab Coordination
A. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC.
B. Coordinate commissioning schedule with TAB schedule.
C. Review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system towar
d completing TAB.
D. Provide all necessary unique instruments and instruct the TAB technicians in
their use; such as
handheld control system interface for setting terminal unit boxes, etc.
E. Have all required Prefunctional Checklists, calibrations, startup and compone
nt Functional Tests of the
system completed and approved by the Commissioning Authority prior to starting T
AB.
F. Provide a qualified control system technician to operate the controls to assi
st the TAB technicians or
provide sufficient training for the TAB technicians to operate the system withou
t assistance.
J. Perform and submit trend logging on the following using the control system, f
or minimum period of 5
days including one weekend, if the control points are monitored by the control s
ystem:
1. Duty cycling, if specified.
2. Demand limiting, including over-ride of limiting.
3. Sequential staging ON of equipment; optionally demonstrate manually.
4. Optimum start-stop functions.
5. Miscellaneous equipment current or status for duty cycling and demand limitin
g.
6. Equipment or building kW or current for demand limiting.
7. Equipment optimum start/stop functions.
Reference Standards
AMCA 500-D
Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating; Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007.
ASME B16.22
Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2010).
ASTM B32
Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
ASTM B88
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
ASTM B88M
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005
(Reapproved 2011).
ASTM B819
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Medical Gas Systems;
2000 (Reapproved 2011).
ASTM D1693
Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics;
2012.
NEMA DC 3
Residential Controls - Electrical Wall-Mounted Room Thermostats; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2008
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
NFPA 90A
Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
Administrative Requirments
Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before start
ing work of this section;
require attendance by all affected installers.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control syste
m component.
Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software
module.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diag
rams, and written
detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves indicat
ing size, flow, and
pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement, veloci
ties, and static pressure
drops for each system.
C. Samples: Submit two of each type of room thermostat and cover.
D. Design Data: Provide design data for sizing and selection of compressor.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, incl
uding panels, thermostats,
and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components, including
panels, thermostats, and
sensors.
G. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods,
recommended cleaning
materials, and calibration tolerances.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer s warranty and ensure forms have been filled out
in client s name and
registered with manufacturer.
J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client's use in maintenance
of project.
1. Extra Thermostats and Other Exposed Sensors: One of each type.
Quality Assurance
A. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professi
onal Engineer experienced
in design of this work and licensed at United Arab Emirates.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum five years documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this
Warranty
Correct defective Work within a one period after Substantial Completion.
Products
Automatic Control Dampers
.A The control specialist shall provide all automatic control dampers ofthe type
s indicated on the plans
and not specified to be integral with other equipment. Frames shall not be less
than 13 gauge
galvanized steel. Blades shall not be over 200mm (8 inches) wide nor less than 1
6 gauge galvanized
steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball bearing or nylon with 13mm (1/
2") shafts, side seals
shall be stainless steel of the tight-seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall
be suitable for
temperature ranges of 0 to 120C.
.B All proportional control dampers and 2-position dampers shall be opposed blad
e type and all twoposition
dampers shall be parallel blade types or approved equal.
.C Dampers shall be sized to meet flow requirements of the application. The shee
t metal contractor
shall furnish and install baffles to fit the damper to duct size. Baffles shall
not exceed 150mm
(6").
.D Dampers shall be minimum leakage type (Class 1) to conserve energy. The tempe
rature control
manufacturer shall submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control d
ampers with the
temperature control submittal. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of
75mm (3 inches) of
W.C.
.E Where ultra-low leakage dampers are specified (especially for motorized fire
dampers for Inergen
protected areas) the blade edges shall be fitted with replaceable, Snap-On, infl
atable seals to limit damper
leakage to 1/2 percent at applied static pressure.
.F The control contractor shall provide all smoke dampers in accordance with the
contract documents.
Dampers shall be parallel blade minimum leakage type with operable temperature r
ange rated at
200C. Dampers shall meet requirements of NFPA 90A. All fire dampers and smoke fir
e dampers
shall be dynamically rated for the design flow.
.G All motorized fire dampers and smoke fire dampers shall be UL 555 rated for C
lass 1 leakage
rating (UL 555S) and shall be provided complete with colored embossed position i
ndicators.
Where two or more actuators are to be operated in sequence with each other, sequ
encing shall be
by digital sequencing with separate analogue outputs, as specified in the sequen
ce of operation.
Thermostats
.A Thermostats shall be line voltage or low voltage type suitable for the applic
ation.
Low voltage type shall have heat anticipation. Ratings shall be adequate for the
applied load. Also,
refer to clause 2.4.3 as below.
.B Electronic room thermostats shall be used for zone control of VAV terminals c
ommunicating to the
VAV controller via twisted pair non polarized cable. Digital LCD display will sh
ow room
temperature, set point, and occupancy mode and air flow rate. Temperature set po
int up/down push
buttons and occupied button and a jack for connecting a portable terminal.
.C Key controller test and reset switches plus an easily accessible test jack sh
all be provided. It shall
include alarm relay contacts (DPDT) capable of handling loads of up to five (5)
amperes at 220 VAC
or 28 VDC resistive. Unit shall have self-contained power supply requiring 220V
power.
.D Thermostats for VIP area shall as per the client s specifications.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
D. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to instal
lation of similar
components in other systems.
E. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical
systems equipment
such as air handling units and air terminal units.
F. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar
components.
G. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical
systems equipment
such as air handling units and air terminal units.
Installation
A All wiring and tubing shall be properly supported and run in a neat and clean
workmanlike manner.
All wiring and tubing exposed and in equipment rooms shall run parallel to or at
right angles to the
building structure. All piping and wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bund
led and anchored to
prevent congestion on devices and terminals.
B The control contractor shall be responsible for all electrical installation re
quired for a fully functional
control and automation system and not shown on the electrical plans or required
by the electrical
specifications. All wiring shall be in accordance to all local codes and Divisio
n 16.
.1 All line voltage wiring, all wiring exposed, and all wiring in equipment room
s shall be installed
in conduit in accordance to the electrical specifications.
.2 All electronic wiring shall be #18 AWG minimum THHN and shielded except stand
ard
network (Ethernet, LonWorks, etc.) cabling shall be as tested and recommended in
lieu of #18
gauge twisted, #22 or #24 gauge is acceptable if used as a part of an engineered
structured
cabling system. The control manufacturer must submit this cabling system has bee
n tested
and approved for use by the manufacturer technical and application documentation
demonstrating that of both the control system and the engineered structured cabl
ing system.
All wiring in the central control room shall be concealed in an approved manner.
.3 All wiring in the Control Room shall be concealed in approved manner.
.4 All wiring shall be in accordance with UAE local and national codes, as well
as NFPA and
National Electric Code.
C The control contractor shall enter all computer programs and data files into t
he related computers
including all English descriptors, all control programs, approved parameters and
settings. Samples of
the following features shall also be fully implemented.
.1 Bar chart (four different bars on one chart).
.2 Curve plot (five curves on one plot).
.3 Trend log.
.4 Alarm message (action taking message).
.5 Run time maintenance message.
.6 Trouble action message.
D The control contractor shall maintain diskette copies of all data file and app
lication software for reload
use in the event of a system crash or memory failure. A complete set of original
licensed software
packages shall be handed over to the Employer during training sessions complete
with original user's
manuals & one copy shall be archived in the control manufacturer's local softwar
e vault.
Training
A All training shall be by the control contractor and shall utilize specified ma
nuals and as-built
documentation.
B Provide the training instruction to Clients staff in accordance with other art
icles of this specification.
C Operator training shall include two 16 hour sessions encompassing modifying te
xt and graphics,
sequence of operation review, selection of all displays and reports, use of all
specified OWS
functions, use of Portable Operators Terminals, troubleshooting of sensors (dete
rmining bad sensors),
and password assignment and modification
D One training session shall be conducted at system completion, and the other sh
all be conducted fortyfive
days after system completion.
E This training program will include training for Maximo program, to be carried
out by the Maximo
certified personnel.
Warranty
A All components, system software, parts and assemblies supplied by the control
contractor shall be
guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for one year from accept
ance date.
B Labour to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram, or replace system components shall
be furnished by the
control contractor at no charge to the Client during the warranty period.
C All corrective modifications made during warranty service periods shall be upd
ated on all user
documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks.
Maintenance
A. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one year from Date of S
ubstantial Completion.
C. Provide complete service of controls systems, including call backs, and submi
t written report of each
service call.
Reference standards
ASHRAE (FUND)
ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2009.
ASTM A36/A36M
Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
ASTM A480/A480M
Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-
Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 2012.
ASTM A653/A653M
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
ASTM A1008/A1008M
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy
with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2012
ASTM A653/A653M
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
ASTM A1008/A1008M
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2012
NFPA 90A
Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
SMACNA (LEAK)
HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 1985, First Edition.
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
SMACNA (FGD)
Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, weld
s, and configuration
prior to start of work for ducting systems.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of typical shop fabricated duct fittings.
D. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested
, test pressure, and leakage
rate, following SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that installation of glass fiber ductwork
meet or exceed specified
requirements.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings.
Record changes in fitting
location and type. Show additional fittings used.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products specified in
this section, with minimum ten years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work
specified in this section,
with minimum ten years of documented experience.
Regulatory requirements
Construct ductwork to NFPA/local authority standards.
Field Conditions
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommende
d by sealant
manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation o
f duct sealants.
Products
Ductwork
A. Velocity Range
1. Low velocity ductwork up to 10 m/sec (2000 fpm).
2. High velocity ductwork above 10 m/sec (2000 fpm).
B. Pressure Range
1. Low Pressure up to 50mm (2") w.g.
2. Medium Pressure 50mm to 100mm (2 to 4") w.g.
3. High Pressure above 100mm (4") w.g.
C. Materials
1. Provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting,
seam marks, roller
marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations.
2. Fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A527
or BS 2989 ,
lock forming quality, zinc coated, having nominal 389 g/m2 minimum 275 g/m2 to G
90 as per
ASTM A525 and ASTM 90 or BS 729
3. Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A167 or BS
1449 , Part 2;
A.I.S.I Type 316 with No.4 directional polish where exposed to view in occupied
spaces. Protect
finished surfaces with mill applied adhesive protective paper, maintained throug
h fabrication and
installation.
4. Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ANSI/ASTM B209 alloy,
Temper H14 or
BS 1470
5. Duct routing and height in equipment and telecom rooms to be coordinated and
approved by Etisalat
before installation.
b. Sealing:
1) All transverse joint and fitting connections sealed.
2) Not more than 1 longitudinal seam unsealed on the perimeter.
3) Application:
4) All ductwork downstream of V.A.V. boxes.
5) All return air ductwork to Air Handling Units.
6) All exhaust systems unless otherwise noted.
7) All Pressurization fan systems.
F. Round Ductwork:
1. Spiral seam single and double wall construction only. Construction of acousti
cally-lined spiral
duct shall be perforated liner similar to United sheet metal acoustic K27 double
walled
internally insulated type P, or shop fabricate if so equipped and approved.
2. Gauges: + Fittings - SMACNA Standards.
3. Joints:
a. Interior neoprene gasket push fit coupling as manufactured by FLAKT Veloduct:
1) Fastened to duct with rivets to prevent rotation.
2) Sealing compound applied as necessary to achieve the low leakage rating requi
red.
4. Application:
a. All supply ductwork leaving fan systems having static pressures in excess of
0.5 kPa (2")
of static pressure.
b. All branches from main ducts to the inlets of VAV boxes.
8. Exposed to weather.
a. Construct watertight.
10. Kitchen range hood exhaust including fan discharge to kitchen extract duct s
ystem.
a. Welded steel ducts as below.
b. Carbon steel of following gauges and thicknesses, fire rated.
1) Inside building - 1.0mm (18 gauge).
2) Outside ductwork - 2.0mm (14 gauge).
e. Cleanout doors:
1) Horizontal ducts: Maximum 6m apart on side of duct. Bottom edge not less than
50mm above bottom of duct.
2) Vertical duct: At base.
3) Hinged door and frame: Same gauge as duct, with glass cloth gasket betwe en d
oor
and frame.
4) Size: 500mm x 600mm.
5) Exhaust from kitchen hood to be in accordance with NFPA Standard 96 or equiva
lent
British Standard.
Flexible Ducts
A. NFPA 90A; UL180 Class 1 or equivalent British Standard (maximum flame spread
25, maximum smoke
developed 50).
B. ASHRAE Flexible Duct Performance Standards.
C. Maximum size 400mm no intermediate seams.
D. Construction:
1. Polyester reinforced aluminium foil over corrosion resistant wire helix, wrap
ped with 1.1/2"
fibreglass blanket and outer vapour barrier.
2. Rated pressure 250mm (10") w.g.
3. Equal to Cana-Flex Type Cl - IV.
F. Secure flexible ducts with clamps and sealer or screws, sealer and tape.
G. Flexible duct shall not lay across lighting fixtures or other surfaces; provi
de hanger supports as
required to ensure full specified air flow.
Vertical Ducts
A. Shall be rigidly supported at least at each floor level and at a maximum of 3
.5m spacing. Supports shall
be structural angles or channels fixed securely to the duct and structure in an
approved manner.
High velocity ducts supports shall be isolated from the duct by means of 12mm th
ick neoprene pads or
equivalent.
B. Horizontal Ducts
1. Low Velocity Ducts
Ducts up to 450mm width may be suspended by means of 'U' shaped flat iron hanger
s taken around
the bottom of the ducts and secured on each side and bottom by bolts.
Flat iron hangers to be used for wider ducts by fixing to duct stiffening angle
frames.
Hangers shall be 25 x 3 mm flat bar up to 760mm maximum side and 32 x 3 mm bar f
or ducts
above 800mm maximum side. Spacing as for round duct.
Where ducts run at floor level, they shall be supported on 50 x 50 x 5 mm angle
iron saddles bolted
to the floor. The ducts shall be held in the saddles by 40 x 3 mm flat iron bolt
ed to the angle
supports.
2. High Velocity - Round
Details and spacing of hangers to SMACNA High pressure duct construction standar
ds.
3. High Velocity Rectangular / Oval
Suspend from the structure by means of angle iron trapezes, hung with flat bar a
nd isolate the
bottom and sides (if necessary) by 3mm neoprene strops or equivalent.
For ducts with maximum side up to 1500mm 40 x 40 x 3 mm angle grapeze, with 25 x
3 mm
hanger shall be used and for ducts over 1550mm use 40 x 40 x 5 mm angle trapeze
with 32 x 3 mm
flat bar hanger.
Where duct is required to be installed tight against the structure, hangers of a
ngle iron constructions
may be fitted directly to flanges for support. In oval ducts, angle iron shall b
e used as support at the
bottom of the duct, suspended to the structure by hangers to SMACNA details and
spacing of
hangers.
Load spreader sheet of dimension and thickness to approval must be used between
the duct
insulation and hangers if used outside the insulation.
4. Flexible Duct Support
Reference Standards
NFPA 90A
Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; Natio
nal
Fire Protection Association; 2012
NFPA 92
Standard for Smoke-Control Systems; 2012.
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including duct access do
ors.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume contr
ol dampers, duct
access doors, and duct test holes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for all produc
ts..
D. Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test hol
es.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client s use in maintenance of
project.
1. Extra Fusible Links: One of each type and size.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. All fire related products such as Fire Dampers, Smoke Dampers, and Combinatio
n Fire & Smoke
Dampers shall be approved by authority having jurisdiction.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
Products
General
Provide ductwork accessories of types, and of materials indicated, compatible wi
th the ductwork systems,
and with proper connections between ductwork and equipment. Shut off dampers sha
ll be of the low
leakage type.
Backdraft Dampers
A. Provide backdraft dampers at:
1. All discharges from exhaust fans.
2. Stairwell exhaust louvers.
3. Damper shall be air tight to avoid condensation.
G. Each fire damper shall be provided with an access door located in adjacent du
ctwork, suitably sized
to permit proper INSITU maintenance and testing of the Fire Damper.
H. Where motorized fire damper is required it will be similar to MFSD s as specifi
ed this section.
6. Dampers on internally lined ductwork systems shall be provided with two inter
nal saddles to
protect the lining.
7. Whether shown on the drawings or not dampers shall be provided at the followi
ng locations:
a. In duct splits and branch connections of supply, return and exhaust systems a
s requested by
the engineer and as recommended by the commissioning specialist.
Splitter Dampers:
A. Provide splitter dampers at each bull-nosed branch duct.
B. Splitter damper to be manufactured using same material as ductwork.
C. Refer to ASHRAE manual for acceptable construction and installation.
D. Splitter damper positioning rod to be 6mm dia. complete with set screw and lo
cking device.
E. When installed, splitter to be free of vibration or chatter.
F. Provide shield plate to protect acoustic insulation.
G. On square bull-nosed branches install double thickness hollow aerofoil turnin
g vanes across each
branch.
Turning Vanes
A. Provide factory fabricated air turning vanes in accordance with ASHRAE Standa
rds.
B. Vanes to be constructed of the same material as the ductwork system in which
they are installed.
C. Turning vanes to be installed at all square duct elbows and where called for
on the drawings.
Reference to be made to standard turning vane detail in accordance with the cont
ract documents.
D. Acoustic turning vanes constructed from aerofoil section aluminium extrusions
with perforated faces
and fiberglass infill to be used in all acoustically lined ductwork.
Miscellaneous Products
A. Internal Strut End Plugs: Combination end-mounting and sealing plugs for meta
l conduit used as
internal reinforcement struts for metal ducts; plug crimped inside conduit with
outside gasketed
washer seal.
B. Duct Opening Closure Film: Mold-resistant, self-adhesive film to keep debris
out of ducts during
construction.
1. Thickness: 0.6 mm.
2. High tack water based adhesive.
3. UV stable light blue color.
4. Elongation Before Break: 325 percent, minimum.
C. Sealants
1. Seal all transverse joints in supply, return and exhaust ductwork with Bakeli
te 530-09 high velocity
duct sealer or equivalent, to limit rate of leakage to 5% maximum.
2. Where interior of duct is visible through diffusers registers or grilles, pai
nt interior of duct with flat
black Tremco or equal paint formulated for galvanized surfaces.
3. Seal all exposed edges, perforations and joints in acoustic duct lining with
H.B. Fuller Company's
Foster Sealfas 30-36 coating compound or approved equivalent.
4. Use Bakelite 230-38 adhesive, full coverage, for internal insulation.
5. Tape joints with 3M Brand No.474 or approved equivalent.
D. Perforated sheets
1. Perforated galvanized sheet steel with 50% area perforation will be used as a
ir straiteners
longitudinally fixed inside linear plenums for linear bar grilles and linear slo
t diffusers to equally
distribute the air along the outlet in the following cases:
a. Plenum longer than 600mm with single inlet spigot
b. All plenums with multiple inlet spigots
E. Sound Linings
1. Supply and install acoustic linings to ductwork in accordance with the contra
ct documents or as
required to maintain specified room noise level. Duct sizes indicated on drawing
s are inside of
acoustic lining and must be increased accordingly to maintain equivalent free ar
ea.
2. Linings shall be manufactured from glass fibre with a Neoprene coating or fac
ed with a black coated
matt (fire rated in accordance with NFPA 90 or equivalent British Standard) for
low pressure
ductwork, or perforated 24 gauge galvanized steel with 28% minimum open area for
high pressure
ductwork.
3. Linings in ductwork shall be minimum of 25mm thick and in plenums a minimum o
f 50mm thick.
Where lining is also used as thermal insulation thickness shall conform to the r
equirements of the
insulation specification.
4. The glass fibre lining shall have a minimum density of 32 kg/m3 with a flame
spread rating of 25 or
less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.
5. Linings shall be suitable for duct velocities up to 25.4 m/s and meet with th
e requirements of the
erosion test method as described in UL publication No. 181 or equivalent British
Standard.
6. The dynamic loss coefficient shall be a maximum of 1.2, 'K' value to be a max
imum of 0.036
watts/moC at 40oC, noise reduction for 25mm thick lining shall be a minimum of 0
.75.
7. Adhesive and sealant fire rating shall conform to NFPA 90A and non- hardening
caulking shall be
guaranteed to be permanently elastic, similar to Tremco Polybutene.
Execution
Preparation
Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
Installation
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A,
and follow SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct construction
and pressure class.
B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside
and where indicated.
C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filter
s, coils, fans, automatic
dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as i
ndicated. Provide for
cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 200 x
200 mm size for
hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 100 x 100 m for
balancing dampers
only. Review locations prior to fabrication.
D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancin
g purposes.
E. Provide fire dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers at locations indi
cated, where ducts and
outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities ha
ving jurisdiction.
Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connect
ions, corrosion
resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance wi
th NFPA 92.
G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to client's representative.
H. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct
connections immediately
adjacent to the equipment.
I. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connecti
ons immediately adjacent
to the equipment.
J. For fans developing static pressures of 500 Pa and over, cover flexible conne
ctions with leaded vinyl
sheet, held in place with metal straps.
K. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems wh
ere branches are taken
from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths f
rom duct take-off.
L. Use splitter dampers only where required.
M. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where required.
N. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registe
rs, regardless of whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.
Duct Silencers
Reference Standards
AABC MN-1
AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated
Air Balance Council; 2002.
AMCA 300
Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and
Control Association International, Inc.; 2008.
AMCA 301
Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test
Data; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1990.
AMCA 302
Application of Sone Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving Devices; Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1973 (Reaffirmed 2001).
ANSI S1.4
American National Standard Specification for Sound Level Meters ;
1983 (R2006) with Amd.S1.4A-1985.
ANSI S1.8
American National Standard Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels; 1989
(R2006).
ANSI S1.13
American National Standard Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels in Air;
2005.
AHRI 270
Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and
Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
AHRI 575
Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within an Equipment Space;
Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
ASHRAE Std 68
Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure
for Fans; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc.; 1997.
ASHRAE (HVACA)
ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2011.
ASTM E477
Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow
Performance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers; 2006a.
ASTM E596
Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Noise
Reduction of Sound-Isolating Enclosures; 1996 (Reapproved 2009).
NEBB (STDS)
Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of
Sound and Vibration; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2006.
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
Performance Requirment
Use acoustical devices to maintain sound level of spaces at levels not to exceed
those listed below.
Performance Requirement
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide catalog information indicating, materials, dimensional
data, pressure losses,
and acoustical performance.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, materials, thicknesses, dimensional data, p
ressure losses,
acoustical performance, layout, and connection details.
C. Design Data: Provide engineering calculations, referenced to specifications a
nd AMCA 301
standards indicating that maximum room sound levels are not exceeded.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures ne
cessary to maintain
integrity of sound isolation.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate installation is complete and in accord
ance with
instructions.
Quality assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products
specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
B. Design application of duct silencers under direct supervision of a Profession
al Engineer
experienced in design of this work.
C. Perform Work in accordance with AMCA 300 standards and recommendations of ASH
RAE Std
68. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
Regulatory Requirements
Conform to applicable code for sound levels at property line.
Products
Duct Silencer
A. Description: Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill
material, and inner
casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar cons
truction. Fabricate in
accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 0.8 mm thick galvanized steel stiffened as required, wi
th mastic filled
lock formed seams, 50 mm long, 2.9 mm slip joints on both ends.
2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 0.6 mm thick perforated galvanized steel.
3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 64 kg/cu m density.
4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.
Cross-Talk Silencers
A. Description: Duct sections with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fil
l material, and inner
casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar cons
truction. Fabricate in
accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 0.8 mm thick galvanized steel with mastic filled lock f
ormed seams, 75
mm long, and 2.9 mm slip joint on both ends.
2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 0.6 mm thick perforated galvanized steel.
3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 64 kg/cu m density.
4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.
Acoustic Housings
A. Description: Modular panels, including access doors and windows, nominal 100
mm thick, with
filled outer and inner casing. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA H
VAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 1.2 mm thick galvanized steel stiffened as required, wi
th mastic filled
lock formed seams for internal flange butt joining.
2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 0.8 mm thick perforated galvanized steel.
3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 64 kg/cu m density.
4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.
Ductwork Lagging
A. Acoustic Insulation: 50 mm thick, 50 to 80 kg/cu m density glass fiber or min
eral wool insulation.
B. Covering: sheet lead with surface weight minimum 20 kg/sq m.
Acoustic Louvers
A. Configuration: 200 mm deep louvers with blades on 45 degree slope; sound abso
rbing fill
material, and inner surface of perforated sheet metal, heavy channel frame, bird
screen.
B. Materials:
1. Louvers: 1.50 mm galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory prime coat fi
nish.
2. Louvers: 2.50 mm extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory prime coat
finish.
3. Inner Surface: Minimum 0.6 mm thick perforated galvanized steel.
4. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 64 kg/cu m density.
5. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.
6. Bird screen: 25 mm square wire mesh.
7. Mounting: Interior flat flange.
Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Support duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connections, l
agged with leaded vinyl
sheet on inlet and outlet. Refer to Section 23 3100 and Section 23 3300.
C. Install cross-talk silencers in wall. Seal wall penetrations; refer to Sectio
n 07 9005.
D. Where indicated, lag ductwork by wrapping with insulation and covering. Apply
covering to be
air tight. Do not attach covering rigidly to ductwork.
E. Attach ductwork to acoustic louvers with flexible duct connections. Refer to
Section 23
3300.
System Start-up
Inspect installation periodically. Prepare and start systems.
13.14 Hvac fans
Reference Standards
ABMA STD 9
Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers
Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).
AMCA 99
Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;
2010.
AMCA 210
Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance
Ratings; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007
(ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).
AMCA 300
Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 2008.
AMCA 301
Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test
Data; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007.
NEMA MG 1
Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data on axial fans and accessories including fan curves
with specified
operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inl
et and outlet at
rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of axial fans and accessories including fan
curves with specified
operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outle
t at rated capacity, and
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Test Reports: Indicate performance data for adjustable axial fan blades for a
t least five blade
settings, including maximum.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
E. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive repla
cement, spare parts
list, and wiring diagrams.
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client s use in maintenance of
project.
1. Extra Fan Belts: One set for each individual fan.
Quality Assurance
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of p
roducts specified in
this section, with minimum five years o f documented experience.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.
Field Conditions
Permanent fans may not be used for ventilation during construction.
Products
Axial Fans (For Duty and Application Refer To Equipment Schedule)
A. Casings shall be of hot dipped galvanized steel. The unit shall be complete w
ith a sight inspection port
and a motor terminal box.
B. Impeller blades shall be cast aluminum aero foil section.
C. Motors shall be totally enclosed air stream rated class F insulation with IP
55 protection and suitable for
45C ambient temperature. Motors shall be supplied with sealed-for-life bearings.
D. All external fans shall be with weather resistant coatings.
Mixed Flow Fans (For Duty and Application Refer To Equipment Schedule)
A. Fan casings to be fabricated from corrosion resistant pre-galvanized sheet st
eel with proprietary flanges.
Fan support arms shall be resiliently mounted to a diaphragm plate.
B. Impellers shall be manufactured from aluminum. The fan shall be complete with
an integral inlet bearing
to provide optimum performance.
C. Fan motors shall be totally enclosed air stream rated class F insulation. Mot
or protection shall be IP55
and suitable for 45C ambient temperature. Bearings shall be sealed-for-life units
.
In-Line Centrifugal Fans (For Duty and Application Refer To Equipment Schedule)
A. Fan casings to be manufactured from fire retardant polyamide glass-fiber impr
egnated material. It shall
have circular inlet and outlet connections and be complete with a built in termi
nal box.
B. Fan impellers for sizes up to 315mm shall be of plastic with metal back plate
s. An all metal construction
shall be used for a size of 315mm and over.
C. Fan motor shall be an external-rotor unit to IP44 standards and class B insul
ation.
The motor shall be moisture proof. It shall be fitted with sealed-for-life beari
ngs and suitable for
45C ambient temperature.
Twin Fan Units (For duty and application refer to Equipment Schedule)
A. The parallel fan units shall be suitable for duct mounted on curb installatio
n as required. The casings
shall be manufactured from pre-galvanized sheet steel. It shall be complete with
access panels to
facilitate servicing. A terminal block and integral isolator shall be included.
The fans shall be double
inlet, double width type using forward curved impellers within a scroll suitable
for belt drive.
B. Fan motors shall be manufactured to BS 5000 Anti-vibration mountings shall be
fitted between the
common fan base plate and the unit casing.
C. Automatic shutters shall be provided to prevent recirculation of air between
fans.
D. The shutters shall also act as a back draft damper if the unit is shut down.
Each fan shall be fitted with an airflow detector switch. In the event of the du
ty fan failing the airflow
switch shall signal the standby fan to start via the changeover panel.
Each unit shall be provided with an automatic changeover panel. The panel shall
start the standby fan in
the event of the duty fan failing. The panel shall also have the facility for du
ty sharing of the two fans on
a 12 hour cycle.
All internal wiring shall be done by the manufacturer in the factory. The whole
unit shall be acoustically
lined.
E. All fans and intervals to be accessible for Mainteance.
Roof Mounted Extract/Supply Fans (For duty and application refer to Equipment Sc
hedule)
A. Fan motors shall be totally enclosed drip proof rated to Class F, 220/380V, 1
phase/3 phase, 50 Hz. as
indicated in equipment schedule.
B. Fan ambient temperature range: 0-50 Degrees C.
C. Casing (cowl) shall be manufactured of cold pressed fibre glass for long life
in harsh or extreme
weather conditions. The coloring shall contain an ultra violet stabilizer to ens
ure the cowl will not
fade due to sunlight.
D. Fan shall be curb mounted.
E. Fan shall be complete with bird guards, inlet guards and local power disconne
ct (isolator).
F. Aluminium mesh shall be thicker than bird mesh (submit sample)
13.15 Air terminal units
General
A. Constant volume terminal units.
B. Variable volume terminal units.
C. Airflow Measurement Stations.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating configuration, general assembly, and ma
terials used in
fabrication. Include catalogue performance ratings that indicate air flow, stati
c pressure, and NC
designation. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. The noise data of the unit shall comply with the project requirement and appr
oval on the noise
performance of the unit is a must.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, general assembly, and materials used i
n fabrication, and
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support and hanging detail
s, and service clearances
required.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of units.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer s descriptive literature,
operating instructions,
maintenance and repair data, and parts lists. Include directions for resetting c
onstant volume
regulators.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed i
n client's name and
registered with manufacturer.
Quality assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products specified in
this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwrite
rs Laboratories Inc. as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
Warranty
Provide one year manufacturer warranty for air terminal units.
Products
Manufactured Units
A. Ceiling mounted variable air volume supply air control terminals for connecti
on to single duct, central
air systems, with electric variable volume controls.
B. Identify each terminal unit with clearly marked identification label and air
flow indicator. Include unit
nominal air flow, maximum factory set airflow, minimum factory set air flow, and
coil type.
Adjusting
Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modul
ation from 100 percent
of design flow to 15 percent full flow.
13.16 Air outlets and inlets
General
Section Includes
A. Diffusers.
B. Jet Nozzles.
C. Registers/grilles.
D. Door grilles.
E. Louvers.
F. Goosenecks.
Reference Standards
AMCA 500-L
Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 2012.
ASHRAE Std 70
Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society
of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006 (R2011).
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review ou
tlets and inlets as to
size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outle
ts and inlets showing
type, size, location, application, and noise level.
B. Samples: Submit two of each required air outlet and inlet type.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
Quality assurance
A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std
70.
B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
C. All supply air outlets shall be provided with balancing dampers.
D. Noise regeneration in the outlets to be provided for approval. Noise level re
generation should be at
least 10 units below the room requirements. Where such information is not provid
ed by the
manufacturer, it is the responsibility of the contractor to test the regenerated
noise with the design
factors in the presence of the acoustic consultant.
Quality Assurance
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of p
roducts specified in this
section, with minimum fifteen years of documented experience.
Mock-Up
A. Provide mock-up of typical exterior ceiling module with supply and return air
outlets.
B. Locate where directed.
Products
Rectangular Ceiling Diffusers
A. Type: Provide square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in four w
ay pattern with sectoring
baffles where indicated.
B. Connections: Round.
C. Frame: Provide surface mount, snap-in, inverted T-bar, and spline type. In pl
aster ceilings, provide
plaster frame and ceiling frame.
D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish.
E. Color: As selected by the Architect.
F. Provide butterfly volume control damper; removable core with damper adjustabl
e from diffuser face
but concealed.
G. Diffusers shall be suitable for operation at 5% more and 25% less than schedu
le duty without causing
objectionable air motion at occupied level.
H. Provide gaskets and seals with all units and accessories as required to preve
nt air leakage. Furnish
four complete sets of wrenches and special tools required to adjust, dismantle a
nd install all units and
accessories furnished for this project.
Jet Nozzles
A. The Jet Nozzles shall be of eyeball type with a single air outlet aperture an
d must not have concentric
rings within the discharge cone.
B. The Jet must allow easy adjustment and be able to provide jet direction throu
gh 360 degree over a 60
degree arc.
C. Model: Trox DUK-V/315/0/0/P0 or approved equal.
D. Color: [As selected by the Architect]
Ceiling Slot Diffusers
A. Type: Continuous 13 mm wide slot, 1 slots wide, with adjustable vanes for lef
t, right, or vertical
discharge.
B. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory clear lacquer finish.
C. Color: As selected by the Architect.
D. Frame: 32 mm margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket, mitered end b
order.
E. Plenum: Integral, galvanized steel, insulated.
Door Grilles
A. Type: V-shaped louvers of 0.90 mm thick steel, 25 mm deep on 13 mm centers.
B. Frame: 0.90 mm steel with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance on both
sides of door, with
factory prime coat finish.
Louvers
A. Type: 100 mm deep with blades on 45-degree slope with center baffle and retur
n bend, heavy channel
frame, 13 mm square mesh screen over exhaust and 13 mm square mesh screen over i
ntake.
B. Fabrication: 1.50 mm thick galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory pri
me coat finish.
C. Color: As selected by the Architect.
Goosenecks
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards of minim
um 1.20 mm
galvanized steel.
B. Mount on minimum 300 mm high curb base where size exceeds 230 x 230 mm.
Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in positi
on to conform to
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Obtain Architect app
roval for exact
locations fixing and details.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and regi
sters, despite whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
Reference Standard
AHRI 210/240
Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat
Pump Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
ASHRAE Std 15
Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/ASHRAE Std
15).
ASHRAE Std 23.1
Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and
Condensing Units; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010.
ASHRAE Std 90.1
Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010,
Including All Addenda (ANSI/AHSRAE/
NEMA MG 1
Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical name
plate data, and wiring
diagrams. Contractor is required to submit manufacturer s statement and test certi
ficates confirming
that designed equipment will achieve the CoP values claimed in the specification
. Contractor is
required to provide prior to procurement supporting third party test certificate
s at full load conditions
and / at AHRI conditions.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size
of field connections.
C. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation ins
tructions.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connectio
ns.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer s descriptive literature,
operating instructions,
installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out
in client s name and
registered with manufacturer.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client's use in maintenance
of project.
1. Extra Filters: One for each unit.
2. Extra Pilot Thermocouples: One for each unit.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products specified in
this section, with minimum ten years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this
section with minimum
ten years of experience and approved by manufacturer.
Products
System Design
A. Split-System Heating and Cooling Units: Self-contained, packaged, matched fac
tory-engineered and
assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed.
1. Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor un
its, factory
cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line.
B. Performance Requirements: The selected units shall comply with the cooling ca
pacities indicated in
the drawings and System Efficiency listed below.
The following table outlines the minimum permissible seasonal system efficiency
for various system types.
The target efficiency quoted is based upon performance under standard test condi
tions and procedures as
outlined by AHRI standards specific to each system type. The performance of air
conditioning equipment
according to the relevant AHRI standard should be obtained from the equipment ma
nufacturer.
In the subsequent tables, the following units apply:
SEER/EER = Btu/Wh
SCoP/Cop = unit less
IPLV = Btu/Wh
Equipment
Type
Size
Category
Subcategory or
Rating
Condition
Minimum Efficiency as
per Prescriptive Path
Method for Units1
Efficiency
achievable
by
Units as per
Design
Test
Procedure
Air
Conditioners,
Air cool
< 19kW
Split System
13.0 SEER
3.81 SCop
13.0 SEER
AHRI
210/240
> 19kW
and
< 40kW
Split System and
Single Package
11.2 EERc
3.28 CoP
11.2 EER
> 70kW
and
< 223 kW
Split System and
Single Package
10.0 EER
2.93 CoP
2.95 CoP
AHRI
340/360
System Design Unitsl
IPLVs are only applicable to equipment with capacity modulation
Electrical Characteristics:
Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment under provisions
of Section 26 2717.
Indoor Units
A. Indoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit con
sisting of cabinet,
supply fan, evaporator coil, and controls; wired for single power connection wit
h control transformer.
Outdoor Units
A. Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet
, with compressor and
condenser.
1. Comply with AHRI 210.
2. Refrigerant: Ozone friendly refrigerant such as HFC.134a, HFC-407C, HFC- 410a
or approved
equivalent. The proposed refrigerant shall have zero ozone depletion potential.
3. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in acc
ordance with
ASHRAE Std 23 and UL listed.
B. Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure
switch (automatic reset),
service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line).
Provide thermostatic expansion valves.
C. Operating Controls:
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of lo
cal authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15.
C. Pipe drain from split unit to nearest floor drain.
14 ELECTRICAL
14.1 Low voltage electrical power conductors and cables
General
Section Includes
A. Single conductor building wire.
B. Non-metallic-sheathed cable.
C. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable.
D. Service entrance cable.
E. Armoured cable.
F. Metal-clad cable.
G. Wiring connectors.
H. Electrical tape.
I. Heat shrink tubing.
J. Wire pulling lubricant.
Reference Standards
ASTM D4388
Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and
Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2008.
FS A-A-59544
Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation);
Federal
Specification; Revision A, 2008.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection
Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority
Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments
and Supplements.
UL 854
Service-Entrance Cables; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
UL 1569
Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
(AADC).
Regulations and bylaws laid by Al Ain Distribution Company
IEE
The Institution of Electrical Engineers - Regulations for the
Electrical Equipment of Buildings, 16th Edition.
BS
British Standards Institution.
BS 5839 Parts 1 & 4/1988 (AMD
1992), Part 2 1983 (AMD 1986), Parts
3 & 5
(1988)
Fire Detection and Alarm Systems in Buildings.
BS 5266 1988
The emergency lighting of premises
BS 7430:1991
Earthing
BS 6651 1992
The Protection of Structures against Lightning.
ASTA
Association of Short Circuit Testing Authority
BS 6724
or equivalent IEC- XLPE Insulated, LSF Power Cables for
voltages up to And including 1000V.
BS 6346 1989 (AMD 1992)
PVC Insulated single copper conductors.
BS 6004 1991 0r IEC 227
PVC insulated single copper conductors.
BS 5486:Part 1 1990 (1993) or EN
60439 or IEC 439-1
Factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear for
voltages up to and including 1000 V.A.C. and 1200 V.D.C.
BS EN 60947-2: 1992
Air Circuit Breakers - Horizontal Draw out.
BS EN 60947 - 3: 1992
Switches and switch fuses.
BS 5486:Part 1 1986 and Part 19 1989
Circuit Breaker Panel boards.
BS 5486: Part 1 1990 & EN 60439
Distribution Panel Boards
BS 88 1988 (AMD 1992) or EIC-269
H.R.C. Fuse Links
BS 159 & BS 5486: Part 2:1988 or
EIC -439-2
Rising Main Bus Trunking
BS 3871 Part 1:1965 (AMD 1984) &
BS EN 60898:1991 or EIC 898
Miniature and Moulded Base Circuit Breakers.
BS 1363 1984 (AMD 1990)
Socket Outlets 13 Amp.
BS3676 Part 1: 1989
Light Switches.
BS EN 60947-4-1
Direct-on-Line (full voltage) a.c. Starters
BS EN 60947-4-1
Reduced Voltage a.c. Starters; Star Delta.
BS EN 60947-4-1;1992
Rheostatic Rotor Starters.
BS EN 60947-4-1:1992
Reduced Voltage a.c. Starters: Two-step Autotransformer
BS 7211
LSF non-armoured stranded copper conductors.
IEC 255
Electrical protective relays.
BS 159
Busbars and busbar connections.
IEC 185
Current transformers.
IEC 186
Voltage transformers.
IEC 529
Specification for classification of degrees of protection
provided enclosures.
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
A. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under
other sections with the
actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes inc
reased for voltage drop.
B. Coordinate the installation of direct burial cable with other trades to avoid
conflicts with piping or
other potential conflicts.
C. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provid
e terminations suitable
for use with the conductors to be installed.
D. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets f
or conductors and
cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, list
ings, and available sizes,
configurations, and stranding.
B. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for copper condu
ctors. Include proposed
modifications to raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. to accommodat
e substituted
conductors.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling
, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Re
cord actual routing for
underground circuits.
Quality assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
Outer Covering/Sheets
A. Unless specified otherwise, multi-core cables shall have one or more outer co
verings and armouring.
The outer covering must ensure the following characteristics:
1. Resistance to vermin.
2. Resistance to oil.
Core Identification
A. The color identification for single core insulated cables shall be as follows
:
2. The sleeves for fire alarm sounding system cables shall be numbered:
a. 600 for positive or live feed conductors.
b. 610 for negative or neutral conductors.
c. 620 up to 749 for individual alarm sounding circuits switch lines in sequence
.
XPLE cable
A. XLPE armoured cable (XLPE) 1000 volt grade. Single, twin, three and four core
shaped stranded
copper conductor. Each conductor protected with an XLPE insulation sleeve. Drawn
over the
conductors an extruded PVC bedding. Wound over the bedding galvanized steel wire
armour. Drawn
over the steel wire armour, an external PVC cover sheath to BS 6724
B. Mechanical cable glands manufactured brass complete with earth tags and shrou
ds shall be suitable of
cable to ensure exact tolerances of outside diameter of cable.
C. Cable termination insulated lugs shall be of the compression type and shall b
e manufactured from
high conductivity copper, electric tin-plated to resist corrosion and give good
electrical continuity.
Execution
Cable Protection
A. Sleeves consisting of plastic conduit shall be installed for all cables passi
ng through brick, concrete
and similar structures to permit future withdrawal without disturbing the struct
ure. All sleeves shall
be tightly packed with fire-resisting material of approved type.
B. All exposed or concealed cables rising from the ground or floor as well as ho
rizontally run cables 2
metres or lower from finished floor level shall be protected. The protection sha
ll be by means of
galvanized steel sheet covers of minimum thickness 2mm. An upstand of 100mm shal
l be projected
from the floor around the pipe or conduit with fire sealant around.
C. Power cables installed in trays within a height of 2 meter from finished floo
r level shall be protected
throughout that distance. Means of protection shall be by manufacturer supplied
galvanized steel
covers of minimum thickness 1.0mm
Cable Sizes
A. The sizes of all main and sub-main cables shall be as indicated on the drawin
gs.
Submit voltage drop calculations and increase the cable sizes if required.
B. Sizes have been determined by reference to various factors including the rele
vant, IEC, BSI standards
for cable ratings, and ambient temperature of 50 Degree C for cables installed i
nside the building and
85 Degree C for cables installed exposed outside the building and the run length
s have been taken as
the most direct route consistent with the main cable routes indicated on the dra
wings. Should the
Contractor deviate from the installation indicated, he shall re-evaluate the cab
le sizes and provide full
details for the Engineer's review. Any deviation shall be agreed with the Engine
er.
C. Multi-core cables with reduced neutral conductor will not be permitted.
G. Single core cables forming a three phase group shall be fixed in trefoil clea
ts of the alloy pattern. Flat
formation may be used where specified.
Cables on Racks
A. Where agreed with the Engineer, a cable racking system may be run. The rack s
hall be of adequate width
for disposing the cables with a width allowance of 25% for additional cables. Ca
re shall be taken to
ensure that the rack does not foul overhead cranes, doors or other features. The
rack shall be of such
strength that, when loaded with all the cables for which it is designed, plus an
additional 15kg/m, it shall
not deflect from the horizontal by more than 3 Deg.
B. The Contractor shall supply where necessary all steel racks, fixing bolts, et
c., for supporting the cable,
including marking out and checking.
C. Cables shall be supported on steel racks using approved cleats. All single co
re phase cables are to be
installed in die-cast, non-ferrous, trefoil cleats with elastic protection and n
eutral cable in similar way
cleats of the same manufacture unless flat formation is used when single cleats
may be used.
D. For cables of core area of and less than 25 sq. mm multicore cleats on a comm
on bolt or spindle will be
acceptable. Multiple cables shall be secured with PVC cleats at a spacing consis
tent with the size of cable
used.
E. Every care shall be taken in cable handling during erection to avoid the slig
htest damage to cables. When
cables are clamped in the racks, the Contractor shall ensure that undue stress i
s not placed on any
sheathing or armouring.
F. All supports and racks shall be arranged as far as practicable for the easy r
emoval of any single cable in a
multi-cable run, without disturbing other cables and without threading through s
upports or racks.
G. Cutting away, fixing and grouting of raw bolts and making well shall be done
by the Contractor. Cables
shall be run in a near and orderly manner. The Contractor shall be responsible f
or the design and detailing
of the steelwork for cable racks and shall submit such design for review before
putting the work in hand.
The Contractor shall include the cost of this design work in his price for this
method of installation.
Cable on Trays
A. Trays shall be adequately supported to prevent sagging by more than 3 Deg. be
tween fixed points; all
supporting steelwork shall be fixed at no more than 1m centres unless otherwise
specified.
B. All cables shall be saddled to tray work. Fire Rated and Flexible cable cabli
ng shall be saddled at not
more than 500mm centres and all other cabling at no more than 1m centres all on
cable trays.
C. All cables, other than pilot or control, when installed on trays shall not be
in more than one layer.
D. 2D spacing between centres to be maintained for all power cables on their ent
ire run.
CP 1013
BS Code of Practice - Earthing
BS 7671
BS Requirement for Electrical Installation BS EN
340
BS for earthing system material and testing
BS 2784 & BS 970
BS for earthing material, solid copper rods and accessories.
BS 62305 -1 -4 :2006
Protection against Lightning AADC Al Ain Distribution Company
Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit the following drawings and documents related with
each electrical system for
consultant and owner s approval:
B. Original catalogues for various proposed components.
C. Schedule of Accessories and Fitting
D. Test Certificates.
Quality assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
A. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications for Signal Reference Grids: Company with minimum fiv
e years documented
experience with high frequency grounding systems.
Miscellaneous Conductors
A. Earthing Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section
B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided bare copper wire, terminated wi
th copper ferrules
C. Bonding Straps: Soft copper, 1 mm thick and 50 mm wide, except as indicated C
onnector Products
D. Pressure Connectors : High conductivity plated units
E. Bolted Clamps : Heavy duty type
Earth well
Earth wells shall be provided if required only to provide the earth grid at the
Substations. Earth well with
100mm diameter GS pipe shall be driven up to the water table. An earth bar shall
be welded to the top of
the earth well for branch connections. The well shall be protected by a concrete
housing with MS or
concrete cover of 250mm x 250mm x 10mm at grade level.
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
A. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipm
ent and components to be
installed.
B. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and mater
ials required for
installation.
C. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting s
urfaces at the installed
locations.
D. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and o
ther potential conflicts
installed under other sections or by others.
E. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
Sequencing:
A. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until c
oncrete has fully cured
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalogue pages and data sheets
for metal channel
(strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post- installed c
oncrete and masonry
anchors.
B. Shop Dr awi n g s : Include d e t a i l s for fabricated hangers and supports
where materials or methods
other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.
C. For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC Evaluat
ion Service, LLC
(ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request.
D. Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified req
uirements.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
Quality Assurance
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with applicable building code.
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution requirements.
D. Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners (when specified): Cert
ified by fastener system
manufacturer with current operator's license.
E. Installer Qualifications for Field-Welding: As specified in Section 05 5000.
C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be sup
ported.
D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot met
al channel (strut) and
associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field- assembly of s
upports.
Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor an
d fastener types
indicated for the specified applications.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment com
ponents.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting wo
rk.
Installation
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in
accordance
with NECA 1.
C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support f
rom piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Consultant, do not provide suppo
rt from suspended
ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Consultant, do not provide suppo
rt from roof deck.
F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approva
l of Structural
Engineer.
G. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut
) to support
equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface- moun
ted on hollow
stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp
locations to
provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that i
t relies on its own
weight for support.
Sequencing:
A. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until c
oncrete has fully cured in
accordance with Section 03 3000.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalogue pages and data sheets
for metal channel
(strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post- installed c
oncrete and masonry
anchors.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where mate
rials or methods other
than those indicated are proposed for substitution.
C. For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC Evaluat
ion Service, LLC
(ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request.
D. Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified req
uirements.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
Quality Assurance
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with applicable building code.
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution requirements.
D. Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners (when specified): Cert
ified by fastener system
manufacturer with current operator's license.
E. Installer Qualifications for Field-Welding:
B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or
cable to be supported.
1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be sup
ported.
D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot met
al channel (strut) and
associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field- assembly of s
upports.
Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor an
d fastener types
indicated for the specified applications.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment com
ponents.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting wo
rk.
Installation
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in
accordance with
NECA 1.
C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support f
rom piping, ductwork,
or other systems.
D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Consultant, do not provide suppo
rt from suspended
ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Consultant, do not provide suppo
rt from roof deck.
F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approva
l of Structural
Engineer.
G. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut
) to support
equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface- moun
ted on hollow
stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp
locations to
provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that i
t relies on its own
weight for support.
Reference Standard
A. Flexible conduit comply with BS 4607 Part 3
B. Circular conduit comply with BS 4607 and BS 6099
Administrative Requirements
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be install
ed, including
adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, pip
ing, equipment and
other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, an
d equipment installed
under other sections or by others.
4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that prese
rve the integrity of the
roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
5. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of cond
uit is complete between
outlet, junction and splicing points.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets f
or conduits and fittings.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural
concrete slabs, where
permitted.
2. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for seal
ing.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underg
round, conduits
embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and large
r.
Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution requirements.
Conduits shall be painted to match adjacent finish in line with other sections o
f the specifications.
Pull boxes and Junction Boxes
A. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Each
shall be suitable in all
respects for the applications, and complete with screw-on hinged covers with gas
kets.
B. The physical size of pull boxes shall be in accordance with the wiring regula
tions to suit the number and
size of conduits and conductors.
C. All motors shall be factory fitted with stud terminals mounted on insulated p
late with appropriate
terminations for field wiring, all housed in a factory fitted terminal box.
Trunking
All cable trunking shall be galvanized heavy duty (minimum 1.0mm thick).
Thickness of cover shall be same as the trunking thickness. Same thickness is ap
plicable for all
accessories. So site fabrication is acceptable. Supply cable/wire retainer and c
ombs inside trunking.
Sizes shall be as shown on drawing.
Sleeves
In concrete slabs, except as noted below, sleeves shall be UPVC with an integral
flange to secure the
sleeve to formwork construction.
Execution
General Conduit and Conductor Installation Requirements
A. Install conduit and conductors concealed in all finished areas, and concealed
to the degree made possible
by finishes in partially finished and unfinished areas. Conduit may be exposed i
n unfinished areas such
as Electrical rooms, Mechanical rooms and similar rooms unless otherwise noted o
n the drawings or
specified herein. Refer to and examine the architectural drawings and room finis
h schedules to determine
finished, partially finished and unfinished areas of the building. Where conduit
s are installed exposed,
they shall be of galvanized steel painted to the Engineer's approval. Where cond
uits are installed
embedded, they shall be of heavy duty rigid PVC.
B. Where conduit and/or conductors are exposed, arrange same to avoid interferen
ce with other work and
parallel to the building lines. Where horizontal conduits and/or conductors are
exposed, install as high as
possible. Do not install conduit and/or conductors within 150mm of "hot" pipes o
r equipment unless the
conduit and/or conductors are associated with the equipment.
C. The drawings do not detail the exact routing of distribution conduits and in
the case of branch circuits do
not indicate the exact sizes or routing of conduit. The contractor shall prepare
rough-in detail drawings
detailing the size and routing of all conduits and shall submit these for the En
gineer's approval prior to
installation.
D. Be responsible for marking the location of all chases and holes on site. Prov
ide dimensioned drawings to
enable a check to be made of all holes and chases in concrete for the Engineer's
review.
Installation of Conduit
1. Provide conduit for all electric service distribution and branch circuit cond
uctors except where
armoured cable is specified and for applications where trunking duct, cable tray
and similar
raceway material is provided.
2. All exposed conduits shall be rigid seamless galvanised steel.
3. All conduits embedded in walls or floors shall be heavy duty rigid PVC.
4. Provide a separate ground conductor in all galvanized conduit. Size in accord
ance with local
regulations with a minimum size of 1.5mm2
5. Generally, distribution conduit is sized on the drawings. Conduit not sized o
n the drawings shall be
sized in accordance with IEE and/or local authority s regulations with 45% space f
actor. Note
that the sizes of branch circuit conductors scheduled and/or specified on the dr
awings are minimum
sizes and must be increased as required to suit length of run and voltage drop i
n accordance with
local requirements. Where conductor sizes are increased to suit voltage drop req
uirements, increase
the scheduled or specified conduit size to suit.
6. The maximum allowable size of conduit for installation in poured concrete wor
k must be
determined in consultation with the Engineer prior to installation. The placemen
t of reinforcing steel
in structural concrete work will take precedence over the placement of conduit.
Multiple runs of
conduit in poured concrete work must be adequately spaced as directed by the Eng
ineer.
Conduits installed in concrete or floor screed shall be sealed watertight. Every
circular box shall be
provided with extension rings. No offset from conduit to box is acceptable.
7. Do not install horizontal runs of conduit in masonry walls.
8. Provide a minimum of two (2) 25mm diameter conduits up to and into ceiling sp
aces from flush
mounted panel boards located below and/or near a hung ceiling.
9. Support all conduit installed underground on well tamped flat bed of earth, f
ree from rocks or
protrusions of any kind.
10. Conduit fittings shall be, unless otherwise noted, constructed of the same m
aterial as the conduit and
suitable in all respects for the application. Flanged couplers shall be used whe
n conduits are
terminated to panels.
11. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining from site and checking fro
m drawings the
location of structural steelwork and the positions of holes, steelwork and finis
hes. No steelwork will
be drilled without first obtaining written approval from the Engineer.
12. All sets and bends in conduit runs shall be formed on site in bending machin
es using proper
formers, guides, springs, etc.
13. All conduit systems shall be installed so as to enable wiring to be carried
out by loop-in system that
is, arranged for the draw-in of cables at the outlet points. Where the Contracto
r considers the
installation of draw-in boxes unavoidable, the proposed conduit routes shall be
agreed with the
Engineer before work is put in hand.
14. The drawings provided with this specification indicate the approximate posit
ion only of outlet
points and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to mark out and centre on
site, the final
positions and he shall also be responsible for their accuracy.
15. The Contractor's attention is specially drawn to the necessity for keeping a
ll conduit entirely
separate from other piping services as direct connections will not be permitted
between the
conduits and such pipes, except where earthing is required. Conduit runs shall b
e determined by the
Contractor and agreed by the Engineer that cables installed in any particular ru
n are easily
withdrawable.
16. Conduit systems shall be mechanically continuous and water-tight after insta
llation. Conduit shall
be installed in such a manner as to ensure against the collection of trapped con
densation.
17. Runs of conduit between draw-in positions shall not have more than two right
angle bends or the
equivalent and the length of such runs shall be limited to permit the easy drawi
ng-in of cables.
The Contractor shall demonstrate as required by the Engineer that cables install
ed in any
particular run are easily withdrawable.
18. Draw-in boxes shall be provided in all straight conduit runs at intervals no
t exceeding 9m and
in runs containing two right-angled bends at intervals not exceeding 7.5m.
19. Where conduits cross expansion joints, the Contractor shall install expansio
n couplers at the
position of the expansion joint and at right angles to it.
20. Where conduit runs terminate in cable trunking, the termination shall be mad
e with flanged
couplings as specified for adaptable box entries.
21. Where conduit runs terminate in the boxes, the termination shall be made wit
h flanged couplings as
specified for adaptable boxes.
22. Where conduits enter boxes with tapped threads less than 20mm, the terminati
on shall be made with a
brass spout nipple.
23. Outlet boxes for wall lighting points shall be flush with the wall surfaces
unless indicated on the
drawings and twin parallel spout entries provided if necessary for looping purpo
ses. Outdoor outlets
shall be provided with grommets, gaskets and rust proof cover plate. Ball type o
utlets shall be used
to connect pendent lights with ceiling outlets through G.I conduits. No plug in
ceiling rose is
required in electrical-mechanical room and similar rooms.
24. Outlet boxes for luminaires shall be of the loop-in type where the installat
ion is concealed and the
Contractor shall allow for terminating arrangement and install any additional dr
aw-in boxes required
in accessible locations.
25. For luminaires fed by concealed cables and having boxes fitted flush with th
e ceilings, the
Contractor shall include for all the necessary extension rings or break joint ri
ngs. Pattress shall
be fitted where required to outlets on surface runs.
26. Heavy distance saddles shall be used for surface fixings of steel conduit.
27. Where any surface mounting control gear or other equipment is to be installe
d in conjunction with
concealed conduit work, the conduit shall be terminated at a flush mounted circu
lar or adaptable
box. The back of the equipment shall be drilled and bushed for back entry and th
e equipment
mounted so as to conceal the adaptable box.
28. Where conduits are specified in floor screeds, the Contractor must carefully
check the proposed
screed depths at all positions before installing conduits and shall, wherever po
ssible, arrange to
cross conduits where there is ample thickness of screed. If at isolated position
s, the crossing of
conduits in shallow screeds cannot be avoided, arrangements may be made to set t
he lower conduit
into a shallow chase performed in the slab, subject to the agreement of the Engi
neer.
29. The Contractor shall provide attendance during the pouring of concrete to en
sure that conduits and
accessories are not displaced or damaged.
30. No wiring shall be carried out before the particular section of the conduit
installation to be wired is
complete to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Color Coding
Installation of Pull boxes and Junction boxes
A. Provide pull boxes in conduit systems wherever necessary to facilitate conduc
tor installations.
Generally, conduit runs exceeding 30m in length, or with more than two (2) 90 de
grees bends shall be
equipped with a pull box installed at a convenient and suitable intermediate loc
ation.
B. Provide a junction box wherever required and where shown and/or specified on
the drawings.
C. All pull boxes and junction boxes must be accessible after the building is co
mpleted.
D. Accurately locate and identify all concealed pull boxes and junction boxes on
"as- built" record
drawings.
E. Support and secure all boxes independent of the conduit or cable connected th
ereto.
F. Install identification labels indicating system name on all pull boxes and ju
nction boxes.
Installation of Sleeves
A. Where conduits, raceways and conductors pass through structural poured concre
te, supply sleeves,
unless otherwise noted.
B. Size sleeves, unless otherwise noted, to leave 12mm clearance around the cond
uit, raceway, etc. Pack
and seal the void between the sleeves and the conduit, raceway, conductor etc. f
or the length of the
sleeves as follows:
C. Seal all sleeves with a one part intumescent elastomer, equal to 3m Brand Fir
e Barrier Caulk CP25.
Putty 303, sealing systems 7902 or 7904 series, composite sheet CS-195 or wrap s
top FS-195.
D. Interior partition sleeves: 1.5mm thick steel, galvanized.
E. Sleeves in Exterior Walls and Floors: Cast iron complete with pre-manufacture
d sealing rings and
pressure bushings of proper size. Keep pressure bushings accessible for future t
ightening.
F. Sleeves through Floors: To extend 50mm above finished floors unless otherwise
shown. All sleeves
for future use shall be capped.
G. Electrical riser closets shaft edge to extend 100mm above the finished floor
as an upstand.
H. Sleeves through roofs must be sheet metal flashing with sloping flanges betwe
en two layers of roofing
material and separate watertight counterflashing on conduit.
I. In poured concrete construction, accurately locate sleeves, and turn these sl
eeves over to the division
performing the concrete work for placement in the concrete formwork.
J. Submit to the concrete reinforcement detailer at the proper times, drawings,
indicating all required
sleeves, recesses and formed openings in poured concrete work. Such drawings sha
ll be completely
and accurately dimensioned and shall relate sleeves, recesses and formed opening
s to suitable grid
lines and elevation datum.
K. "Gang" type sleeping will be permitted only with the Engineer's approval.
L. Terminate sleeves for work which will be exposed so that the sleeve is flush
at both ends with the
wall, partition or slab surface so that the sleeves may be completely covered by
escutcheon plates.
M. Openings for multiple conduit or conductor runs, etc., will be provided by th
e division responsible for
the particular construction in which the opening is required. Carefully co-ordin
ate the opening
locations with the particular division and ensure that openings are suitably siz
ed and located. Seal the
space between the opening and the conduit, conductors, etc. for the length of th
e opening as for
sleeves in paragraph 2.1 above.
N. Where a round or formed opening is required, where placement of a sleeve has
been missed, or where
provision of an opening has not been properly co- ordinated, neatly cut a suitab
ly sized hole or
opening using proper tools to the approval of the Engineer. Prior to cutting any
such holes or
openings, determine whether or not any reinforcing steel or services, are concea
led behind the surface
where the hole or opening is to be cut and be responsible for all costs incurred
for correcting any
damage caused to the structure or services due to cutting holes or openings with
out prior study and
approval of the Engineer.
Installation of Inserts, Beam Clamps and Fasteners for Conduit Raceway Etc and E
quipment Hangers and
Supports.
A. Provide all inserts, beam clamps, fasteners, and similar hardware required fo
r conduit, duct, raceway,
conductor, etc., and equipment hanger and/or support materials unless otherwise
noted for casting into
concrete in accordance with specification.
B. Accurately and properly set concrete inserts in the concrete framework. Every
items in the areas
supported from soffit of the slab shall be fixed using inserts or bridge. No dri
lling in the concrete slab
is acceptable for fixing/supporting whatever items in any areas. This is applica
ble for all divisions of
this project.
C. For runs of three (3) or more conduits, raceways, or conductors in concrete f
ormwork, use multiple
type inserts used for the smallest conduit in the group.
D. Fasten hangers and support provisions to brick or masonry with expansion shie
lds and machine bolts,
or for light loads, use plugs and screws.
E. In cavity walls and/or ceilings use two (2) wing toggles and for heavy loads,
provide steel anchor
plates with two (2) or more toggles to spread the load.
F. Provide beam clamps for attaching, hanging and/or support provisions to struc
tural steel, or where
approved by the Architect, weld the hanging and support provisions to the struct
ural steel.
G. Explosive power actuated fasteners will not be permitted.
H. Use fibre or lead screw anchors for anchoring screws.
Access Doors
A. Access doors shall be provided under other divisions of the contract for the
particular type of
construction in which the access door is to be installed.
B. Prepare detail drawings indicating exact size and location of all access door
s required by this division
and submit to the Engineer for review. Access doors are required to access trays
, pull boxes, junction
boxes, VAV s, MFDs SFD s, and control panels.
C. Indicate access panels on "As built" drawings and note at each location the i
tems that access is being
provided for.
D. Provide lamacoid labels (white on black), screwed or riveted in place, for al
l access doors and access
tiles listing items or equipment which access is being provided for unless other
wise directed by the
Engineer.
Painting and Finishes
A. Painting of exposed electrical work will be done as part of the work.
B. All exposed electrical fittings, supports, hangers, frames conduit, racks, bo
xes, raceways and similar
material and apparatus within service room and similar rooms without false ceili
ng shall be galvanized
and finished with corrosion resistant primer ready to accept paint. Take special
care when priming
work exposed to the elements or in wet areas to prevent rust or corrosion from d
amaging adjacent
surfaces. Final finish color to be approved by the Engineer.
C. All large switchgear, transformers, distribution centres, panel board, starte
rs, disconnects or similar
apparatus shall be factory finished in gloss air dry enamel over corrosion resis
tant sealer primer.
Unless specified to the contrary, this finish shall be RAL 7032.
Standard Identification
A. Identify electrical work as specified below.
B. For each piece of electrical distribution equipment from the electrical sourc
e of supply up to and
including panel boards and motor systems, for special control panels and cabinet
s, and for any other
piece of equipment where specified in this section, provide engraved lamacoid id
entification
nameplates. Nameplates shall generally be black-white-black with bevelled edges,
secured to
apparatus with stainless steel screws. Warning signs shall be red with white let
tering.
C. Equip large multiple cell or component apparatus such as switchboards and dis
tribution panels with
main nameplates identifying the equipment, voltage characteristics and capacity,
and with subnameplates
clearly identifying each cell or component and its service.
D. Panel board nameplates shall identify the panel board references and numbers
designated on the
drawings, unless otherwise instructed. All nameplates for disconnect switches, c
ontrol panels, all
components of electrical systems, LV systems, fire alarm system, BMS, , MDB s, MCC s
, SMDB s,
DB s and all cabinets/boards/panels under all divisions shall outline their servic
e in English and
Arabic. Size of name plate and front plate shall be approved by the Engineer.
E. Motor starters, magnetic and manual, shall identify the piece of motorized eq
uipment being serviced.
F. Exact nameplate wording and sizes must be approved by and confirmed by the En
gineer prior to
manufacture.
G. Directories for branch circuit panel boards shall be clearly and neatly typew
ritten, accurately
identifying the type, location and wattage of the connected load for each circui
t breaker. Directories
shall be secured to the rear of the cabinet door under protective plastic. Incor
porate copies of all
panel board directories in each copy of operating and instruction manuals.
H. Clearly identify each branch circuit breaker with Z-type markers chevron cut
in a permanent manner
to correspond with directories. Glued paper identification will not be acceptabl
e.
I. Clearly identify main pull or junction boxes (excluding obvious outlet boxes)
by painting the outside
of the covers. Schedules of colors shall be as stated before.
Conductors
L. Control conductors, in addition, shall be numbered with Critchley Markers, or
Electrovert Ltd., Z-type
markers or equal. Color code conductors, for special component manufacturer's re
commendations.
M. All cables shall be labelled using Critchley markers at both ends of terminat
ion.
N. All wires shall be terminated using porcelain barrel type connectors or appro
ved equal. All multistring
wires and cables shall be crimped with lugs before termination. This applies to
all types of wires and
cables for all divisions in this project for site installations and also any wir
ing done at manufacture s
place.
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
A. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be install
ed, including
adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
B. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, pip
ing, equipment and
other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
C. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, an
d equipment installed
under other sections or by others.
D. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that prese
rve the integrity of the
roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
E. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
Sequencing:
A. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of cond
uit is complete between
outlet, junction and splicing points.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions f
or storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations o
f supports.
Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilit
ies within 500 km
of Project.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitabl
e for the purpose specified
and indicated.
Straight trays and ladders, fittings and horizontal and vertical bends of variou
s angles crosses, tees,
wyes, reducers, vertical riser elements, connectors, joint plates and all necess
ary fixing accessories
including supports. No local or site fabrication of any cable trough system incl
uding ceiling and wall
supports are acceptable. Threaded rods for ceiling supports are not acceptable.
Cable Trough
A. The whole of the tray work, fittings, and supports shall be of mild steel hot
dipped galvanised after
manufacture. The thickness of the protective sheath on any element shall not be
less than 60 microns.
B. Cable trays shall be constructed from mild steel of minimum thickness 16 gaug
e (1.5mm). Height
shall be 60mm. Trays in excess of 300mm width shall be of minimum thickness 14 g
auge (2.0mm).
Flange height shall be 100mm.
C. Insert elements, bolts, screws, pins etc., shall be mild steel cadmium plated
/hot dip galvanized.
D. Tray work shall have oval perforations. Ladder type trays shall be used as re
quired and/or approved
by the Engineer.
E. All trays (straight and fittings) to be heavy duty returned flanged type unle
ss specified otherwise.
F. Tray component are to be accurately rolled or formed to close tolerance and a
ll edges rounded.
Flanges are to have full round smooth edges.
G. Ladder racks for widths up to and including 300mm shall be constructed from r
olled steel sections of
minimum thickness 16 gauge (1.5mm). Height shall be 60mm.
H. Ladders in excess of 300mm width shall be C Section construction with a minim
um thickness of 14
gauge (2.0mm). Height shall be 100mm. The rungs shall be spaced at a maximum 300
mm.
I. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, cable trays shall be used in the rang
e and 150mm to 750mm
wide, in five preferred standard sizes: 150, 300, 450, 600 and 750mm.
J. Other sizes shall be used where specified or previously agreed with the Engin
eer.
K. Return flanges shall be a minimum of 10mm deep, unless otherwise specified.
L. Minimum radii at side rails, horizontal, and vertical tees and crosses shall
be in accordance with the
Manufacturer's standard.
M. Refer to Specification in Section 05500 and the Architectural Contract Drawin
gs for description of
cable tray/ladder/girder of widths 1000mm and larger.
Execution
Installation
A. Install all cable trays and ladder racks strictly in accordance with IEE and
local authorities
requirements.
B. Drilling, machining or cutting shall not be carried out after application of
protective coat, unless
previously agreed by the Engineer. If cutting or drilling is necessary, edges sh
all be cleaned up
and painted with zinc based paint before erection.
C. Provision shall be made when installing all cables and cable trays for the ex
pansion and settlement
of the building.
D. Cables shall be fixed to the trays/ladders by means of PVC cleats and flame r
etardant cleats for
flame/fireproof cables with galvanised bolts, nuts and washers. Use galvanized m
etal trefoil cleats
with rubber pad for single core cables
E. Control cables run and clipped in groups shall not exceed twelve in number an
d shall be not more
than double banked. Power cables shall be laid in a single layer except with the
prior approval of the
Engineer. Power cables should be spaced 2D between centres of cables throughout
the run of cables.
Submit calculations for voltage drop for cables and increase the size if necessa
ry.
F. Vertical distance between trays mounted horizontally shall be minimum of 250m
m.
Earthing
Earthing
A. The entire cable tray and ladder system shall be bonded and 12mm x 1.5mm tinn
ed copper shall be
bolted across each joint in the system by means of galvanised nuts and bolts, co
mplete with flat
and spring washers.
B. Tray systems shall be bonded to the main building earthing system as required
or directed by the
Engineer.
Fire Barriers
A. Arrange for opening in fire rated walls, and floor for width and depth of cab
le trough to run through
in addition to the specified clearance of the above cable trays.
B. Arrange and make good fire rating of floors or walls after cables have been i
nstalled.
For all floor openings of all risers (telephone, power) except vertical telecom
cable risers where
grating shall be provided.
C. All openings / sleeves within floor slabs and fire rated walls shall be seale
d with proper fire
rated material.
14.7 Wiring Accessories
General
Section Includes
Accessories.
Reference Standard
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Mos
t Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments an
d Supplements.
B. Sheet steel outlet box comply with BS 1353, BS 46621
C. Socket outlet comply with BS 1363
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract document
s. Obtain direction before
proceeding with work.
Sequencing:
Do not begin installation of wiring accessories until installation of conduit is
complete between outlet,
junction and splicing points.
Submittals
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
wiring accessories
Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution
requirements.
B. All wiring accessories shall be screwless type except those which are above f
alse ceiling in hidden
locations and weatherproof. Color of plate shall be same surrounding where they
are mounted.
C. Light switches denoted as weather proof (WP) shall be provided with IP55 prot
ection.
D. Miscellaneous outlets:
1. 13A switched fused connection unit shall be similar to MK 15731 WH1 plastic s
crew less in
concealed locations or Wandsworth series 3MSS wall color on visible locations as
described
before.
2. 20A double pole switch with neon indicator and flexible outlet shall be simil
ar to MK 15002
+15409+15399 RED screw less in concealed locations or Wandsworth series 3 in vis
ible
locations.
3. 13A-switched socket outlet with neon indicator shall be similar to MK screw l
ess range concealed
locations or Wandsworth series 3 in visible locations.
4. Emergency stop button, mushroom head complete with actuator, contact block, l
egend, enclosure
and auto-lock key release, equal to "Crabtree" 22509/MR.
Execution
Installation of Outlet Boxes
A. Provide an outlet box for each lighting fixture, wiring device, telephone out
let and any other outlet
specified herein or shown or specified on the drawings, unless otherwise noted.
Provide galvanised
metal back box for every items mounted in wall and ceiling slab/false ceiling. I
P rating of box as per
area of application.
B. Generally, mounting heights and locations for outlets are shown on the drawin
gs and/or specified
herein, however, confirm the exact location and arrangement of all outlets with
the Engineer prior to
roughing-in. Architectural drawings and the Architect's instructions have preced
ence over electrical
drawing diagrammatic layouts and specified mounting heights and locations.
C. Do not install outlet boxes "back-to-back" in walls and partitions. Such outl
ets must be staggered and
sealed against noise transmission. "Thru-Wall" type outlet boxes will not be per
mitted for any
application.
D. Support and secure boxes independent of the conduit or cable connected theret
o.
E. All recessed outlet boxes for surface mounted devices or lighting fixtures mu
st be totally concealed by
the device or fixture. Face plate final finish of switches, socket outlets, tele
phone and data outlets
shall match surrounding finish unless instructed by the Engineer.
Reference Standards
ANSI Z535.2
American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2007.
ANSI Z535.4
American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2007.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edit
ion
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments an
d
Supplements.
UL 969
Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Administrative Requirements
A. Coordination:
1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identi
fied prior to
fabrication of identification products.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended c
eilings, until
identification products have been installed.
2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and paint
ing are complete.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalogue pages and data sheets
for each product.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed
designations,
materials, legends, and formats.
C. Samples:
1. Identification Nameplates: One of each type and color specified.
2. Warning Signs and Labels: One of each type and legend specified.
Quality Assurance
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
Field Conditions
Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommen
ded by manufacturer.
Products
Identification Requirements
A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to re
main that are not already
identified in accordance with specified requirements.
B. Identification for Equipment:
1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distributio
n and control
equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Switchboards:
1) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within si
ght of
equipment.
2) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch devic
e. Do not
identify spares and spaces.
B. Identification Labels:
1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, h
eat, and abrasion
resistant.
2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten
text unless
otherwise indicated.
Voltage Markers
A. Minimum Size:
B. Legend:
C. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.
C. Warning Labels:
1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester
or self-adhesive
vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using
materials
recognized to UL 969.
2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and ac
cessories
recommended by label manufacturer.
3. Minimum Size: 51 mm by 102 mm unless otherwise indicated.
Execution
Preparation
Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instruct
ions.
Installation
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjust
ment, servicing, and
maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment w
ith rear access.
4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
7. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.
14.9 Switchboards
General
Section Includes
A. Switchboards.
B. Sub-main board.
Scope of Work
A. Supply, install and connect all main distribution equipment and make the util
ity service
connections all as described hereinafter and in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract
Documents.
B. Supply, install and connect, QRM, TRM all as described in drawing and as per
ADDC
specification
C. Supply, install and connect 11/0.400KV 1500KVA oil type transformer all as de
scribed in drawing
and as per ADDC specification
D. Supply, lay 11KV MV cable from TRM, QRM up to the transformer including cable
gland,
supports etc as per drawing and ADDC specification
E. Supply, lay 1C 630 Sq.mm XLPE/AWA/PVC cable from Transformer to Main Switch B
oard as
per drawings and specification.
F. The switchboards shall comprise of main breakers, indicating instruments and
outgoing breakers to
provide a complete service and distribution system for the whole complex.
G. Generally the sub-distribution shall be carried out by means of:
B. Sequencing:
Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilit
ies within 300 km of
Project.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitabl
e for the purpose specified
and indicated.
Basically main incoming cables shall be bottom entry and outgoing cables or bus
ducts top entry,
through suitable termination boxes and gland plates, all accessible from front o
r rear of panel. The
Contractor shall ensure that adequate access and termination provision is incorp
orated in complete
switchboards for all incoming and outgoing cables and bus ducts specified.
12. All panels and equipment shall be certified typed-tested, suitably rated for
operation in the
ambient conditions and supply characteristics stated.
13. Switchboards sections shall contain withdrawable type air circuit breakers,
bus bars, MCCBs,
instruments, earth bus, etc., as specified with ratings and arrangements as show
n on the Drawings
and shall be complete with all internal wiring and connections.
14. All switchboards shall be tested at the manufacturer's premises as well as a
fter installation.
15. The Contractor shall submit all technical details, wiring diagrams and inter
locking arrangements
to the Engineer for review prior to ordering. Detailed constructions and general
arrangements
shall be agreed with the Engineer during construction stage.
16. All doors and removable covers shall be provided with a flexible earth condu
ctor connected to the
switchboard frame.
17. BMS marshalling compartment of adequate size shall be provided in every swit
chboard and
motor control centre wired to units.
E. Busbars
1. Main bus bars shall be constructed of high strength, high conductivity, flat
tin plated hard drawn
copper throughout, fully braced by means of color code injection moulded glass f
illed polyester
insulation with joints bolted using high strength 12mm cadmium plated steel bolt
s and extra wide,
extra thick washers to ensure maximum pressure and current distribution at each
joint or fully
insulated with color coded fire retardant insulation. Bolts shall be tightened t
o torque wrench
prescriptions.
2. The bus bars shall be designed so that maximum temperature rise in any part o
f the switchboard
will not exceed 35 degree Cover 50 degree C ambient at full load. Reduced size n
eutral bus bars
shall not be permitted. Bus bars current density shall not be less than 1000 A/S
q. inch. T type
connection units shall be used for connection between main bus bars and branchin
g bus bars. Bus
bars end shall be tinned. Compartment temperature rise shall be within the limit
s to comply with
latest BS / IEC Standards.
F. Ground Bus
A continuous ground bus, not less than 50% of the main bus cross section area sh
all be provided for
the length of each switchboard and solidly bolted to the steel framework. The gr
ound bus shall be
constructed of the same materials as the main bus and shall be complete with sui
table lugs for
grounding connections outlined on the drawings. The ground bus shall have moment
ary current rating
equal to or greater than that of the apparatus in the switchboard. Removable lin
k is required between
the neutral bus and ground bus.
G. Control and Instrumentation Wiring
1. Control wiring will be with PVC insulated stranded copper conductors rated fo
r 750V and 90
Deg. C.
2. Connectors to be vinyl insulated compression terminals manufactured in one pi
ece from pure
electro tin plated copper. Insulation to be color coded with separate colors for
the following
applications:
a. 400 volts.
b. 230 volts.
3. Run wiring from current transformer to instruments or relays via terminal blo
cks with shorting
links for maintenance. CTs for transducers shall be separate. CTs or PTs used fo
r metering
protections, signaling, interlocking shall be separate and shall not be used for
multi-purpose.
4. Identify all wires at each end with wire tags. Wires in all switchboards to h
ave a unique
identification.
A digital metering system complete with all CTs and PTs for customer's use shall
be installed and
factory wired in locations in each switchboard as specified hereinafter. All PT
secondary s shall be
for 24V, and all CT secondary s shall be 5A. The system shall be an integrated mic
ro-processor based
metering package, capable of displaying phase voltage, linevolts for all phase ,
current for each phase,
power factor, frequency, kilovolt amperes, kilovolt amperes reactive, kilowatts
, Kilowatts hours,
megawatt hours, , maximum kilowatts demand, and display overflow. A standard ban
and jack test
block shall allow testing of the meter by injecting 230V and 5A while the phase
display indicates T.
Three set point dry contacts for load shedding or alarm shall be provided, each
being field
programmable to suit Employer requirements. The meter shall be designed to inclu
de provisions for
communication with external monitoring devices via an RS232C port or better. All
parameters shall
be available on LCD display only by selection button provided on meter.
The metering system and associated software shall be manufactured by the switchb
oard manufacturer.
The Contractor shall include for all hardware and software as required and recom
mended by the meter
manufacturer for remote monitoring at the BMS terminals for kilowatt-hour meter
readings and
failure alarm.
I. Switchboard Arrangements
1. Generally switchboards shall be as specified hereinafter. Specific items of e
quipment of each
switchboard shall be as detailed on the drawings and as listed hereinafter.
2. All MDBs
a. Incoming breakers controlling incoming service motor operated, withdrawable a
ir circuit
breaker, communicating type.
b. Other outgoing feeder breakers shall be of withdrawable moulded case circuit
breakers sized
as detailed on the drawings with a minimum short circuit interrupting capacity o
f 50 KA RMS
system at 400 volt 3 phase, communicating type.
c. Digital metering units located as shown on drawings.
d. Ground fault relays and CT's.
e. All MCCBs shall be solid state communicating type.
f. Digital Kilowatt Hr meters as required by ADDC.
g. Lamp test buttons
This specification covers design, engineering, assembly works testing of low vol
tage Motor
Control Centre. The Motor Control Centre shall provide power process equipments
in the
building. As such high reliability and continuity of supply / service are prime
requisites.
b. Ambient Conditions
3 phase 4 wire
d. Standard
Equipment offered shall conform to the latest issue of following standards:
BS 5486 part 1, 1986 Type Tested Assemblies for LV Switchgear for voltages not e
xceeding
1000V a/c
All indication and controls shall be grouped together on the front of the ACBs a
nd shall be
accessible on the front door of the Cubicle through a suitable cut out on the cu
bicle door. The
arrangement shall be flush, neat aesthetic and modern.
The item shall generally comprise; Manual Spring charging
lever Indication of spring charged - yellow Indication of
Circuit breaker - Tripped Closing Push Button
Opening Push Button
Open / Closed Indication of ACB Racking in/ out device withdoor closed
Release lever for moving part of ACB
Service/Test/Isolator Position indicator Lamp test button.
Microprocessor based control with LCD display and all adjustable settings displa
yed.
f. Safety Shutters
Withdrawable ACBs shall be provided with shutters that drop automatically on wit
hdrawal.
Shutters shall be RED with markings to show live contact are behind the shutters
. Shutters
shall have padlocking facility.
g. Safety Interlocks
A lever shall be provided on the front of the ACB which shall be released to wit
hdraw or
insert the moving part. It shall not be possible to rack In or Out a closed ACB.
h. MCCBs
MCCBs shall be tripole pole manually operated fixed type with thermo magnetic re
leases for
overload and short circuit. Breaking capacity shall not be less than 25KA at 400
V, 50Hz
where 50 kA is not specified.
i. Starter Feeders
. Each starter feeder shall be equipped with but not limited to: Main TP MCCB wi
th door
interlocked rotary handle
. Triple pole thermal overload relay with built in single phasing prevention fea
ture, 2
auxiliary contacts for remote monitoring.
. Hand-Off-Auto Control Switch
. Common Duty Selector Switch where applicable Run/Trip Lamps
. Digital Ammeter with selector switch
Auto changeover key operated arrangement where applicable Wiring for interlockin
g
with Chiller Control Circuit
j. Interconnections
Interconnections shall be very short and neat using air insulated, tinned copper
bars.
k. Termination
. Unless otherwise indicated, cable entry shall be from bottom or top, cabling a
ccess is from
the front or rear as applicable.
. For Starter feeder s power and control cables shall be brought out neatly to ter
minal
blocks. Power and Control terminals shall be adequately segregated.
. Power wires shall be RYB color coded at the terminations. Control wires shall
be multi
stranded copper with black insulation and ferruled. Terminal Blocks should be su
itably
marked for identification and easy termination of field wires.
. Meters shall be multi-function digital type. Indicating lamps, push buttons, c
ontrol and
selector switches shall be neatly and logically flush mounted on the front of th
e respective
equipment compartment doors to IP54. Lamp test button shall be provided.
l. ACBs
ACBs shall be of modern, advanced design and construction, modular pattern with
features
for high breaking capacities, precise control, indication and protection. They s
hall be motor
operated 3 or 4 pole as specified on the drawings / schedules, and shall be of c
ommunicating
type.
m. Protection
Direct acting built in, solid state microprocessor (micro logic) based releases
shall be
provided for protection against Overload, short circuit and earth fault. Under v
oltage trip and
shunt trip shall be provided. LCD display for reading all parameters is required
. The activated
protection also shall be displayed or indicated.
Overload stage shall comprise an inverse Long Delay unit with settings from 0.4
to 1 x In, on
5 different characteristics curves.
Short Circuit Stage - Inverse short delay unit adjustable from 1 to 8 x In in de
finite steps on 7
different characteristic curves with adjustable time lag settings. The protectio
n specified is
applicable for all ACBs of Section 16400 & 16622 and 16800.
The trip unit of ACB shall provide measurement of current, voltage, active power
and
harmonics (3, 5, 7, 9, 11 & 13). These shall be displayed on LCD screen. The tri
p unit shall
also display histories of last 10 trips and maintenance indicator.
n. Operating Mechanism
The ACB shall be closed and opened by a stored energy spring charged operating m
echanism.
Closing springs shall be charged by motor operated with also provision for manua
l charging.
o. Construction
All steel work shall pass through a four stage finishing process, chemical spray
, degreasing,
iron phosphating and finally an electrostatically applied top coat of epoxy powd
er coating
which is cured in a high temperature over to give a strong molecular bonding wit
h the steel.
The top coat shall be RAL7032 color.
q. Busbars
The Main Horizontal busbars shall be HDHC tinned insulated copper with phase col
or sleeved
running in the full switchboard. Current rating as shown on the drawings rated f
or the ambient
specified. Supports shall be fibre glass reinforced, moulded type material with
large creepage
paths or as recommended by the manufacturer. They shall be totally enclosed in a
separate
sheet compartment and braced for the fault level specified. Temperature rise as
specified
earlier in this section.
The vertical busbars shall also be HCHC tinned insulated copper, suitably connec
ted to the
Main Horizontal busbar and run in a separate totally sheet steel enclosed Vertic
al busbar
chamber. The busbars shall be supported regularly at short intervals by fibre gl
ass reinforced
moulded type material or as recommended by the manufacturer. Current ratings sha
ll suit the
loads connected on each Vertical busbar.
The Horizontal and Vertical busbars shall be ASTA Certified or equal for Specifi
ed fault
level.
Neutral shall be of same size as the phases for Horizontal and Vertical busbar a
ssemblies and
sleeved completely black.
4. Air Circuit Breakers
M. Cable Glands
1. Each panel sections shall be provided with cable glands to suit the type, siz
e and number of low
voltage cables as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provision shall be made for future additional cabling.
3. Cable glands or brackets where required shall be mounted inside the panel.
Sufficient space for cable connections and adjustments on site shall be provided
.
4. The Contractor shall supply approved bolted type compression terminals or equ
ivalent for
external cable connections.
5. All openings for external cable connections shall be suitably protected to pr
event ingress of dust,
vermin etc.
6. The panel sections shall be provided with proper cable fixing clamps and swea
ting terminal lugs
as well as bonding connections.
E. Panelboard Busbars
1. Busbars shall be electrolytic hard drawn copper to BS 159 and tin plated with
rating as indicated
on the drawings, air insulated and rigidly supported by suitable non-hygroscopic
, anti-tracking
insulators so as to withstand forces due to thermal expansion under normal opera
ting conditions
and the fault currents at the point of installation, neatly arranged for 380V, 5
0 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire
operation, and fault rating not less than 25 KA sym. for 1 seconds. Busbars shal
l be designed for
35 Degree C temperature rise above an ambient temperature of 50 Degree C.
2. Busbars shall have the same cross section throughout.
3. Busbars bracing shall maintain the same mechani cal s t r ength and cur r ent
carrying
capacity under normal operation conditions and fault conditions.
4. Busbars shall be color coded.
5. Busbars shall not be exposed unless the complete panelboard doors and dead fr
ont is
removed.
G. Digital voltmeter and digital ammeter with selector switches: 0-500V voltmete
r with selector
switch. Ammeter complete with selector switch and CT's with links for maintenanc
e.
B. Assume full responsibility for all co-ordination and liaison with ADDC and an
y other authority
having jurisdiction to ensure power supply to the building is connected within t
he approved time
scale and to facilitate building timely completion.
C. Requirements
1. All work performed as part of this section for the electric service shall con
form to all
requirements of ADDC.
2. Make all required arrangements with the authorities, in order that the electr
ic service is
installed and put into operation at the proper time.
3. Connection charges including material and labour costs of work classified und
er ADDC to be
paid by Contractor and to be reimbursed by the Employer as a variation to Contra
ct in line with
other sections of Contract Documents.
H. Complete all panel board circuit directories to the Engineer's approval and m
ount it in a transparent
enclosure at the back of the panel door.
I. Fill in panel board directories using a typewriter, to identify circuits.
4. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to examine the plans and spe
cifications to ensure
that all the relays and protective devices being installed in the distribution s
ystem will provide
satisfactory co-ordination.
5. Breaker frame sizes, sensors, and delay types, shall be provided in accordanc
e with the
approved co-ordination study.
6. Testing procedures shall be in accordance with the following Regulatory Autho
rities, British
Standards Institution, Lloyds Registry, and Veritos.
Scope of Work
A. Supply, install and connect all final distribution board connections all as d
escribed hereinafter and
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Generally the final distribution shall be carried out by means of:
1. Distribution from final boards shall be generally in conduit and single coppe
r conductors
drawn into the conduit all as specified in other sections of the specification.
Administrative Requirements
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be install
ed, including
adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, pip
ing, equipment
and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, an
d equipment
installed under other sections or by others.
4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that prese
rve the integrity of
the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
5. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
C. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of cond
uit is complete between
outlet, junction and splicing points.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions f
or storage,
handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations o
f supports.
Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilit
ies within 300 km of
Project.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitabl
e for the purpose specified
and indicated.
Accommodate earth continuity conductors for each single pole, or multipole MCB w
ay, plus a
minimum of five additional terminals for supplementary earth bonding conductors
of
minimum 16mm sq. size.
6. Removable gland plates shall be provided at the top and bottom of all panel b
oard
enclosures for raceway termination and or cable gland termination. Where cables
are single core,
the gland plates shall be of a nonferrous metal.
7. Final distribution power boards should be supplied with clear space between e
dge of outgoing
breakers and side of panel minimum 200mm. for wiring. This clear space for wirin
g shall be
available on both sides of the boards. Standard panels are not acceptable.
3. The presence, for the length of the required, or qualified and competent equi
pment service
representatives during start-up.
4. Forward for approval prior to energization of the distribution system and equ
ipment, form neat
typewritten copies of the engineering and testing report.
Co-ordination Study
A. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to examine the plans and spe
cifications to ensure that all
the relays and protective devices being installed in the distribution system wil
l provide satisfactory coordination.
B. Breaker frame sizes, sensors, and delay types, shall be provided in accordanc
e with the approved coordination
study.
C. Testing procedures shall be in accordance with the following Regulatory Autho
rities, British Standards
Institution, Lloyds Registry, Veritos.
14.11 Variable frequency motor controllers
General
Section Includes
A. Variable frequency controllers.
B. Soft Starter
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, rating
s and size of switching
and over current protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and encl
osure details.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimen
sions and weights
shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.
C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examinat
ion, preparation, and
installation of product.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up inspection findings.
Reference Standards
A. Motor shall comply with IEC 34, IEC 85, DIN 57530/VDE 0530-1291
B. Motor fan shall comply with IEC 34 part 6
C. VFD Low voltage directive comply with 2006/95/EC, Machine directive 98/37/EC,
EMC
directive 2004/108/EC, Harmonics EN-610003-12
Motor control centre shall incorporate the following items in addition to the mo
tor starters for each
circuit:
1. Main power indicating lamps red-yellow-blue.
2. Earth leakage sensors with local audio/visual alarms
Soft Starter
A. Motor and soft-starter shall be of the same manufacturing group of company an
d the manufacturer
must be able to provide guarantee statement of performance of motor and drive sy
stem together.
B. Manufacturer must have its own subsidiary company or drive center based in UAE
with qualified
personnel for assistance and on site programming.
C. Soft-starter shall be rated for 50degreeC ambient temperature.
D. Soft-starter shall be designed for wide variation in input supply, from 208 V
to 500 V AC + 10% -
15% with 50-60 Hz 5% supply frequency.
E. Soft-starter shall have keypad for onsite programming.
F. Soft-starter shall have minimum but not limited to following software program
mable features
through keypad:
1. Programmable relays
2. Facility to auto-start on supply loss
3. Programmable kick-start feature
4. Programmable Pedestal current
5. Programmable current limit
6. Programmable acceleration and deceleration times
7. Protection against Excessive Starring Time
8. Programmable Instantaneous overload and under load protection
9. Locked rotor protection
10. Thermal overload protection
11. Reverse phase sequence protection
12. Facility to program Delay before Restart
13. LCD display
The VFD shall conform to international standards and meet the recommendations of
the following:
EMC Immunity:
a. IEC 1000-4-2/EN 61000-4-2 Level 3
b. IEC 1000-4-3/EN 61000-4-3 Level 3
c. IEC 1000-4-4/EN 61000-4-4 Level 4
d. IEC 1000-4-5/EN 61000-4-5 Level 3
3. Output characteristics:
a. Start-up and permanent operation
The VFD shall be capable of continuously delivering its rated output voltage and
current to the
motor in the limits of acceptable input voltage variations.
The VFD shall be able to control a 3-phase squirrel-cage motor over a speed rang
e of 1%
(minimal speed) to 100% (maximum speed), continuously and smoothly. Within this
speed
range no de rating of nominal torque value is accepted.
The VFD shall be adaptable to various types of applications and in particular it
shall be possible
to select on site, one of the three following operating modes:
. For low speed machines and heavy loading, (i.e.: high U/f ratio)*
. For machines with average loading operating at low speed (i.e.: constant torqu
e, U/f ratio)*
. For pumps and fans (i.e.: variable torque, progressive U/f ratio)* (*): U= out
put voltage in Volt, f =
output frequency in Hz. The Sensor less Flux Vector Control (SFVC) technique can
be selected.
b. transient conditions:
c. Inverter protections:
The VFD shall include the following auto protections against short- circuits:
. Between phase to phase,
. Between phase to earth,
. On internal supplies,
. On analogue and logic outputs.
. It shall also include the following protections:
. Overheating,
. Mains over voltage and under voltage,
. Loss of input phase.
d. Motor protections:
The VFD shall be capable of maintaining its output performances when powered und
er the following
conditions:
. Mains voltage 380V - 500V +/- 10%,
. Mains frequency 50 or 60 Hz +/- 5%.
In case of mains under voltage, the VFD shall have a minimum AC under voltage po
wer loss ride
through of 200 milliseconds (10 cycles)
b. Input current
During start-up sequences speed shall increase smoothly and limitation current c
an be reached.
For power ratings below 18.5 kW and higher than 75 kW, to protect upstream netwo
rk, input AC choke,
shall be used:
. To reduce harmonic currents feedback,
. To limit input voltage spikes.
For power ratings ranging from 18.5 kW to 75 kW, the line choke is built into th
e VFD.
In installations where harmonic current circulation may affect the operation of
sensitive equipment,
global or local compensation of harmonic currents shall be provided.
In this case only auto adaptable harmonic compensators are acceptable to cope wi
th permanent
modification of harmonic content. (e.g.: active harmonic compensators).
In all ratings up to 75 kW, the VFD shall have an integrated RFI Filter.
5. Environmental conditions:
The VFD shall be capable of smooth motor start and stop by controlling accelerat
ion and
deceleration ramps.
As a minimum the VFD shall be capable of the following adjustable ramps shapes:
. Linear, S shaped, U shaped.
Duration of the ramps shall be factory set up at 3 s, and shall be site adjustab
le from 0.1 to
999.9 s (resolution 0.1s).
Adaptation of ramp times shall be automatic in the event of exceeding available
braking
torque.
9. Braking to standstill from low speed:
The braking shall be automatic by DC injection for 0.5 s when frequency passes b
elow 0.1 Hz.
The following shall be site adjustable from the keypad of the equipment:
. Level of current
. Frequency threshold,
. Injection time.
For power ratings ranging from 75 kW up to 630 kW, the fast stop operation allow
s to quickly stop the
motor by dissipating the power in the motor, motor cable and drive is possible.
This is a low cost
alternative for simple applications, which avoids using an external braking unit
.
10. Automatic current limitation:
The VFD shall include a feature to adapt the current limitation according to the
thermal characteristics
of the motor to avoid nuisance tripping.
Other Requirements
A. Motor and Inverter shall be of the same manufacturing group of company and th
e manufacturer
must be able to provide guarantee statement of performance of motor and drive sy
stem together.
B. Manufacturer must have its own subsidiary company of drive center based in UAE
with qualified
personnel for assistance and on site programming.
C. Inverter shall be rated for Variable Torque application for pump and fan contro
l and shall have a
minimum overload capacity of 120% for 60 seconds.
D. Soft-starter shall be designed for wide variation in input supply, from 380 V
to 460 V AC 10%,
with 48-62 Hz supply frequency.
E. Output voltage to be from 0 to maximum input voltage, pulse width modulated (
PWM) using IGBT s
with software adjustable switching frequency up to 12 kHz.
F. Inverter shall have Serial communications: RS232 port, RS 485 port-isolated.
G. Inverter shall have minimum but not limited to following software programmabl
e features.
Execution
Installation
A. Install starters, connect power and control as indicated.
B. Ensure correct fuses and overload devices elements are installed.
C. "Run" pilot lights shall be activated by a current signal from the equipment
circuit being served.
Test
A. Operate switches, contactors to verify correct functioning.
B. Perform starting and stopping sequence of contactors and relays.
C. Check the sequence controls, interlocking with other separate related starter
s, equipment, control
devices, operate as indicated.
D. Check and verify BMS Control/monitoring points.
E. Check, test, demonstrate proper functions of all protective devices and fault
discriminations/clearance.
Adjust and calibrate all trip and display settings to the entire satisfaction of
the Employer and the
Engineer.
14.12 Battery emergency power supply
General
Section Includes
A. Emergency power supply.
B. Remote trouble alarm indicator.
C. The Emergency Lighting System and all of its components shall be manufactured
by an ISO 9001 / 9002
certified company to meet the requirements of BS 5266 , EN 50171, EN 50172 and t
he local Civil
Defence and the equipment must be field- tested in the Middle East for a minimum
period of 5 years.
The product shall have local civil defence authority approvals.
Reference Standards
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Mos
t Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments an
d Supplements.
B. NFPA 111 - Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power S
ystems; National
Fire Protection Association ; 2010
C. BSEN 12461, BS 5266 , EN 50171, EN 50172 Emergency lighting and standby power
system
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide catalog and data sheets showing electrical characterist
ics and connection
requirements. Include unit ratings, dimensions, and finishes. Include performanc
e data for batteries.
B. Manufacturer s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and l
imitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of product.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified re
quirements.
A. Maintenance Data: Include battery maintenance and unit testing procedures.
Quality Assurance
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 70.
Rectifier
A.
Mains Supply
230 + 10% VAC single phase.50hz
Input Control
MCB to BS3871 Pt. 1, or BS4752 Part 1.
Fuse gear
HRC type BS88
Terminals
DIN rail mounted near to cable entry
Transformer
Double wound with earth screen to BS171.
Contactor
Standard contactors comply with the requirements of BS 5424
Charger
Constant voltage, current-limited type with electronic solid
state controller. Voltage is controlled to within 2% of setting
at up to 10% mains supply variations
Temperature Compensation
Fitted as standard on all units with lead acid cells. The
charger voltage is automatically adjusted with reference to
ambient temperature to optimize charging and battery life.
Test Push-button: Simulates mains failure
B.
Inverter
Output voltage:
Pre-settable in the range 220-240VAC. Unless otherwise
advised, the output will be set at 230VAC. The voltage
tolerance is 2% on loads of 0-100% of system rating.
Frequency:
50 + 0.01%. Standard setting 50Hz. Waveform: Sinusoidal
Voltage Regulation:
Static 2%, dynamic 6%.
Isolation:
2kv rms between input and output terminals.
Total Harmonic Distortion:
Less than 3% into a linear load.
Power Factor:
Will supply load in the 0.3 lag-0.3 lead range.
Overload:
200% for 10 seconds, 125% for 20 minutes without reduction
in output voltage.
Start-up Time:
Standard 30mS. Soft start up to 10 seconds if required.
Efficiency:
85-89%.
Low voltage shut down:
The inverter module(s) automatically shut down when the
battery discharges to a pre-set level. Re-set is following a
combination of the restoration of the mains supply and an
increase in battery voltage above the disconnect threshold
level.
Residual current drain when the disconnect circuit has
operated is less than 1mA per module.
Batteries
A. The Batteries shall be maintenance free sealed lead acid, gas recombination t
ype with a minimum
design life of 10 years. They shall have extremely low gas generation, low self-
discharge and have
permanently sealed pressure release vents.
B. The Batteries shall be sized to power the complete system for 3 hours followi
ng mains failure at
100% light output of all emergency lamps.
Central Monitoring
A. A Central Monitoring Control Panel shall be installed with each inverter syst
em.
B. The individual Central Monitoring Panel shall address each exit and emergency
fitting and label each
fitting with details in English text as follows:
1. Location details
2. Lamp type and Number
3. Failure information
4. Isolate / De-Isolate
5. Automatic test / Manual test
C. The facility of constant monitoring shall be available. Any exit sign or sub-
circuit failure shall be
immediately reported to the local monitoring panel and onward to all network pan
els. This facility
enables immediate response to fitting or / and area failures. This facility shou
ld not rely on automatic or
manual tests for failure indication.
Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install units plumb and level.
C. Provide interconnection between cabinets.
Reference Standards
IEEE 519
IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric
Power Systems; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004.
NEMA PE 1
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Specification and Performance Verification
;
National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edit
ion
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments
and Supplements.
BS EN 62040
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)
Submittal
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirement
s.
Provide battery rack dimensions; battery type, size, dimensions, and weight; det
ailed equipment out
lines, weight, and dimensions; location of conduit entry and exit; single-line d
iagram indicating
metering, control, and external wiring requirements; heat rejection and air flow
requirements.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets and technical data sheets to indicate ph
ysical data and electrical
performance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protectio
n, examination,
preparation, installation, and starting of product. Include equipment installati
on outline, connection
diagram for external cabling, internal wiring diagram, and written instruction f
or installation.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified re
quirements.
E. Operation Data: Description of operating procedures.
F. Maintenance Data: Description of servicing procedures; list of major componen
ts; recommended
remedial and preventive maintenance procedures; spare parts list.
Quality assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities w
ithin 300Killo meter
of Project.
C. Supplier Qualifications: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer wit
h minimum three years
documented experience.
D. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
Products
System Operation
A. The UPS shall be an on-line double conversion system designed to operate in t
he following modes :
1. Normal:
The UPS shall deliver power to critical loads without interruption. The rectifie
r/charger shall draw
alternating current (AC) from the mains and convert it into direct current (DC)
for the inverter. The
inverter shall convert it back into clean AC current for the load. The rectifier
/charger shall also
charge the battery.
2. Mains Power failure :
In the event of a mains failure, the critical loads shall be supported by the in
verter with power from
the battery.
B. Recharge Cycle:
When mains power has been re-instated, the rectifier/charger shall again supply
the load via the
inverter and recharges the battery.
C. Static bypass mode:
The static switch shall transfer the load to the bypass AC power in the event of
an inverter shutdown
without interrupting the supply of power to the critical loads. Transfer back oc
curs when the inverter has
returned to normal operation.
D. Maintenance by pass/ Test mode:
A manual bypass switch shall be used to isolate the inverter output and the stat
ic bypass for maintenance
purposes. Isolation is achieved without load interruption.
E. Mode of operation and UPS ratings
UPS shall be single module (non-redundant) with built-in static and maintenance
by-pass. Furthermore,
external bypass facility shall be provided and this bypass facility shall automa
tically switch to mains
power in case of total UPS failure period. A key switch has to be provided for m
anual changeover from
U.P.S to external bypass facility. External bypass facility has to be completely
monitored by BMS.
F. Rectifier/Charger:
A solid state six pulse rectifier, fully microprocessor controlled, shall conver
t the AC power from the
mains into regulated DC power. A temperature sensor shall be used to control tem
perature
compensation. The power shall be filtered to supply the inverter and charge the
battery. The
rectifier/charger shall be sized to support the inverter at full rated load and
simultaneously charge the
battery to 95% of its full capacity over a period equal to ten times the battery
backup duration. The
rectifier/charger shall be of modular construction to facilitate maintenance.
G. Input protection:
1. The input of the rectifier/charger shall be protected by fuses.
2. Input current shall be limited to 125% for the nominal input current.
H. Battery Bank :
1. Battery shall be maintenance free VRLA batteries (internal gas recombination
type) with a design life of
10years.
2. Inverter :
Operation:
. The inverter shall be made of three inverter legs with IGBT transistors and pu
lse width modulation
(PWM). The built-in output transformer shall be of the delta/zigzag type.
I. Output voltage and frequency 400VAC 50Hz
J. Thermal overloads
The inverter shall continue to operate for a maximum time that depends on the cu
rrent drawn, before
shutting down to protect the various components against excessive temperature ri
se.
. 2 hours from 1.05 in to 1.1In
. 30 mins from 1.1 to 1.15 In
. 10 mins from 1.15 In to 1.25 In
. 3 mins from 1.25 In to 1.35 In
. 1 min from 1.35In to 1.65 In
K. Steady state regulation
. 1% voltage for the RMS values of the phase to neutral and phase to phase volta
ges.
L. Synchronization range :
. Thermal overloads < 1.35 In: Same overload capability as the inverter ( not de
pendent on power
factor)
. Overloads > 1.35 In
5. Maintenance by pass :
. On -line UPS units, parallel redundant type shall be equipped with a maintenan
ce bypass which
may be used to transfer the load directly to Mains. This is carried out using th
ree switches. Step by
step help shall be provided on the front panel of the UPS when the doors are ope
n. Prior to
transferring the load to the maintenance bypass the inverter must be shut down.
6. Static by pass :
. Static bypass shall be sized for continuous operation under the following cond
itions :
. Transfer without interruption of power to the load
. The static bypass shall enable automatic transfer to the Main supply without i
nterruption of power
to the load, following detection by the control electronics of one of the follow
ing conditions:
. Load on inverter greater than the rated output
. Battery discharged to the end of its back up time, Main within tolerances.
. Inverter malfunction.
7. Microprocessor based control functions :
. UPS controls circuits shall be microprocessor based. All operations and parame
ters shall be
managed by internal software thus eliminating the need for manual settings and p
otentiometers.
Self-test and diagnostics circuits are used to detect and isolate a fault, right
down to the PC-board
itself or the connections. All individual circuits on the PC-board and all conne
ctions can be
checked.
8. Control and indication panel :
. The UPS shall be equipped with a control panel comprising system-status indica
tions that may be
used to control, monitor and display various system functions and parameters. Th
e graphic LCD
display shall be set to display data in English
. Monitoring System parameters : Parameters displayed (RMS)
. Input voltage phase-to-phase;
. Input current per phase;
. Bypass input voltage (phase to phase & phase to neutral);
. Bypass input frequency;
. Inverter output voltage (phase to phase & phase to neutral);
. Inverter output current per phase;
. Input, output current & bypass frequency;
. Percentage load at the inverter output;
. Inverter output power factor
. Inverter output in kVA and kW;
. DC voltage
. Load crest factor
. Battery current (charge/discharge);
. Battery backup time and remaining service life;
. Temperate in the battery cubicle
9. Mimic panel:
Button shall be used to stop the buzzer. However, a new malfunction shall activa
te the buzzer
again.
Full shut down :
. Pressing the "full shutdown" button activates:
. Shut down of the inverter
. Opening of the static switch on the bypass
. Opening of the battery circuit breaker;
. Opening of an isolated relay contact
Power rating
Refer to drawing.
Power Factor
0.8 lagging
Normal AC input
Rated voltage
400V 10%, three phase (adjustable 15%)
Frequency
50 Hz 10%
Bypass AC input
Voltage
400V 10% three phase + neutral
Frequency
50 Hz 10%
Output
400 V 1% three phase + neutral
Frequency
50 Hz 0.05 Hz
Permissable overload
150% for one minute and 125% for ten minutes
Battery back up
15 minutes each (minimum)
Battery type
Sealed Lead acid maintenance free batteries (10 years design life)
Overall Efficiency
Double-conversion load
up to 93%
ECO mode
up to 97%
Noise level
60dBA
Storage temperature
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide outline and mounting dimensions, weights, voltage and c
apacity ratings, fusing
and accessories.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by product
testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examinat
ion, preparation, and
installation of product.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of capacitors.
D. Maintenance Data: Include cell and fuse replacement instructions.
Standards
A. Capacitor shall comply with BS EN 60110, IEC 601110
B. Capacitor shall comply with BS EN 60831-1, BS EN 61921
Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Designer Qualifications: Design power factor correction under direct supervis
ion of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in United Arab
Emirates.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable
for the purpose specified and
indicated.
SITE CONDITIONS.
D. For general climatic conditions, refer and comply the specified project site
conditions. The capacitor bank
shall comply and perform satisfactorily at the below listed special design condi
tions as minimum:
(Where Gh is the sum of the KVA ratings of all harmonic generating devices (stat
ic convertors,
inverters, speed controllers, etc.) connected to the busbar from which the capac
itor bank is supplied
& Ssc is the 3-phase short circuit level in KVA at the terminals of the capacito
r bank)
c. The electrical system for all capacitor banks shall be 400V, 50Hz 3phase and
neutral, 4-wire solidly
earthed.
d. As the rating of the respective main distribution board. The breaking capacit
y of the switch-ing
devices shall be 25KA as minimum standard. Even under extreme conditions of majo
r short circuit
or mal-operation there shall be no danger to persons in the vicinity of the asse
mbly.
e. All equipment and components of the capacitor banks shall be capable of conti
nuous operation at
their full current and voltage ratings and without detriment or malfunction at s
ystem continuous
deviation of up to and including the following percentages of the normal values.
. Voltages 10%
. Frequency 5%
All components shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic, thermal and dielect
ric stresses
resulting from prospective short circuit currents without damage or injury to pe
rsonnel. Due to the
possible presence of harmonic currents and to manufacturing tolerances, componen
ts (MCCB /
Isolator, fuses, busbar & power cables) shall be oversized, and based on 1.5time
s nominal current.
f. The capacitors are automatically switched in steps and the peak value of tran
sient in-rush cur-rent
from the previously charged units in to the uncharged capacitor group at the ins
tant of switching it
into service must not exceed 100times the rated current of the capacitors in one
step of a multi-step
bank. Small series inductors may be used to achieve this limitation. The instant
aneous elements of
the protection devices shall be chosen suitably to avoid undesirable nuisance tr
ip-ping.
g. A typical capacitor bank shall be consist of, but not limited to the followin
g: - A suitably sized
enclosure with ventilation fan and air inlet filter unit.
3. Enclosure Construction
a. Capacitor bank enclosure shall be original from approved manufacturer.
b. Wherever the capacitor bank is part of the main distribution board and interc
onnected internally
with busbars, the en-closure be of same construction as the approved main distri
bution board.
c. Standalone capacitor panels shall be of simple cubicle design and robust cons
truction. Enclosure
shall be fabricated of minimum 1.5mm thick electro-galvanized sheet steel folded
and welded
construction. Hinged doors with concealed type of hinges shall be provided at th
e front. Removable
gland plates shall be available at the bottom or top of the enclosure, as per ca
ble en-try. Enclosure
shall be provided with suitable
d. Mounting plates to accommodate all the compo-nents. Wherever applicable, cubi
cles those are
similar in construction, height and depth may be joined together to assemble the
higher rated
capacitor banks.
e. Rear access type panels shall have a hinged door at front, door or cover at t
he rear for ac-cess. The
front door shall have a standard handles with an optional feature of having a ke
y lock, wherever
required.
f. The complete enclosure assembly shall be coated with durable scratch resistan
t textured paint
finish, epoxy powder polymerized at high temperatures to an approved color.
g. Unless specified otherwise, the stand alone capacitor banks shall be with ing
ress protection rating
of IP42 as per IEC standards as minimum.
h. The capacitor banks shall be of multi-step automatic switching type rated as
per the require-ment.
General arrangement of the capacitor bank shall be arranged in a systematic mann
er. The general
arrangement shall be preferably arranged in such a way that the incoming switchi
ng de-vice is
positioned vertically at the bottom corner of the cubicle after leaving sufficie
nt space for incomer
cables below the switching device. The busbar assembly shall be arranged to be p
osi-tioned above
the incoming switching device. The fuses for the capacitor steps shall be fitted
on one side of the
busbar assembly and interconnected with rigid busbar links. Switching contactors
for each step
shall be positioned next to the fuses and interconnected by suitably sized heat
resis-tant flexible
cables. The capacitor may be positioned next to the contactor or elsewhere at a
con-venient
location inside the cubicle and interconnected to the contactor by heat resistan
t flexible cables.
i. Capacitor bank, where provided as part of main distribution board, shall be a
rranged in such a way
that each step capacitor assembly including all the protection fuses and the swi
tching contac-tor
shall be assembled on a dedicated pate and shall be mounted inside a modular cub
icle, which shall
have a busbar chamber. The fuses in the capacitor assembly shall be interconnect
ed to the main
busbar by rigid busbars.
j. Arrangement of the capacitor bank assembly and the clearance between the comp
onents like
capacitors, de-tuning reactors etc. shall be strictly as per manufacturer recomm
endations and shall
be well arranged considering the heat dissipation and ventilation arrangement.
k. The live busbars shall be fully shrouded to comply at least to comply with Fo
rm-2 requirements as
per IEC standards.
l. Neutral busbar and earth busbar shall be positioned adjacent sides of the inc
oming switching device
facilitating easy connection of the cables.
m. Unless specified otherwise, the capacitor bank shall be always suitable for w
all mounting or floor
mounting. Wherever required, the capacitor bank shall be supplied as suitable fo
r top entry cables.
n. Ventilation fan and air inlet filter unit shall be provided for the capacitor
banks to facilitate bet-ter
heat dissipation. The ventilation fan shall be operated by thermostat and also b
y the switching of
the capacitor.
o. Where applicable and/or specified and/or required to comply with local regula
tions, detuning
reactor shall be provided for each steps of the capacitor bank. The detuning rea
ctor shall be integral
in the capacitor bank.
Busbars
A. Busbars shall be tin plated copper, rectangular and rigid construction. The p
hase busbars shall be
arranged systematically and assembled using insulators. The busbars shall be pro
tected poly
carbonate shrouds from all sides. The busbar assembly shall be fully shrouded (a
t least IP20), so
that no live parts are accessible. Phase identification shall be done systematic
ally. The ratings of
the main busbar assembly shall be to suit the incoming switching device rating.
The main busbars of
the capacitor banks are preferred and recommended to be in separate busbar chamb
er, wher-ever
applicable.
B. Tin plated copper earth busbar shall be located on both the sides of the pane
l..Tin plated copper neutral
busbar shall be located on side of the panel. Busbars shall be provided with a s
uitable termination
facility for connecting the main neu-tral and earth cable. Extra terminals shall
be provided on the earth
bar for bonding purpose.
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) as per the capacitor bank ratings and short
circuit fault
level shall be provided in the capacitor bank as incoming switching device. The
construction,
characteristics and features of the MCCB shall be same as used in the upstream m
ain distribution
boards.
B. Fuses
Power fuses shall be provided for protection of each step of the capacitor bank
to protect against
short circuit currents. The fuses shall be rated to suit the capacitor ratings a
nd the detuning reacttor
ratings, as applicable. Each phase of the capacitor element shall be protected i
ndividually by
fuse. The fuses shall comply with the applicable IEC standards.
C. Capacitors
1. Capacitors as per the ratings as shown on the drawings shall be provided in t
he capacitor bank. The
capacitors shall be suitable for operating at temperature up to +40C ambient.
2. The capacitor units shall comply with the applicable IEC standards. The capac
itors shall have a
rated operational voltage of 400/460V AC, 50Hz, and 3Phase and rated insulation
level of 6KV for
1 minute at 50Hz.The capacitors shall be suitable for withstanding a current ove
rload of at least
30% and a voltage overloads of at least 10% as standard. The tolerance on capaci
tance values shall
be in the range of 0 to +10%. The current consumption of the capacitor unit shal
l not exceed
2.2A/Kvar.
3. The capacitors shall be of modular design and suitable for vertical or horizo
ntal mounting. The
capacitors shall be of dry-type low loss units comprising self-healing metallize
d polypropylene film
in the form of a two-film roll and shall not require any gas or liquid impregnat
ion. Use of poly
chlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and oil as capacitor impregnation will not be permitt
ed.
4. The Capacitors shall be made of insulating material providing them with doubl
e insulation and
avoiding the need for a ground connection. Plastic enclosure shall be used for t
he capacitors. The
group of elements forming a three phase capacitor unit shall be installed in pla
stic enclosure. The
plastic material used for enclosure shall provide excellent mechanical propertie
s and maximum
self-extinguishing ratings. Each capacitor shall be provided with three terminal
pads and shall not
require earth connection.
5. The capacitor units shall be protected by a high-quality system which switche
s off the capacity-tor
if an internal fault occurs. The protection system shall be integrated in to eac
h capacitor element to
provide total safety. The protection system shall protect the capacitor against
high current faults
and low current faults. Protection against high currents shall be provided by an
HRC cartridge fuse
and protection against low current faults shall be provided by an overpressure d
isconnect device
and the HRC fuse. The electrical current in the capacitor on both high current a
nd low current
faults shall be always opened by a standard HRC fuse. The capacitor shall have s
elf-healing
characteristics.
6. The capacitors shall be designed so as to care of the fault pressure inside t
he capacitor element is
always limited to a value far lower than the maximum admissible pressure.
7. Each capacitor element shall have an in-built discharge resistor to fully dis
charge the capacitor
before energizing and re-charging the capacitor to minimize the voltage transien
ts.
8. Wherever the distribution network system is highly polluted (Gh > Ssc/70), de
tuning reactors shall
be used in conjunction with the capacitors to make an assembly tuned to 190Hz fo
r a 50Hz
network. The detuning rectors shall be from the same manufacturer of the capacit
or. Wherever the
system is very highly polluted filter shall be used in conjunction with the capa
citors.
E. Reactors
1. Detuned reactors shall be provided where high harmonic pollution (Gh > Ssc/70
) is present.
Detuned reactors shall be designed to protect the capacitors by preventing ampli
fication of the
harmonic present on the network. Detuned reactors shall be connected in series w
ith the capacitors.
The capacitor voltage rating shall be increased by 10% when used with the detune
d reactors.
2. Detuned reactors shall be three phase iron core with copper winding. Detuned
reactors shall be
natural air cooled, dry type with aluminum foil windings insulated between layer
s which are
impregnated under vacuum.
3. High temperature cut-off limit switch shall be embedded in the windings of th
e detuned reactor to
disconnect its capacitor from the circuit and the network and reconnect automati
cally back in the
network when the temperature is normal.
4. Detuned reactors shall be segregated from other equipments, which shall be pr
eferably lo-cated at
the top of the panel for better heat dissipation and to avoid transfer of the he
at to the adjacent
components. Wherever detuned reactors are provided forced ventilation shall be p
rovided for the
panel.
5. Detuned reactor shall at least meet the following technical characteristics:
a. Tolerance: +1- 5%
b. Tolerance between phase: Lmax 1 Lmin <1.07
c. Turning order: 4.3 (relative impedance: 5.4%)
d. Harmonic current spectrum for turning order 4.3:
I3=2%I1
15=69% I1
17=19% I1
I11= 6% I1
Permissible over load fundamental current: 1.1 times the nominal current (I1)
Insulation level: 1.1KV
Test voltage (coil to core): 3KV 1 minute
F. Capacitor Switching Contactors
Type Test:
The capacitor (loose capacitor) and other applicable components shall be type te
sted in accor-dance
with the IEC standards from a reputed and approved type testing laboratory and c
ertified by a
competent authority.
Routine Test
The panel assembler shall perform the routine test and provide the test certific
ates as defined in IEC
standards. The routine test shall include but not limited to the following:
. Inspection of the assembly including inspection of wiring and electrical opera
tional test
. (IEC Clause 8.3.1)
. Dielectric test & Insulation resistance test (IEC Clause 8.3.2 & 8.3.4)
. Checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the protec
tive circuits
. (IEC Clause 8.3.3)
. Functional test as per the approved test procedure.
Execution
Installation
A. Install capacitors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide equipment supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.
Lightning Protections
General
Section Includes
A. Strike (air) terminals and interconnecting conductors.
B. Grounding and bonding for lightning protection.
Reference standards
A. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; Nat
ional Fire Protection
Association; 2011.
B. UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Curr
ent Edition, Including
All Revisions.
C. BS EN/IEC 62305 1-4 Lightning Protection systems
Administrative Requirements
A. Coordination with Concrete Work: Coordinate the embedding of lightning protec
tion components in
concrete.
B. Coordination with Roofing Work: Ensure adequate attachment of strike terminal
s and conductors
without damage to roofing.
C. Pre installation Meeting: Convene a meeting at least at least two weeks prior
to commencement of any
work affected by lightning protection system requirements to discuss prerequisit
es and coordination
required by other installers; require attendance by representatives of installer
s whose work will be
affected.
Submittals
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate location and layout of air terminals, grounding elect
rodes, and bonding
connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, a
nd conductor sizes, and
connection and termination details.
Quality Assurance
A. Maintain one copy of each referenced system design standard on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in lightning protection equ
ipment with minimum
three years documented experience.
C. Designer Qualifications: Person or entity, employed by installer, who special
izes in lightning protection
system design with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Installer Qualifications: Capable of providing the specified certification of
the installed system.
E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in lightning protection system
design with minimum three
years documented experience.
F. Field Quality Control Testing Agency Qualifications: Firm capable of and expe
rienced in grounding and
bonding testing with documented experience and minimum of three project referenc
es.
Products
General
The Contractor shall provide a lighting protection system completely in accordan
ce with:
BSEN 62305 (I - IV): 2006; NFPA 780
CENELEC standard for Lightning protection BS EN 50164-1: 2000; NFPA 780
Lightning Protection Components (LPC) Part 1: Requirements for connection compon
ents.
BS EN 50164-2: 2000; NFPA 780
Lightning Protection Components (LPC) Part 2; NFPA 780: Requirements for conduct
ors and earth
electrodes.
Air Terminations
The lightning protection installation shall consist of air termination network,
down conductors, earthing and
bonding to prevent side flashing
.
The Contractor shall submit the Risk Evaluation and the achieved Lightning Prote
ction Level (LPL)
calculation based on BS EN 62305 - Part 2. In the absence of such an evaluation
employment of LPL-I
will be deemed mandatory. The Contractor shall then submit the shop drawings bas
ed on the achieved
LPL and shall employ the air termination network consisting of mesh in co-ordina
tion with rolling sphere
(size as per the protection level). All the service entries to the structure i.e
. power line, telecom line, , water
line etc. shall be protected by installing current surge protectors (either 25KA
or 18.75KA or 12.5 KA
rating), depending on the Lightning Protection Level (LPL) to be used to bring d
own the risk (R) below the
tolerable risk level (R1 ).
The Contractor shall use 25x3 mm bare copper tape of 99.99% purity (complying wi
th BS EN 62305) to
form the air-termination mesh on the uppermost part of the structure (typically
the roof)
Air termination network should be extended and it s determined by using rolling sp
here method.
This method involves rolling an imaginary sphere of 20m or 30m or 45m or 60m rad
ius (depending on the
Lightning Protection Level to be used) over structure to require protection.
Top of the Minerat, Haram Buildingshall have air termination network and it shal
l be connected to
lightning protection network.
All the fixing clips for the copper tape shall be metallic (complying with Class
'H' of the electrical
testing based on BSEN 62305) and shall be fixed at an interval of 500mm (1000 mm
fixing distance
for fixing conductors on vertical surface up to 20m from the ground level and on
the horizontal surface
i.e. roof)
The down conductors shall be placed around the periphery of the building with a
suitable junction box to be
recessed at approx. 500mm above the ground for the test link.
Aluminum frame of the glass panel shall be bonded to down conductors as per the
rolling sphere spacing by
using bi-metallic clamps complying with BSEN 62305
The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10kA (
8/20 sine waveform)
between any two conductors (phase to neutral, phase to earth and neutral to eart
h).
The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibilit
y levels.
Unless otherwise stated, the peak transient let-through voltage shall not exceed
600 volts, for protectors
with a nominal working voltage of 230 volts, when tested in accordance with BS E
N 62305 Part - 4
(6kV 1.2/50 ps open circuit voltage, 3kA 8/20ps short circuit current).
Its peak transient let-through voltage shall not be exceeded for all combination
s of conductors:
. Phase to neutral
. Phase to earth
. Neutral to earth
The Contractor shall also install transient over voltage protectors on all data
communication/signal/telephone
lines in order to protect equipment connected to the line, against transient ove
r voltages.
Protectors shall be rated for Location Category - High Exposure Level (as define
d by BS EN 62305-4:2006),
unless contrary information dictates a lower Exposure Level.
The protector must not impair the system's normal operation. It should not:
. suppress the system's normal signal voltage
. restrict the system's bandwidth or signal frequency
. introduce excessive in-line resistance
. Cause signal reflections or impedance mismatches (high frequency systems only)
.
The protector will have a low transient let-through voltage for tests conducted
in accordance with BS /EN
62305 -4:2006 (5kV 101700ps test).
Equipotential Bonding
The Contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination between the Structural, Civil,
Electrical, Mechanical and
the Cladding contractor.
All installation details shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to commencement
of work. The Contractor
shall obtain an inspection certificate from the manufacturer or its authorized r
epresentative towards the
satisfactory installation of the system and that proper material in accordance t
o the above standard has been
used.
For structures taller than 30 meters, the Contractor shall install the equipoten
tial bonding at either the
basement or the ground.. Wherever protection of internal systems against over-vo
ltages caused by lightning
discharge requires SPDs, these shall conform to BSEN 62305 - Part 4.
The gas, water and other metallic systems shall all be bonded directly to the eq
uipotential bar located inside
but close to the outer wall near the ground floor or basement level. The power c
able shall be bonded to the
equipotential bonding bar via a suitable SPD. The screen of the antenna cable or
any shielded power supply
shall also be bonded to the equipotential bar.
Service entry SPDs shall be provided for metallic electrical services only - wat
er do not fall under this
category. Water pipe need to be directly bonded. The service entry data and tele
com lines can handle 2.5kA
(10ps/350 ps) per line, so the Contractor shall provide suitable SPDs in accorda
nce to the above specification
as per BSEN 62305 - Part 4
Since the service entrance SPDs are designed to protect against dangerous sparki
ng only as per BS EN
62305-3. The Contractor shall need to fit additional protection at the sub- dist
ribution and near equipment to
protect electronic equipment to BS EN 62305 -4. Both types of SPD are a required
in accordance with this
BS EN standard if the risk assessment demands this.
The bonding bar shall be located close to the main distribution board and shall
be connected to earth
termination network at 5.0 ohm, with a very short length conductor not exceeding
10 meters in length.
All the bonding bars at different levels shall be connected to each other, which
in-turn is earthed at 5.0 ohm.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Coordinate work with installation of roofing and exterior and interior finish
es.
Installation
A. Install in accordance with referenced system standards and as required for sp
ecified certification.
B. Connect conductors using mechanical connectors or exothermic welding process;
protect adjacent
construction elements and finishes from damage.
C. Connect conductors using mechanical connectors.
D. Connect conductors using exothermic welding process; protect adjacent constru
ction elements and finishes
from damage.
15 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
15.1 Fire detection and alarm system
Scope and related documents
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishin
g of all labour equipment,
materials, and performances of all operations in connection with the installatio
n of the Fire Alarm system
as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.
C. The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72
, NFPA71, Local Code
Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 7
60.
D. The work covered by this section of the specifications is to be coordinated w
ith the related work as
specified elsewhere under the project specifications.
E. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
F. UL Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated
G. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
H. ANSI American National Standards Institute
I. ANSCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
J. BS 5839-1:2002 - British Standard Code of Practice
Quality Assurance
A. Each and all items of the fire Alarm system shall be listed as a product of a
single fire alarm system
manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (
UL), and shall bear the
"U.L." label. All control equipment is to be listed under UL category as a singl
e control unit.
B. The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification
is to be provided by a
manufacturer (independent dealers and/or distributors will NOT be considered) wh
o has been engaged in
production of this type (software driven) of equipment for at least ten (10) yea
rs, and has a fully-equipped
service organization.
C. All control equipment must have transient protection devices to comply with U
L864 requirements.
General
A. Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm system as described herein and as s
hown on the plans; to be
wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition.
The system shall use closed loop initiating device circuits with individual zone
supervision, individual
indicating appliance circuit supervision, in coming and standby power supervisio
n. Include a control panel,
manual pull stations, automatic fire detectors, emergency phone jack, annunciato
rs, and interface modules
for control& monitoring purposes, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet box
es, junction boxes, and all
other necessary material for a complete operating system.
The Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Control panel shall allow for loading or edi
ting special instructions
and operating sequences as required. The system is to be capable of onsite progr
amming to accommodate
and facilitate expansion, building parameter changes or changes as required by l
ocal codes. All software
operations are to be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fir
e alarm control panel.
Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in m
emory.
B. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, initiation circuits shall be
individually configurable on site
to provide either alarm/trouble operation, alarm only, trouble only, current lim
ited alarm, no non-latching
circuit or a alarm verification circuit.
C. All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard product of a single m
anufacturer and shall display
the manufacturer's name on each component.
Acceptable Manufacure
Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Refer to list of Acceptable Manufacturers enclosed with the specification.
B. Being listed as an acceptable Manufacturer in no way relieves obligation to p
rovide all equipment and
features in accordance with these specifications. The system shall be supplied b
y a specialist subcontractor/
service organization having office and service facility in Al Ain. The manufactu
rer and service
organization shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the fire protective s
ignaling industry.
Submittals
A. Manufacturers Technical Data: During the time of the contract and before subs
tantial completion of the
electrical installation, submit to consultant three (3) copies of descriptive li
terature, technical data,
maintenance recommendations, catalogues etc.
B. Installation Instructions: Submit the Complete manufacturers installation ins
tructions of all the products
used.
C. Calculations: Forward battery sizing calculations for standby battery power s
upply.
D. Interfacing details: Details of interlacing with the various systems and sequ
ence of operation in case of alarm
activation/fire situations cause and effect program shall be submitted for consu
ltant review / approval. The
contractor shall obtain approval from the local civil defence authority having j
urisdiction for the fire alarm
system installation for any changes that may be made to the original drawings as
approved for the project.
Detailed shop drawings shall be prepared and submitted for consultant approval p
rior to submission to the
local civil Defence Authority. All shop drawings shall be approved by the local
civil Defence Authority
prior to proceeding with the works.
E. Shop drawings: Shop drawings shall include, without being limited to, the fol
lowing drawings prepared
specifically for this Works: Overall system diagrams, complete with wiring infor
mation. Identify system
components, terminations and connections, boxes and equipment. As-built layouts
marked on a set of
building plans indicating panels, annunciators, detectors, pull stations, signal
s, conduit routes, wiring
information junction boxes and pull boxes. On completion of the installation and
testing, submit to the
consultant three copies of all Shop drawings, diagrams, operating instructions a
nd descriptive literature,
assembled in loose leaf binders and identified by Works.
Maintenance Service
Maintenance Service Contract: Provide maintenance of fire alarm systems and equi
pment for a period of 12
months, using factory-authorized service representatives.
Products
General
Provide a complete, addressable, microprocessor-based fire alarm and voice evacu
ation system with
initiating devices, notification appliances, and monitoring & control devices as
indicated on the drawings and
as specified herein.
Software
The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing instructions and opera
ting sequences as necessary.
The system shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansi
on and facilitate
changes in operation. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile
programmable memory within
the fire alarm control unit. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase
the instructions stored in
memory.
History Logs
The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chro
nological order for the
purpose of recreating an event history. A separate alarm and trouble log shall b
e provided.
Recording of Events
Record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events by means of system printer. Th
e printout shall include the
type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), the device identification, date
and time of the occurrence. The
printout differentiates alarm signals from all other printed indications.
Wiring/Signal Transmission
A. System connections for detection circuits shall be Class A.
B. System connections for initiating signaling circuits and notification applian
ce circuits shall be Class B.
C. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at
the FACP. Provide a
distinctive indicating audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation.
Required Functions
The following are required system functions and operating features:
A. Priority of Signals: Alarm events have highest priority. Subsequent alarm eve
nts are queued in the order
received and do not affect existing alarm conditions. Priority Two, Supervisory
and Trouble events have
second, third, and fourth-level priority respectively. Signals of a higher-level
priority take precedence
over signals of lower priority even though the lower-priority condition occurred
first. Annunciate all
events regardless of priority or order received.
B. Annunciation: Operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be
annunciated at the FACP
and the remote annunciator, if applicable, indicating the location and type of d
evice.
C. General Alarm: A system general alarm shall include:
1. Indication of alarm condition at the FACP and annunciator.
2. Identification of the device that is the source of the alarm at the FACP and
the annunciator.
3. Operation of audible and visible notification devices throughout the building
until silenced at FACP.
4. Shutting down supply and return fans serving zone where alarm is initiated, i
f applicable.
5. Closing smoke dampers on system serving zone where alarm is initiated, if app
licable.
6. Initiation of smoke control sequence through the building temperature control
system, if applicable.
7. Initiation of elevator recall in accordance with ASME/ANSI A17.1, when specif
ied detectors are
activated.
D. Supervisory Operations:
1. Upon activation of a supervisory device such as fire pump power failure, low
air pressure switch, and
tamper switch, the system shall operate as follows:
a. Activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED
at the control unit and
the graphic annunciator.
b. Pressing the Supervisory Acknowledge Key will silence the supervisory audible
signal while
maintaining the Supervisory LED "on" indicating off- normal condition.
c. Record the event in the FACP historical log.
d. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station.
2. Restoring the condition shall cause the Supervisory LED restore system to nor
mal.
E. Alarm Silencing: If the Alarm Silence button is pressed, all audible and visibl
e alarm signals shall
cease operation.
F. System Reset
1. The System Reset button shall be used to return the system to its normal state.
Display Messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps ( In Pro
gress , Reset
Completed ) as they occur. The system shall verify all circuits or devices are res
tored prior to resetting
the system to avoid the potential for re-alarming the system. The display messag
e shall indicate
Alarm Present, System Reset Aborted.
2. Should an alarm condition continue, the system will remain in an alarmed stat
e.
G. Drill:
H. Walk test:
The system shall have the capacity of 8 programmable passcode protected one pers
on testing groups,
such that only a portion of the system need be disabled during testing. The actu
ation of the enable one
person test program at the control unit shall activate the One Person Testing mode
of the system as
follows:
1. The city circuit connection and suppression release circuits shall be bypasse
d for the testing group.
2. Control relay functions associated to one of the 8 testing groups shall be by
passed.
3. The control unit shall indicate a trouble condition.
4. The alarm activation of any initiation device in the testing group shall caus
e the audible notification
appliances to sound a voice announcement code to identify the device zone.
5. The unit shall automatically reset itself after signalling is complete.
6. Any momentary opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiri
ng shall cause the audible
signals to voice announce sound for 4 seconds indicating the trouble condition.
Power Requirements
A. The control unit shall receive 240 VAC power via a dedicated fused disconnect
circuit.
B. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the
entire system upon loss of
normal 240 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with
30 minutes of alarm
operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to
battery standby upon power
failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.
C. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be in
dividually fused at the
control unit.
D. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failur
e will be indicated at the
control unit. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incom
ing power is present.
E. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or d
isconnection of the battery
shall be indicated at the control unit.
F. Loss of primary power shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP. FACP shall in
dicate when the system is
operating on an alternate power supply.
G. Fire System should use sealed lead acid batteries.
J. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Panel shall include an 854 characte
r, expanded content
multi-line QVGA LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and component status
messages and shall
include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands. The system
shall have the
capability to provide expanded content, multi-line, operator interface displays
as indicated on the
drawings and specifications. The expanded content multi-line displays shall be Q
uarter-VGA (QVGA) or
larger and be capable of supporting a minimum of 854 standard ASCII characters t
o minimize or
eliminate the levels of navigation required for access to information when respo
nding to critical
emergencies and abnormal system conditions. The QVGA operator interface shall pr
ovide operator
prompts and six context sensitive soft-keys for intuitive operation.
3. Bitmap file import for operator interface display of site plan and background
watermark images. Site
plan status icons shall indicate area status for highest priority active events.
4. Expanded content, multi-line displays shall have the capability to provide Du
al-Language operation as
indicated on the drawings and specifications.
5. Language selection shall be via a switch on the operator interface panel. Ope
rator interface panels
shall support instant-language-switchover during runtime to allow the operator t
o toggle between
languages each time the language selection switch is operated, without requiring
complicated multistep
processes.
6. Both one-byte and two-byte characters shall be supported.
K. Voice Alarm: Provide an emergency communication system, integral with the FAC
P, including voice
alarm system components, microphones, amplifiers, and tone generators.
Features include:
1. Amplifiers comply with UL 1711, "Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Sys
tems." Amplifiers
shall provide an onboard local mode temporal coded horn tone as a default backup
tone. Test switches
on the amplifier shall be provided to test and observe amplifier backup switchov
er. Each amplifier
communicates to the host CPU and allows voltage and current values to be accesse
d from the fire
alarm control panel operator interface. Each amplifier shall be capable of perfo
rming constant
supervision for non-alarm audio functions such as background music and general p
aging.
2. Each amplifier shall be configured as a dual channel design with 100% one-to-
one back-up (to meet
EN requirements).
3. Eight channel digitally multiplexed audio for systems that require more than
two channels of
simultaneous audio. Up to 8 channels of audio shall be multiplexed on either a s
tyle 4 or style 7
twisted pair.
4. Emergency voice communication audio controller module shall provide up to 32
minutes of message
memory for digitally stored messages. Provide supervised connections for master
microphone and up
to 5 remote microphones. Zone Coded Signaling shall be possible using voice spli
cing in order to
create coded messages from the voice library, example: Fire Room in men daily pr
ayer hall.
5. Status annunciator indicating the status of the various voice alarm speaker z
ones and the status of fire
fighter telephone two-way communication zones. Speaker select and indication sha
ll be a standard
feature of the Fire Alarm Panel with status of Speaker
Description: Addressable double action type, red LEXAN or metal, and finished in
red with molded,
raised-letter operating instructions of contrasting color. Station will mechanic
ally latch upon operation
and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common with the control
units.
B. Smoke Detectors
General: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Syst
ems."
Include the following features:
1. Smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectric type. Where acceptable per manu
facturer specifications.
2. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification.
3. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC, nominal.
4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actu
ation to restore normal
operation.
5. Each detector head shall contain an LED that will flash each time it is scann
ed by the Control Unit. In
alarm condition, the detector head sensor base LED shall be on steady.
6. Each detector base shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provi
de for easy alarm testing
at the detector location.
7. Each sensor shall be scanned by the Control Unit for its type identification
to prevent inadvertent
substitution of another sensor type. Upon detection of a wrong device , the control
unit shall operate
with the installed device at the default alarm settings for that sensor; 2.5% ob
scuration for
photoelectric sensor, 135-deg F and 15-deg F rate-of-rise for the heat sensor, b
ut shall indicate a
Wrong Device trouble condition.
8. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and
RFI.
9. Addressability: Sensors include a communication transmitter and receiver in t
he mounting base
having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP.
Sensor address shall be
located in base to eliminate false addressing when replacing sensors.
10. Removal of the sensor head for cleaning shall not require the setting of add
resses.
True Alarm sensor bases shall be compatible with all models of True Alarm sensor
s. Each base is
capable of communicating sensor values to the panel if a "wrong device type" tro
uble condition is
present. The panel will continue to monitor for alarms and troubles using the de
fault setting for the
wrong device until the proper type is installed or the program is changed.
Each sensor base shall contain a LED that will flash each time it is scanned by
the control panel (once
every 4 seconds). When the control panel determines that a sensor is in the alar
m or a trouble condition,
the control panel shall command the LED on that sensor's base to turn on a stead
y indicating the
abnormal condition. Sensor which does not provide a visible indication of an abn
ormal condition at the
sensor location shall not be acceptable.
Each sensor base shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide fo
r easy alarm testing at the
sensor location. The sensor base shall annunciate power-on alarm and trouble con
ditions locally at the
base.
F. Isolator Module
Isolator module provides short circuit isolation for addressable initiating devi
ces wiring. Isolator shall
be listed to UL 864 and installed every 20 devices. Addressable devices with bui
lt- in isolator is also
acceptable.
1. Report faults to the host FACP.
2. On-board Yellow LED provides module status.
3. After the wiring fault is repaired, the Isolator modules shall test the lines
and
automatically restore the connection.
The HARAM building open area Dome shall be provided with Open Area Smoke Imaging
Detection
(OSID) system as indicated in the drawings. The OSID shall support up to 7 Emitt
ers with a single
Imager making it easy to deploy in unusually shaped areas. The OSID shall use a
sophisticated
Algorithm to map and compare the strength of infrared (IR) and ultraviolet (UV)
light signals from
detectors configured in the space. The system proposed shall have the following
features:
1. Maximum detection range up to 150 m
2. Status LEDs for fire, trouble and power
3. Easy alignment with large adjustment and 3D viewing angle
4. Simple DIP switch configuration
5. Dual wavelength, LED based smoke detection
6. Limited maintenance requirements
7. Conventional alarm interface for fire system integration
8. Configurable alarm threshold
Emitters shall be battery powered or wired and placed at different heights adjus
ting easily to modern
design of the dome area. The installation shall use minimum wiring along the wal
ls while leaving the
ceilings untouched.
H. Standard Alarm-Notification Appliances
1. Visible/Only: Strobe shall be listed to UL 1971. The V/O shall consist of a x
enon flash tube and
associated lens/reflector system. V/O appliances shall be provided with differen
t minimum flash
intensities of 15cd, 75cd and 110cd. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to i
ndicate the listed candela
rating of the specific Visible/Only appliance.
2. Audible/Visible: Combination Audible/Visible (A/V) Notification Appliances sh
all be listed to UL
1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associ
ated lens/reflector
system. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela ra
ting of the specific strobe.
The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA @ 24VDC. The audibl
e/visible
enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4 square e
lectrical box,
without the use of special adapters or trim rings.
I. Speakers
Equipment Installation
Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as show
n on the plans.
Training
Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to demonstra
te the system and train
Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.
Quality assurance
A. The systems control contractor shall have been in business a minimum of five
years and be the
authorized installing contractor for the manufacturer of the BACnet components.
B. Control system shall be engineered, programmed and supported completely by re
presentative s local
office that must be within 75 miles of project site.
Submittals
A. Drawings
The system supplier shall submit engineered drawings, control sequence, and bill
of materials for
approval.
B. System Documentation
Warranty
A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expen
ses for a period of one year
from completion of system acceptance.
B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall prov
ide on-site or off-site
service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor.
C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software.
Products
Operator s Workstation
Workstation Hardware
A. Provide operator s workstation at location noted on the plans.
B. Workstation/Server Computer Minimum Requirements
1. Intel i5, 2.5 GHz or better
2. 4 GB RAM or better
3. 500GB hard disk or better
4. High-performance graphics adapter
5. Ethernet 10/100/1000 network interface card
6. Keyboard, monitor, mouse, and DVD-RW
7. Windows 7 Professional or Home Premium
8. Color Printer (Inkjet, Color Dye or Laser)
Building Controller
A. All communication with operator workstation and all application controllers s
hall be via BACnet.
Building controller shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions of a 3-way BAC
net router. Controller
shall route BACnet messages between the high-speed LAN (Ethernet 10/100MHz), mas
ter slave token
passing (MS/TP) LANs, a point-to-point (PTP RS 232) connection and modem.
1. Each MS/TP LAN must be software configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps.
2. The RJ-45 Ethernet connection must accept either 10Base-T or 100Base-TX BACne
t over twisted
pair cable (UTP).
BACnet Conformance
A. Building Controller shall as a minimum support Point-to-Point (PTP), MS/TP an
d Ethernet BACnet
LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs as a native BACne
t device and shall
support simultaneous routing functions between all supported LAN types.
B. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Val
ue, Binary Value,
Calendar, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program and Schedule object t
ypes. All proprietary
object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided
as part of the submittal
data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary informa
tion.
C. The Building Controller shall comply with the BACnet specification for IP con
nections. This device
shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork, while using the same Ether
net LAN for non-IP
communications to other BACnet devices on the LAN. Must support interoperability
on wide area
networks (WANs) and campus area networks (CANs) and function as a BACnet Broadca
st Management
Device (BBMD)
Schedules
Each building controller shall support a minimum of 250 BACnet Schedule Objects
and 250 BACnet
Calendar Objects.
Logging Capabilities
A. Each building controller shall log as minimum 1000 trend logs. Any object in
the system (real or
calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the opera
tor s workstation.
B. Logs may be viewed both on-site and off-site via remote communication.
C. Building controller shall periodically upload trended data to networked opera
tor s workstation for long
term archiving if desired.
D. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third-
party spreadsheet or database
programs.
Enclosures
A. All controllers, power supplies and relays shall be mounted in enclosures.
B. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 when located in a clean, dry, indoor environment. In
door enclosures shall
be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a clean environment.
C. Enclosures shall have hinged, locking doors.
Water Meter
All water meter must have data logging capability and be connected to a central
monitoring system so that
information on the interior water consumption can be recorded. The monitoring sy
stem must have, 4 at a
minimum, the following capability:
A. Provide hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annual water consumption for each
major use.
B. Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months and years for trend analy
sis
C. Determine out of- range values to alert building operators to unusually high con
sumption; and
D. Record peak water consumption for each major use.
Energy Meter
All electric meter must have data logging capability and be connected to a centr
al monitoring system
so that information on the interior energy consumption can be recorded. The moni
toring system must
have, at a minimum, the following capability:
A. Provide hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annual energy consumption for each
major use.
B. Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months and years for trend analy
sis.
C. Determine out of- range values to alert building operators to unusually high con
sumption; and
D. Record peak energy consumption for each major use.
Execution
Examination
Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and ver
ify that such work is complete
to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.
Installation (General)
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections insta
llation and programming
required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences
of operation and point
schedules.
System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the system.
They shall be logically
laid out for easy use by the owner. Provide outside air temperature indication o
n all system displays
associated with economizer cycles.
B. Run Time Totalization
At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored equ
ipments. Warning
limits for each point shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes.
C. Trendlog
All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability t
o be automatically
trended.
D. Alarm
All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected binary input alarm points shall
be prioritized and
routed with alarm message.
E. Database Save
Training
A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and eq
uipment.
B. Provide system operator s training to include (but not limited to) such items a
s the following:
modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, ex
ecution of commands and
request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of 3 persons.
C. Provide on-site training above as required, up to 16 hours as part of this co
ntract.
Demonstration
A. Provide systems demonstration.
B. Demonstrate complete operating system to owner's representative.
C. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted
for proper operation.
Sequence of operation
General
Provide a complete and operational building automation system based on the follo
wing points. The
determined point list is the minimum amount of points that are to be provided. I
f additional points are
required to meet the sequence of operation, they will be provided.
BACnet Object List
The following points as defined for each piece of equipment are designated as fo
llows:
A. Binary Out (BO) - Defined as any two-state output (start/stop) (enable/disabl
e), etc.
B. Binary In (BI) - Defined as any two-state input (alarm, status), etc.
C. Analog In (AI) - Defined as any variable input (temperature) (position), etc.
D. Analog Out (AO) - Defined as any electrical variable output. 0 20mA, 4 20mA and 0 1
0VDC are the
only acceptable analog outputs. The driver for analog outputs must come from bot
h hardware and
software resident in the controllers. Transducers will not be acceptable under a
ny circumstance.